Chapters I. and II. are, with alterations, from my short
book The Standardization of Error, published some years
ago by W. W. Norton & Company and now out of print.
Chapter III. is but slightly changed from an article that
originally appeared in The American Mercury, May, 1927.
Chapter IV. is adapted from an address which I gave before
the American Philosophical Society of Philadelphia, January
2, 1931. About the first ten thousand words of Chapter V.
appeared in The American Mercury of July, 1927, but much
additional information has been added. Chapter VI. is published
with slight changes from an article entitled, That
‘Frozen’ North which appeared in Maclean’s Magazine,
Toronto, November 15, 1929.
The publishers regret that owing to Mr.
Stefansson’s sudden departure on an extended
journey he was unable to read the proofs of this
manuscript.
IT IS SAID THAT BACON CONSIDERED ALL KNOWLEDGE HIS PROVINCE.
But the sciences of today are so many and complex
that a single Baconian view of them is no longer possible,
and perversions of thought and action result because our intellectual
horizon has been narrowed to a part of the field.
From a realization of this have come various attempts to
co-ordinate the sciences to permit a unifying view of the
whole. Comte made one of these a century ago in his
Positive Philosophy. There have been many since.
But if we pause to state clearly the case against the standardization
of knowledge, the essential absurdity becomes so
patent that we have to recall the numerous failures to convince
ourselves that anyone was ever foolish enough even to
try it.
Consider for instance the physiology of the human skin or
the composition of a dust nebula. In these fields, among
others, the accepted facts of a dozen years ago have become
the error and folklore of today. You standardize knowledge,
and while you are at the job the knowledge changes. Long
before the thing can be done adequately it has ceased being
worth doing at all.
Then why are we continually attempting this hopeless
task? Partly, let us say, from irrepressible human optimism,
which leads us to think that any desirable thing is possible.
Partly, also, because of unclear analogizing from fields that
seem related but are not. One of these analogies is from business.
If you have on hand, on July 1st, a pair of socks, assuming
honest and successful management, you will have them
still on hand on August 1st, or else cash in your till to correspond.
But, in spite of unlimited honesty and efficiency, you
have no guarantee that an idea on hand on July 1st may not
have been simply removed by August 1st without any equivalent
remaining. You may have discovered that month, for
instance, reasonable assurance that the moon is not made of
green cheese, without being able to get any clear idea as to
what it is made of.
The reader may here jump to the conclusion that we are
arriving at a philosophy of pessimistic hopelessness. That is
not the way of the true philosopher. His ideal is the tabula
rasa. He sweeps away the systems of others, that he may
build his own on a smooth foundation.
Realizing simultaneously the insatiable craving of the
human mind for order and the impossibility of bringing
order into the chaos of knowledge, we appear to be faced
with a dilemma no less distressing than insoluble. But on
looking deeper we find the dilemma apparent only. This
will become clear when we consider the essential nature of
knowledge.
The thoughtless among us may speak, for instance, of a
red cow, and naïvely imagine we could prove our point with
the testimony of a witness or two. But the philosophers have
long ago made it clear that a cow would not be red but for
the presence of someone to whom it looks red. Having established
that point, the deeper of the philosophers go on to
prove that the cow would not only not be red, but would not
even exist, were it not for the presence of someone who thinks
he sees a cow. In our argument the position is even stronger
than this, for we have two lines of defense. First, we agree
with the philosopher that you cannot prove of any given cow
that it is red, or even that it exists; and then we point out
that an idea is so much less stable than a cow that, even were
the philosophers wrong about the cow not being red, they
might easily be right about an idea not being right, or not
existing.
Take an example: The philosophers of the Middle Ages
demonstrated both that the earth did not exist and also that
it was flat. Today they are still arguing about whether the
world exists, but they no longer dispute about whether it is
flat. This shows the greater lasting power of a real thing
(whether it exists or not, for that point has not yet been settled)
as compared with an idea, which may not only not
exist, but may also be wrong even if it does exist.
We have now come in our discussion to the point where
we see the absurdity of supposing ourselves to have any
knowledge, as knowledge is ordinarily defined—or at least
we would have come to that point but for lack of space
which prevents us from making the subject really clear.
However, it doesn’t matter from a practical point of view
whether you have followed this philosophical reasoning.
Perhaps you are not a philosopher. In that case, and in the
homely phrase of the day, I ask you, what’s the good of an
Englishman’s learning, first, that all Americans speak
through their noses and, secondly, why they do so, when he
has to find out eventually that they do not? What’s the good,
again, of knowing that central Australia is a desert and that
certain principles of physiography make it so, when you may
have to listen to an after-dinner speech by someone telling
that it is not a desert?
Such things do not always go in triplets of (1) so it is,
(2) why it is, and (3) it is not—but that is a common order.
The reader may here protest that we are not getting much
nearer our promised emancipation from the dilemma between
our passion for system and the impossibility of
systematizing knowledge. We have hinted above that the
solution lies in finding a new basis for knowledge, and this
we now proceed to do.
So long as you believe in them, the nasality of American
speech and the desert nature of central Australia are fragments
of knowledge capable of being arranged in a system.
The trouble comes when you discover that they are “untrue.”
This gives the solution of our problem. We must have
knowledge that is incapable of being contradicted. On first
thought this seems impossible, but on second thought we
realize that such facts do exist in the domain of mathematics.
Two and two make four.
But why do two and two make four? Obviously because
we have agreed that four is the name for the sum of two and
two. That principle has been applied in mathematics to such
advantage that it is rightly called the science of sciences;
and this is the principle which, now at length, we propose
to apply to all knowledge. Through it every science will become
a pure science, and all knowledge as open to systematization
as mathematics.
The trouble with facts, outside mathematics, has been inherent
in the method of gathering information. We call
these methods observation and experiment, and have even
been proud of them—not realizing their clumsy nature, the
unreliability of the findings, the transient character of the
best of them, and the essential hopelessness of classifying
the results and thus gratifying the passion of the human intellect
for order and symmetry in the universe.
Take an example: A man comes from out-of-doors with
the report that there is a red cow in the front yard. Neglecting
for the moment the philosophical aspect of the case—as
to whether the cow would be red if there were no one to
whom she seemed red, and also the more fundamental problem
of whether there would have been any cow at all if no
one had gone out to look—neglecting, as I say, the deeper
aspects of the case, we are confronted with numerous other
sources of error. The observer may have confused the sex of
the animal. Perhaps it was an ox. Or if not the sex, the age
may have been misjudged, and it may have been a heifer.
The man may have been color-blind, and the cow (wholly
apart from the philosophical aspect) may not have been red.
And even if it was a red cow, the dog may have seen her the
instant our observer turned his back, and by the time he
told us she was in the front yard, she may in reality have
been vanishing in a cloud of dust down the road.
The trouble lies evidently in our clumsy system of observing
and reporting. This difficulty has been obviated in the
science of mathematics. A square is, not by observation but
by definition, a four-sided figure with equal sides and equal
angles. No one has denied that and no one can, for the simple
reason that we have all agreed in advance that we will never
deny it. Nay more, we have agreed that if anyone says that
a square has three or five sides we will all reply in a chorus:
“If it has three or five sides it is not a square!” That disposes
of the matter forever.
Why not agree similarly on the attributes of a front yard?—making
it true by definition that, among other things, it
contains a red cow. Then if anyone asserts, for reasons of
philosophy, color-blindness, or the officiousness of dogs,
that there is no red cow in the yard, we can reply, as in the
case of the square: “If it does not contain a red cow, it is
not a front yard!”
The author feels at this point a doubtless unwarranted concern
that he is not being taken seriously. Or perhaps the plan
proposed is not considered practical. But the proof of the
pudding is in the eating. The thing has been tried, and successfully—not
in the systematic way now proposed, but sporadically.
Some instances are well-known and convincing.
Take the assertion that a Christian is a good man. If you
attempt to deny this on the ground that Jones, a deacon in
the church, ran off with some public funds, your stricture is
at once shown to have been absurd by the simple reply: “If
Jones was a thief, he was not a Christian.” A Christian is, not
by observation but by definition, a good man; if you prove
that a certain man was not good you merely show that he
was not a Christian. Thus we have established that a Christian
is a good man. It is like a square having four sides.
But if someone asserts that a Bolshevik, a Conservative, or
a chemist is a good man, you can soon confute him; for the
members of these classes have neglected to define themselves
as good. Thus their attributes have to be determined by observation
and experiment. It is highly probable that evidence
could be brought against many Bolsheviks, and even some
Conservatives, to show that they are not good men. At any
rate we have here no such clarity of issue as in things that
are true by definition—as the four-sidedness of a square or
the goodness of a Christian.
Through some experience of arguing this case in the abstract
I have learned that its essential reasonableness can best
be established from concrete examples. Let us, then, take
cases at random from various fields of knowledge.
Consider first the ostriches of Africa. These birds have
been studied in the wild by sportsmen and zoologists, and
as domestic animals by husbandmen who tend them in flocks
like sheep. There are accordingly thousands of printed pages
in our libraries giving what purports to be information upon
their habits. Besides being indefinite and in many other ways
faulty, this alleged information is in part contradictory.
Having studied the bird of Africa, let us turn next to the
ostrich of literature, philosophy, and morals. Instead of confusion,
we now have clarity and precision. This is because
the ostrich of literature exists by definition only. He is a bird
that hides his head when frightened. You may too precipitately
object that men would not accept universally this definition
of the ostrich of literature if it did not also fit the
zoological ostrich. The answer is that the definition has never
received any support from zoologists, hunters, or owners of
the domesticated birds, and yet it has been accepted universally
throughout Europe since Pliny’s time (about 50 B.C.).
It has survived all attacks from science and from the bigoted
commonsense of those who did not recognize its true nature.
Like the definition of a four-sided square or a good Christian,
it has survived because it was useful. Can you imagine any
real attribute more instructive than the head-burying of the
ostrich-by-definition? As a text for moralists, as an epithet
that politicians use for their opponents, as a figure of speech
generally, what could serve as well? Our literature is richer,
our vocabulary more picturesque through this beneficent bird
of hypothesis. He has many inherent advantages that no real
bird could have. Since his habits are defined we need not
waste time studying him first hand, nor in trying to adjudicate
at second hand between books about him that disagree.
Since he never existed as a beast he is in no danger of the
extinction that is said to threaten the lion and swan.
Consider next what trouble we should get into if we did
not have the literary ostrich and wanted to convey picturesquely
the idea of that sort of wilful blindness from
which we ourselves never suffer but which curiously afflicts
our opponents. In pursuit of suitable analogy we might
vainly canvass the whole animal kingdom. The ostrich-by-definition
is, therefore, not only less trouble to deal with than
a real bird; he is actually more useful and instructive than
any real bird or beast. When we consider how often he has
been used in sermon and precept we must admit that this
model creature has contributed substantially not only to the
entertainment and instruction of nations but also to the
morality and general goodness of the world.
The ostrich is but one of several useful birds of definition.
But we must be careful not to confuse these with real birds
or their value is lessened. An example is the stork that brings
babies. By a confusion of thought which identifies this stork
with real storks, and through the pernicious birth control
propaganda which insists on rationalizing everything, the
baby-bringing stork has ceased to be useful except in conversation
with children, in the symbolism of the movie, and
in the picture postcard industry.
The wolves of literature are among the most picturesque
and useful of our definitions. Zoological wolves go in pairs
or families, never above a dozen. It is clear how inadequate
this would be for movie purposes, where they should run in
packs of scores or hundreds. Even in a novel or short story
of Siberia or Canada you need packs large enough for the
hero to kill fifteen or twenty, with enough left over to eat,
or to be about to eat, his sweetheart. This is readily accomplished
by using a wolf of the general type we advocate—having
no relation to the so-called realities but possessing
by definition all the required characteristics (habit of running
in packs of any desired size, willingness to eat, or attempt
to eat, the heroine, etc.).
Another useful definition has long been that of Arctic,
Canadian, and Siberian cold. The danger and disadvantage
of confusing this hypothetical with a so-called real climate
are best seen if we compare the facility with which people
who have never been in these countries use the weather in
conversation, speeches, and books, and contrast that facility
with the awkwardness of travelers and natives. An example
is a story by Tolstoi. Great as he was, he failed to realize the
advantage in simplicity and vividness of postulating that
Siberia is always cold, and actually allowed himself to be
led into the artistic blunder of having the convicts in one
of his novels die of sunstroke. An acquaintance of mine was
filming this story. He realized the pictorial ease of “putting
over” drifting snow as compared with heat waves—the snow
could be managed with confetti and an aeroplane propeller,
but how would one photograph heat waves? He realized
still more clearly that the public is wedded to the defined, as
opposed to the “real” climate of Siberia, and did what Tolstoi
would have done in the first place had he been a Californian—he
changed the scene from summer to winter, and then
froze to death as many convicts as the picture required.
These few examples from among many are enough to
show not only that the method of knowledge-by-definition
is and long has been in standard use, but also that it has the
advantages of being easily grasped, picturesque, and of a
higher average moral value than the so-called “real” knowledge.
It is inherent in the genesis and nature of defined facts
that they can be made picturesque in proportion to the ingenuity
of the one who defines them, and as moral as necessary.
This is a striking advantage over empirical knowledge,
which cannot always be relied on to support the fashion of
the time or even the moral system of the community.
It is from this last point of view that there has grown up
in many countries of recent years a profound distrust of
“facts” and the theories deduced from them. In England
the situation is dealt with by the simple and adequate means
of paying little attention to the exposition of “new” things.
In the United States it has been found that the public listens
even to the newest views, and sometimes actually wants to
act upon them. This has necessitated the expedient of passing
laws prescribing what may and may not be advocated and
believed. These American laws are a step in the right direction,
but inadequate because they have back of them only
specific considerations. Few people as yet realize the general
reasons of expediency and broad sanity that underlie the
scheme we are here proposing.
Let us consider next a sample or two of knowledge-by-definition
that could well be added to our present stock.
Just as artificial tongues are built upon spoken tongues but
avoid their mistakes, so may we conveniently base our knowledge-by-definition,
or absolute knowledge, on what is already
believed by some.
Assume, for instance, that all Irishmen are peasants holding
land by insecure tenure from grasping landlords, that
each has a pig under his bed, that everyone carries shillalahs,
that kissing the Blarney Stone is the chief national occupation.
Having agreed on these things, we could teach them in
the schools of all countries. We should then presently all
agree (on the basis of common facts) as to what our attitude
toward Ireland should be, and the troublesome Irish Question
would disappear from politics and history.
Think, too, what a charm the new system would lend to
travel in Ireland! As soon as you landed you would note the
rarity or absence of all the things you had expected. You
would meet surprise after surprise, which would not only
delight you at the time but give you material for endless
letters home and for endless stories to tell when you got back.
Thus would be built up an increasing tourist traffic, a source
of revenue to Ireland itself and to the shipping and tourist
companies of the various nations.
You may think such tourists, on coming home, would
upset our system of facts-by-definition about Ireland. Not
if that system is once thoroughly established. Consider in
that relation the Greek pronouncement that at any time of
year it becomes colder the farther north you go. North America
is in language and civilization a homogeneous country
in which one might think knowledge would therefore spread
rapidly, and in which Atlanta, Richmond, New York, and
Montreal are, and have been for a century, large and well-known
cities that are by observation about equally hot in
July. Yet there is even today practically unanimous adherence
in all these cities to the Greek definition (“the farther
north the colder at any time of year”), and each city believes
those farther south to be hotter and those farther north to be
colder, though thousands of travelers for a hundred years
have found it to be uniformly otherwise. The ostrich with
his head in the sand has survived two thousand years and
is still going strong. No human being can retain oil, but the
hypothetical Eskimo drinks it by the flagon in our books
and belief, and is none the worse for it. Then why should
not all the world forever believe that every Irishman has a
pig under his bed? All parties would benefit. It would be
only the hypothetical Irishman that has the pig, and we
could by hypothesis arrange that he should thoroughly enjoy
it. The real Irishman would get the benefit of the increased
tourist trade and surely he ought to be grateful. The tourist
would make facile discovery of the non-existence of the pig;
that would please him and interest all his friends forever
after as a sort of occult knowledge, like knowing privately
that Indian fakirs are really no more clever than our conjurers,
a pleasing secret now possessed and highly valued
by many without detriment to the fakirs or to those who
prefer to say they have seen them do marvels. Thus would
everyone be the gainer.
CHAPTER II.
The Pleasures of Buncombe
THE MOST STRIKING CONTRADICTION OF OUR CIVILISATION IS THE
fundamental reverence for truth which we profess and the
thorough-going disregard for it which we practice. This is
the veriest commonplace. The lowest journalism fattens on
pointing it out and the highest clergy prosper in the same
occupation. According to them all, the world is rotten to the
core with hypocrisy and falsehood.
But while they agree on the condition, the physicians of
the world order hopelessly differ on the remedy. Without
disagreeing on the condition, either, we want to suggest
nevertheless that it is a bit naïve of the philosophers to
diagnose from the mere scarcity of truth that the world is
sick with an incurable malady. Is it not just possible that
they cannot cure us for the basic reason that we are not ill?
And if we are not ill, the worries of the moralists should
dissolve into good cheer. Can we, then, be well though the
truth be not in us? Strangely late in the history of philosophy,
we now for the first time address ourselves to that problem.
God and Truth have from the earliest times been the two
ideas that have commanded the greatest reverence. They have
been much argued by the philosophers, with many curious
parallels and one striking contrast. Typical of the parallels
are the long disputes about whether there can reasonably be
supposed to exist either an absolute god or an absolute truth.
The one contrast is that while the philosophers have discussed
at great length whether God is good, they have never
discussed whether Truth is good. Is it not a bit suspicious
that this is the one thing they have always assumed? And
in a world of chaotic philosophies that get us nowhere, is it
not high time to ask if there be any sound reason why Truth
should be exempted from that fundamental scrutiny to
which even the gods have had to submit?
In addressing ourselves to this hitherto neglected question,
as to whether truth is good, we adopt in the first instance a
test which has long appealed to the common sense of mankind:
By their fruits shall ye know them.
In defining our subject, we admit at once that the truth
may have effects outside of the immediate field in which we
shall study it, that of human affairs. It is like the question of
soul. For thousands of years the civilization which is intellectually
descended from the lands around the Mediterranean
has agreed that all men have souls. Usually those who speculated
have considered that women have souls also, a few that
horses and dogs have souls, and the most generous that all
animals have them. But it is only the highest intellectuals
and the most benighted savages who have ever conceded
souls to plants and sticks and stones. We shall ignore, for
the time being, such possible extensions of our subject, and
discuss Truth solely in its relation to men (including
women).
As both definition and defense of our method, we premise,
further, that mankind frequently does much better than it
knows. Nearly all of us, for instance, can keep in balance as
we walk along upright, though the physiologists are still
arguing about exactly how we do it. Similarly, the biologists
tacitly agree that we know what life is; for they test their
definitions of life by measuring them against the reality
which they feel they know, though they cannot define it
quite successfully.
Go through any considerable number of examples like
the preceding, selecting them, if you like, from every sphere
of life, and you will gradually reach a firm confidence in the
reasonableness of human actions as compared with the flightiness
of our theories and the contradictions so frequently
involved in our explanations. That may be because (admitting
the evolutionary theory and the geological time scale)
we, and the pre-human ancestors from which we inherit our
traits, have been acting so as to save our bodies and reach our
desires for a good many million years longer than we have
been speculating on how to save our souls and protect our
reputations. And practice makes perfect.
We arrive then at a simple problem: If we ignore all
theories and study those instances where mankind has preferred
truth or falsehood the one to the other, we shall be
in a position to determine which set of choices has been of
the greater benefit.
In a later and more rigorous inquiry we may go in for
objective proofs, like statistics. Here we shall use only such
examples as are well-known to everyone, so that the conclusions
we state will certainly be merely the equivalent of
the reader’s own verdict, set before him in print.
Few things are more generally admitted than that parents,
in most cases, love their children and desire their greatest
good. These parents may be in error as to what constitutes
good, but this is beside the mark, for we are at the moment
merely trying to find out what it is they think is for the
children’s welfare. Of course, if you ask them, they will
quote you Truth with a capital, or more likely TRUTH all
in capitals. For so have they been taught to protest. But study
their actions, which are a surer guide than their words.
THE CASE OF INFANTS
To put it bluntly, most loving parents take the greatest
care to surround children not with truth but with deception.
We cannot deceive children before they are born, so we
do the next best thing and practice every deception about
them. We conceal, not only from children but also from
grown persons so far as possible, how babies come into the
world. The marriage is announced, and even made a public
occasion, but thereafter everything is mystery. Pregnancy is
concealed by an artful dress, the expectant mother hides or
goes to a remote place. In some classes of society it is rather
a breach of etiquette if the doctor talks openly about whom
he is going to attend that night. There is a blare of publicity
after the birth, in which, however, only a few things may
be told—the weight and sex of the child, whom it resembles,
and in a very general way how the mother is progressing.
But the fact that the child looks red and wrinkled, that its
eyes do not focus, and several other details about it, are of
so private a nature that many mothers discover these and
other more “intimate” things only in their own children.
And certainly to most fathers the new-born looks as surprising
as it looks unpleasant. That, by the way, is a fact
every parent must conceal—it would be dreadful if anyone
were ever to find out what a disagreeable shock his first-born
was to him.
The reader may here want to stop and argue with the
author that all this is but decent and proper reticence—which
if he does he pleases the author very much. For there would
be nothing to argue about. The author, too, feels that this
is how all these things should be. He certainly would hate to
break any such taboos. But let us not argue one way or the
other. To do so would be unscientific. We should pursue our
inquiry with a steady view to just one thing: Is it true that
the majority of people feel and do as stated? From that survey
will emerge a general conclusion as to which it is that
men really prefer in practice, truth or falsehood.
The systematic deception of the child usually begins
almost at the moment of birth. The instrument is speech,
most fittingly, since our studies will show that this is the
favorite means of deception throughout life. At first, the
child does not understand any words, and balks the mother
thereby. However, she makes capital of this dilemma by seeing
to it that her baby shall chiefly hear (and therefore
learn) only incorrect speech. This is known as teaching the
child “baby talk.”
There are certain standard forms of baby talk which,
through wide usage, are not completely deceptive; as when
the child is taught to say that papa has gone bye-bye when
the meaning is that papa has gone out. Accordingly, most
mothers invent a special jargon so that each child grows up
with several dozen sounds or combinations of sounds which
are either not words of any language or else are real words
with perverted meanings.
As the child grows up he discovers that he has been deceived
in the first speech taught him; and thus he gets an
early and practical lesson in one of the main concerns of life—how
to deceive others.
As soon as the child has acquired a vocabulary by which
he can be misled, people begin to deceive him in ways that
increase in complexity with his growing faculties. Many of
these are specially devised by his mother and family and do
not lend themselves to sociological study, for they are seldom
placed on record. But there is a general system, one broad
aspect of which is stories, especially classics, that fall under
the heads of fairy tales and folklore.
There has come to my attention a very practical way of
determining what people really think of the place of folklore
in the education of the young. As there has been prejudice
to guard against, I need to describe the manner of my
investigation before I come to the matter of it.
In a very tentative and general conversation I casually introduce
the subject of bolshevism. In three cases out of four
there is an immediate hostile reaction, and then I go no further,
for my desire has been to get an opinion on a reported
bolshevik undertaking, and a person who bristles at their
very name is certain to be opposed to anything they sponsor.
Correspondingly I get in some cases reactions of favorable
enthusiasm, and these are equally hopeless, for they would
naturally support any part of the bolshevik program.
In the few cases of seeming freedom from bias, I proceed
to retail, without vouching for it, what I have heard about
certain educational experiments conducted in the Soviet
Union. It really makes no difference about the truth of these
reports, for a person scientific enough to be neither strongly
pro- nor strongly anti-bolshevik is also intelligent enough to
consider a hypothetical case and give the same sort of verdict
he would if it were a real one.
It is said, then, that the Soviet powers believe in the maxim
of Paul about proving all things and accepting only those
that can stand the most rigid investigation. I do not know (I
must say, since the subject has been brought up) whether the
bolsheviks are trying to discourage baby-talk, insisting that
mothers shall speak a real language even to the youngest
child; but it has been represented to me that from the time
the child begins to speak the government makes an effort
to see that it is told only the truth.
One of the first things western mothers tell their children
is about Jack and the Beanstalk. The Russians feel reasonably
certain that there never was such a Jack or Beanstalk. Accordingly,
neither that fabled youngster nor the fabled plant
is ever mentioned, I am told, to the up-to-date bolshevik-sponsored
child.
But, says the Russian, there are in real life things quite as
interesting and marvelous as Jack and his stalk; for instance,
a child named Tom instead of Jack, and surnamed Edison.
Nothing very marvelous is reported about this Tommy while
he was small. But when he became a sizable boy, or perhaps
even later, he got an idea about how a string could be heated
till it became red and even white, and how this string could
be put in a glass bottle and hung up to give a light much
brighter than any lamp that ever existed up to that time.
The Soviet educators are said to maintain that by applying
the same ability and ingenuity to telling the story of Tom
and the glowing string that has been used in popularizing
the adventures of Jack and his Beanstalk, you could create an
equally vivid story, equally entertaining and, they contend,
more beneficial since it is “true.”
In the case of a child taught to believe in the Beanstalk,
it becomes necessary to tell him later (or else to let him find
out for himself) that it never existed. Some psychologists
claim that there is an injurious mental shock involved when
a child’s faith is shattered. What the Soviets emphasize is
that if Jack had been real the child’s interest would not have
had to cease at the age of five or six, but might have continued
growing until the larger boy gradually mastered all
the history and later grasped the achievements of Jack. If,
then, instead of Jack and the Beanstalk, you begin with Tom
and the red-hot string, there is no shock, they argue, no dead
halt, no shifting of interest from one thing to another, but
instead a growing delight in the whole adventurous life of
Thomas Alva Edison that finally develops into a grasp of all
the sciences with which he was concerned.
I seldom get this far in my second-hand explanation before
my listeners stop me with rhapsodies on the glories of the
imagination and diatribes against the bolsheviks who now
for the first time are seen by these previously impartial people
to be insidious foemen of the soul.
This counterblast used to floor me and I would stop at that
point; but more recently I have developed a flanking operation.
People strong on the beauties of the soul are nearly
always great admirers of Maeterlinck. So I apparently change
the subject, falling in with their praise of the imagination
and asking if they think its subtle beauties are anywhere
more evident than in the great son of Belgium. There is usually
agreement, and soon we are communing ecstatically together
about his book on the bee.
The next step is to ask the champions of the imagination
whether they remember that Maeterlinck says near the beginning
of that book (which we have just agreed is one of
his greatest works) that he has long since given up trying to
invent anything half so marvelous as the truth. Oh, yes, they
remember that, but they always understood it to mean Truth
with a capital letter, which is something very different from
a fact, and apparently means anything you are so fond of
that you are prepared to stick to it whether it is true or not.
But a little discussion about the sort of truth which Maeterlinck
says he is trying to present in the Bee, and the sort
which the bolsheviks say they are trying to present about
Edison, shows that both are of the same kind. This conclusion
results in no increase of admiration for the bolsheviks
but a noticeable decrease of liking for Maeterlinck, who apparently
has been cheating some of his readers into thinking
that he was telling them Truths when he was only telling
facts.
Usually the outcome of the conversation is a feeling of
how blessed are we whose imaginations have been stimulated
and delighted by Little Red Riding Hood, Bluebeard with
his many wives, and tales of that sort, and what an eclipse
of the imagination is spreading its shadow over Russia, where
even little children have to be told the truth.
The Soviet campaign against folklore in general has been
paralleled by an American campaign for Santa Claus in
particular, which shows the differing temper of the two
countries. Santa, it is well known, drives reindeer. Now it
happens that some friends of mine own a hundred thousand
reindeer in Alaska and have been trying to find a market
for them. Other friends of mine own and edit The Kansas
City Star, one of the most respectable and respected newspapers
in the United States. Theodore Roosevelt, after he
had been President, thought it an honor to be one of its
editors: and the standards of personnel, management and
policy are quite as high now as then. My Alaskan friends are,
in ideals and character, not below the level of even the Star.
However, they were not at that time as well-known, nor was
their standing in the community possibly of as direct business
value to them. You might, therefore, suspect them of
using Santa Claus to help them find a reindeer market, no
matter what they thought of the Saint himself. But surely
the Star, whose business sense is as keen as its ethics are
scrupulous, would not touch the enterprise unless its editors
were sure of two things: that Santa was all right, for
otherwise the Star would not associate with him even for
profit; and that nearly everybody else thought Santa all
right, for otherwise the Star would not profit by associating
with him.
The campaign was planned to deceive the children of
Kansas City into believing that the real Santa with his real
gift-bearing reindeer had entered into an arrangement to arrive
in Kansas City some weeks before Christmas and to be
on exhibition there. The Star organization were his alleged
representatives and the part for which I was requisitioned by
the Lomen Reindeer Corporation was to write to the kiddies
a letter telling how I had visited Santa in his northern home
and what message he had sent by me to the children of the
United States. My letter would be printed on dozens of front
pages, aggregating millions in circulation, for this was a
nation-wide campaign handled by newspapers or department
stores in many of the larger cities, such as Cleveland,
Brooklyn, Denver, Oklahoma City, and I have forgotten
what other places. The letter I wrote was deceptive, though
not literally untruthful. It was printed by all the papers engaged
in the Real Santa campaign, and between me and a
thousand other willing collaborators who all felt we were
doing the nation’s children a real service, we fooled them so
thoroughly that the Star (to come back to that worthy paper)
was able to stage a parade through the streets of Kansas City
that was even larger, it was said, than the American Legion
could muster when they held their National Convention in
the same city the year before. The entire police force was
needed to control the crowd. Some other cities did almost
as well.
I have heard much comment on the campaign waged by
the Star, and by the like-minded papers of other cities, and
none has been unfavorable. I believe the mayor of Kansas
City thanked the Star for a great public service—or something
of that sort. But mayors do such things rather perfunctorily—whatever
is done by a prominent enough citizen or
foreigner, at that they publicly rejoice. But tradesmen are
usually more hard-headed, and their chief organizations are
discreet and particular to be always on the side of the common
weal. But higher than any of our non-religious bodies
in its ideals and aims is likely to be the Parent-Teacher Association
of the city. Listen, then, to what they said in a display
proclamation which occupied, in suitably large print,
nearly a whole page of The Kansas City Star on Christmas
Day, 1925:
To The Kansas City Star:
May we express our congratulations and appreciation to
The Star on the wonderful success of its enterprise in bringing
Santa Claus and his reindeer to Kansas City and acting
as the host, friend and guide of the children’s Christmas
saint.
We believe all Kansas City and our neighboring towns
share with us in our felicitation. It is nothing new for The
Star to be generously mindful of the children at Christmas
time. We have not forgotten Snow White, The Seven Swans
and Peter Pan! But this year Santa Claus and his reindeer
have been brought “in person,” have paraded our streets,
visited our schools and hospitals and have taken their Christmas
cheer directly to the children and to the older folk as
well.
The Old Spirit of Christmas has been revived and stimulated,
and everybody has been made happier and better by
this Yuletide visit. With this Christmas Spirit in our hearts,
we now think it most fitting to thank The Star publicity for
its unique and happy achievement.
TO SANTA CLAUS AND
HIS HOST:
A MERRY CHRISTMAS AND
THANK YOU
Merchants Association:
Parent-Teacher Association:
Chamber of Commerce
You agree with them, heartily, Gentle Reader, I am sure.
And so do I. The pudgy Saint with his sleigh load of gifts
and his eight reindeer is part of the glory and romance of
childhood. You and I, when we were small and believed in
him, saw with our mundane eyes nothing more than a jolly
old man in a red coat with a crinkly smile and a flowing
beard; the more blessed youngsters of today (thanks to the
Lomen Corporation in Alaska and men of humanity and
vision in our cities who cooperate with them), become personally
acquainted with Dancer and Prancer, and Donner
and Blitzen, and all the other members of the famous team.
They ride in the sleigh with Santa and they ride on the backs
of his deer. They are thrilled by the no longer simulated (as
in our day) interest of their parents who now stand shivering
with cold and quivering with delight as they are shoved
about by policemen to make way for a Santa-and-Reindeer
parade as large and enthusiastic as ever marched behind a
young lady that swam the channel or a young gentleman
who flew the Atlantic.
Best of all, this apparent faith of the elders enables us to
stretch the faith of the younger generation a year or two
longer than was possible before the Lomen concern thought
of providing real reindeer to make the mythical Saint more
real. We used to lose such beliefs when we were five, but
today the Parent-Teacher Association, the Merchants Association,
the Chamber of Commerce, and the Star are able to
stretch the faith of Kansas City at least till seven—two years
of happy unreality given to thousands of children in that one
city alone. And so in many other cities. Multiplying the clear
gain, two years for each child, by the total number of children
affected, we have an aggregate of millions of happiness-years
added for this nation alone. When the fashion spreads
to other countries and continues through the years, the total
gain to the world will become incalculable.
Preserving the faith of children was the main purpose of
the Santa campaign, but the more enterprising newspapers
used the opportunity to benefit older readers as well. The
Denver paper (which we will not name, for some people
mistakenly consider it wrong to deceive grown-ups) erected
an imitation snow house near where the reindeer were kept
(I think it was at the municipal buildings) and employed an
Eskimo, who had never before seen that sort of snow house
except in movies, to explain to visitors that he and other
reindeer herders of Alaska dwelt in that kind of snow house
when they were at home. So far as I could judge, and I was
in Denver at the time, every grown person, from Unitarian
to Rotarian, swallowed that as readily as the children did the
Santa part, and with as much satisfaction. Such beliefs have
a moral as well as an entertainment value. It certainly makes
you more content with a hall bedroom if you can visualize
the Alaska Eskimos shivering in huts of snow.
But this about Alaska snow houses and the preservation of
the faith of adults, has been a digression. We must proceed
with our systematic inquiry into the planned and benevolent
deception of the growing child.
THE CASE OF THE GRADE SCHOOL
We aim in this book at no more than establishing a reasonable
presumption either in favor of truth as opposed to deception
or else in favor of deception as opposed to truth. We
shall not, therefore, attempt a study of our educational system
as a whole but shall take a few cases that are typical.
The Teaching of History: Under this head we shall consider
two general problems and then a few specific instances.
One of those disadvantages of facts which their advocates
usually admit, is that they are complicated. Another is that
in most cases people cannot agree as to what are the facts.
Simplification and standardization are therefore necessary,
especially for the young. This is universally conceded.
Not till the prospective historian starts graduate work in
a university does he usually begin to have any conception of
how debatable are most of the things that he has been taught
as a child. The disillusionment then continues rapidly until
he feels like selecting as the best definition of his specialty
the one usually credited to Napoleon: “History is a set of lies
agreed upon.” But (and this is significant), in spite of the
high average moral tone of our populations, few historians
become crusaders against history. The simplest, and I believe
the correct, explanation is that they think that, on the
whole, deceiving children does them good.
When we entered the 1914-18 war, we suddenly discovered
that most of our school histories were anti-British. Many
of them were forthwith changed to pro-British, without a
murmur from anyone except a few people who (we all
agreed, as soon as they began to protest) were either pro-Germans
or Pacifists. But the War, after we got into it, was
so short that before it was over there was not time to oust
all the anti-British propaganda from the texts. I had the instructive
experience of being in a city where a violent newspaper
controversy sprang up between correspondents, some
of whom advocated anti-British history but most of whom
favored pro-British. The ground of the pros was that we
ought to stand by our former allies, that there might soon be
another war, and that we should bring up the younger generation
strong for English-speaking unity, because that was
the natural basis of the coming alignment. Some argued specifically
that we might be able to annex Canada if we used
the same sort of histories as the Canadians and therefore
grew up to the same beliefs. Even the Hearst papers, which
then opposed this view and anything else that seemed to
favor the British, later came out for the principle and advocated
an English-speaking union.
The voices which suggested an impartial history were few
and weak. Thus did what we believe to be the sound common
sense of the people manifest itself. For next after patriotism
comes a right world outlook. We must know in advance
what country to favor in time of trouble. And how can
the needed unanimity be secured in a democracy except by
teaching the youngsters to like the right country so that they
may vote correctly when they later come to decide tariffs,
treaties and wars?
Much proof of what no one doubts is tedious and we have
gone far enough in the argument. Certainly if you are pro-British,
you will see at once that teaching love for British
ideals, respect for British institutions, cannot help but benefit
any country. If you are not pro-British, you can arrive at
the same conclusion by substituting in the discussion the
name of whatever country you most admire. Call that country
X. You will then at once see the advantage of teaching
the rising generation to be pro-X, or proex—to coin a much-needed
word.
The reader may here object that even if it is agreed that
history teaching in the schools should be chiefly for the purpose
of laying down principles to guide us in life, it does not
follow that we have to teach children to be in favor of any
particular country or set of countries. Perhaps you are a pronounced
isolationist and think we are strong enough to go
it alone, then this strength would be increased by the solidarity
we would gain if we learned in school to dislike all other
nations and later ran our government and shaped our private
actions so as to get them all to dislike us. That is an old
and much-advocated principle: that real unity can be attained
only in the face of a common enemy. Very well, then,
you are not a Proex but an Antex, and you must go about
trying to get the schools into your hands. Let the best men
win! It looks just now as if it would be the Antexes.
Coming to specific problems of truth in history, we need
little but a catalogue to see on which side we stand. Supposing,
just for argument, that the biographers of Lincoln could
prove, as some of them have tried to do, that he was of
illegitimate descent, would you then want that taught in the
schools? The conclusive arguments against are: (1) Such
teaching would attack the Home, the most precious of all
our institutions; for Lincoln is our greatest national hero, and
having him illegitimate, even if only back in his parents’ or
grandparents’ generation, would be a destructive influence.
(2) That teaching would also attack the institution of National
Heroes. Lincoln is our greatest hero; nothing is more
beneficial than to have heroes to look up to; we would not
look up to Lincoln quite so much if he were in any degree
illegitimate; therefore we ought to hide the fact, if it were a
fact. (3) Nothing could be gained by encouraging children
to attach scandal to the names of great men. (4) It would be
in bad taste to teach in school about the illegitimacy of anyone.
On the basis of these and many similar reasons, all
decent people will agree that the question of whether Lincoln
was illegitimate should never be mentioned in the
schools.
To be on the safe side, the author states here emphatically
that the biographers who favor the legitimacy of Lincoln,
even unto the third and fourth generation, have, in his opinion,
much the best of the argument. For this book might possibly
fall into the hands of minors.
It is maintained by some that it would do no harm for
adults to know the fact, if it were a fact, that Lincoln was
illegitimate. Their reasoning is that character is formed in
infancy and that the perverting influence of a truth, no matter
how improper, is negligible in adults. We agree with that
contention, and the more readily because it is in harmony
with the conclusion at which we are fast arriving (a conclusion,
by the way, at which you could arrive still faster with
less reasoning): The purpose of child training is to build
character, and all education should therefore trend toward
that goal. The truth should be admitted into the curriculum
or kept out of it by that test alone. Facts of a disturbing nature
should be permitted, if at all, only when characters have
set beyond the reasonable possibility of change.
The importance of discretion in history teaching was once
brought forcibly to my attention when I was spending a summer
in northern Vermont, and found in use three miles away
across the Canadian line in Quebec, school texts in which
the War of 1812 differed so much from the war in the
Vermont histories that you would hardly believe it was the
same war. You can readily see how wise that was on both
sides. Imagine the discord that would be introduced into the
teaching of Canadian patriotism if they used Vermont histories,
and similarly what havoc a Canadian history could
work, if tossed into our school system like a stone into delicate
machinery. Nor is there any halfway course possible.
If you were to cut out all the contradictions, there would be
little left of that particular war; neither would the leavings
be any good for inculcating patriotism or other moral virtues
into either Canadians or Americans. Obviously things had
best remain as they are.
Or would you ever hint in the history courses that Sir
Galahad never had a bath? That Tristram’s courting, so
touchingly described by Edwin Arlington Robinson, must
have smelled pretty strong even at arm’s length (except when
the wind was just right)? That some of the most revered
saints of the Church made vows never to bathe and never to
be unkind to the lice that swarmed over them? And that the
only two great bathing eras of known history were the ancient
period which historians call the decline of the Roman
Empire, when civilization was going to the dogs, and our
modern period, when the Fundamentalists tell us we are all
going to the Devil? Would not such teaching suggest that
there may be a connection between clean bodies and unclean
living? And what could be worse for æsthetics or for the
soap trade?
The fact was, of course, that Tristram liked the smell of
his sweetheart, and she liked his, both being used to it, and
that the sinners as well as the saints of the Middle Ages
really enjoyed what we would call the stink of foul linen.
The past was not necessarily such an unpleasant time for
those who lived in it (in view of their tastes). But, even after
dwelling on that, most of us will remain convinced of the
superiority of our own taste, and will continue unwilling
that historical studies shall in any way encourage those of
our youngsters who seem to have been born with medieval
propensities for dirt.
Indeed, what possible good end could be served by letting
such facts (if they be facts) gain currency through history
teaching? Would patriotism, good manners, or good morals
profit thereby? Would such teaching build character? Certainly
not, and the present course is the right one: to say
nothing about bathing in the Age of Chivalry, but to imply
always that cleanliness is the natural state and passion of man—excepting
rare miscreants who come to school inadequately
washed behind the ears.
And so we might go on, canvassing our histories and our
moral, political and æsthetic judgments till we arrive at the
conclusion that in school texts at least the truth needs to be
very judiciously handled.
The Teaching of Physiology: If the truth be a tricky thing
in history, it is no less so in many other “branches” taught in
the first eight grades of school. For instance, consider physiology.
We need not dwell on sex, which most of us instinctively
and rightly feel must not be thrust upon the young,
but will instead continue under this head the discussion with
which we ended the section on history.
Cleanliness may seem to lie in the field of æsthetics, but it
has the most practical value. You would be ostracized socially
if people knew you did not bathe; you would be worse off
than if you had halitosis and four-out-of-five pyorrhea. Personality
courses, books on etiquette, and the efforts of the
Hamilton Institute combined with Pelmanism would be of
little avail to gain you preferment. Listerine could not remove
the odor nor Pond’s Cream make your countenance
seem agreeable. So at least, we believe, and so the rising generation
must be taught to believe, or cleanliness may depart
from among us.
But it is now said by some of the physiologists (doubtless
untruly) that nearly all the supposed scientific arguments
for bathing are fictions and fallacies. Item: The skin does not
excrete any appreciable amount of harmful substances from
the body, nor do the pores “breathe.” Therefore your system
is not purified by “keeping the pores open” and one argument
on bathing-for-health disappears. Item: A chief function
of the skin is to protect the body; poisons, such as mercury,
cannot enter your body through a skin proofed with its
own secretions, but will seep through if the natural lubricants
have been washed away with warm water, soap, or
other methods. Therefore your health is, in this respect at
least, the safer the less you bathe, and another of the standard
arguments vanishes. Item: The skin’s own secretions keep it
softer and in better condition than any substitute yet discovered.
This is a deserved pat on the shoulder for the Lord
who made us, but a rather stiff jolt for the cosmetic manufacturers.
Item: The body odors come chiefly from three
areas or parts of the body (that are too taboo for mention
even here). Keeping these clean goes nine-tenths of the way
toward freeing you from odors that other normal humans
can detect, and changing your underwear every day, or
even every other day, would go the remaining one-tenth,
thus removing that argument for bathing.
And so on for many arguments more, the sum of which
is that if you have a healthy skin it is safe enough to bathe
if you like; but with eczema and certain other diseases you
must not bathe if you want to stop the blotches from spreading,
or to sleep for the itching at night.
Now just assume, for argument’s sake, that all the above
(or to be conservative, say half of it), is true. Then ask yourself,
would you be in favor of having little children of the
dirty-ear stage find out about it? The slogan was, in the generation
of our parents: “Cleanliness is next to Godliness.”
But the investment in soap and in the allied industries has
grown faster since then than the property of the churches,
and the soaps advertise more. Today the sales talk sways the
nation, and it is doubtful if godliness even approaches cleanliness
in popularity. We must fight harder, therefore, to keep
such physiology out of the schools, than any fundamentalist
has yet fought to keep Darwinism out of the colleges. And
we shall succeed, backed as we are by the advertising funds
and the publicity genius of the whole soap industry from
Bon Ami to Zap.
But there is one disquieting thought: The interests of Listerine
and the perfumers are opposed to those of the soap
and bath towel manufacturers. Europe, too, may seek to control
our cleanliness, as it does our politics, by its insidious
propaganda. But, fortunately, it will be disunited. It will be
England pleading that odors be removed with Lifebuoy
against France urging that they be covered up with Houbigant.
These may kill each other off. Then there will be
apathy and discord at home among our Napoleons of business.
Some will stand aside from the struggle, for great
houses, like Colgate, make soap as well as perfume. The
underwear manufacturers will be against both, and so will
the laundries, for they will want us to get rid of odors by
frequent changes of linen. Frequent launderings wear out
clothes and thus benefit the cotton planters of the South and
the wool ranchers of the West.
The issue will be doubtful if the battle ever starts. We, the
great public, having once been won over from France and
the perfume to England and the tub, should try to prevent
the issue from ever rising again by keeping the unæsthetic
new physiology out of the schools.
Furthermore, especially as this book may fall into the
hands of minors, the so-called new physiology is doubtless
all wrong. So let us continue circulating the story about the
page in Venice who was clothed in gold leaf for a pageant
and who died of suffocation because his pores could not
breathe. Let us never forget suggesting, when we see a lad
whose face is covered with pimples, that he has doubtless
been neglecting his wash basin and soap. And let us soft
pedal the fact, if it be a fact, that abstinence from bathing is
frequently prescribed by the most expensive skin specialists.
The Teaching of Geography: The teaching of this science
brings out a new consideration—the reticence customarily
practiced in it, while no less benevolent than in the other
subjects, is based on motives new in our discussion and results
in benefits of a different kind.
When facts are played down in geography teaching it is
not usually because they would be in bad taste or otherwise
detrimental to the character of the scholars, but rather because
they are too complicated. The teachers are busy and
overworked, and the pupils have limited time for the curriculum,
for some of them may have to quit school soon and
go to work. A complicated idea takes a long time to teach,
it is hard to learn and difficult to remember and understand.
From both the giving and receiving end, simplicity is therefore
desirable, but facts have usually the unfortunate defect
of being complicated. In the practice of teaching it is therefore
often necessary and sometimes desirable to ignore them.
We can best and most sympathetically understand this if
we take a case where we have been ourselves deceived, for
we shall then be able to testify from personal knowledge
that we have benefited, or at least that we have suffered no
harm.
The best geographical example under this head is perhaps
one of those upon which we touched briefly in the first
section of this book—that, other things being equal, the farther
north you go the colder it gets, no matter what the time
of year. We shall develop that topic more fully than we did
before, exploring some of its more instructive and entertaining
ramifications.
First we need perspective from the history of geographical
science. As in many other cases, we owe the beginnings of
learning in this field to the Greeks. They may have borrowed
from earlier civilizations, and probably did; but they
formulated the doctrines and cast them into the molds in
which many of them are still set. One of their chief achievements
was that they worked out the laws of temperature
distribution over the earth substantially as we learned them
in the grade schools up to a few years ago, and roughly as
they still remain in the minds of the general public.
Already five hundred years before Christ, the Greeks
knew that the earth was a sphere. They understood the
migration of the sun northward over the earth in summer
and southward in winter between what they called, and
what we still call, the tropics of Cancer and Capricorn. They
also determined the polar circles beyond which the sun does
not rise in winter nor set in summer. This was dividing the
earth into five logical zones. The Greeks and the rest of
mankind lived, they said, in a zone that was temperate. But
if you crossed the Mediterranean and were to travel south
into Africa you would get too near the sun and come first to
a section unpleasantly hot, then to one intolerable, and last
to a burning region where no living thing, either plant or
animal, could exist by reason of the fierce downpour of the
sun’s heat. This was the Torrid Zone. Going north from
Greece you came similarly first to lands unpleasantly cold,
then to others intolerable, and last to a permanently frozen
region “where life is as impossible because of the freezing
as it is in the Torrid Zone because of the burning.” South of
the tropics there doubtless was another temperate zone and
this might be inhabited—probably was, in fact, though we
should never know except by inference, as no one could ever
cross the burning tropics. And at the south end of the earth
would be a second frozen zone.
Thus from their doctrines of beauty, simplicity, and symmetry,
and from the principles of logic the Greeks evolved
laws of temperature distribution which are so easy to explain
and understand that if you had never heard of them before
you could have grasped both them and their necessary implications
from a description no longer nor better composed
than mine that you have just read. Such a natural law is a
boon to teacher and student alike. No wonder, then, that it
held its ground from more than four hundred years before
Christ to more than fourteen hundred years after, as John
Kirtland Wright has recently proved in a long and scholarly
work published by the American Geographical Society of
New York: The Geographical Lore of the Time of the
Crusades.
That we do not still have in the schools these Greek temperature
laws in all their pristine simplicity is due to two of
mankind’s most troublesome qualities, cupidity and skepticism.
In the fifteenth century Western Europe was greedy
for the riches of the Far East, and the road to Cathay, traveled
by Marco Polo and his predecessors and successors, had
been closed by Mohammedan victories over the less bigoted
Mongols. It is usually easy to disbelieve anything that crosses
our desires, and so doubts began to arise as to whether the
tropic lands were really burning hot and the tropic oceans
boiling. Henry the Navigator gets most of the credit for
cooling off the burning zone by sending out ship after ship
that went farther and farther south along the West Coast of
Africa, each returning with fearful tales of what they had
seen or imagined, but most of them nevertheless returning
and thus giving hope that others might go still farther. At
last a ship did sail to where the sun stood overhead without
cooking the sailors alive. Indeed, she returned with the story
that the days had not been hotter right below the sun than
they were on some occasions in Portugal.
So began the “Conquest of the Tropics,” and so ended
the simplicity of the Greek laws of temperature distribution.
Every work on meteorology of college grade now tells you
that the highest temperatures registered by thermometers in
the shade, under weather bureau conditions, are not recorded
in the Torrid Zone at all; but in the Temperate (!) Zones.
Probably the highest in-the-shade records so far taken are
those of Death Valley, California, about 900 miles north of
the northern edge of the Torrid Zone—136°; almost certainly
the highest temperatures that can be recorded in
Africa are in the Sahara Desert, also north of the tropics. If
there are higher temperatures south of the Equator we feel
sure they will not be near the Equator, but near the tropic of
Capricorn or else (more likely) in the South Temperate
Zone.
These principles are now known to all authors of text
books, but they are still able to maintain a degree of simplicity
in the lower school grades by implying it is average
temperatures that matter, and by saying nothing about extremes.
The fact is that averages count for some things and
extremes for others, and that both are important. It is not,
of course, the average cold of January that sometimes destroys
the fruit in the South, but the one extreme night; similarly
it is not the average heat of July that kills by sunstroke in
New York but the one extreme day. Extremes are really
more important, in that sense, than averages; but averages
are much simpler and more teachable. It is so complicated to
explain and remember that extremes may be high where
averages are high, that extremes may be high where averages
are low, and that extremes may be low where averages
are low. We would certainly have to lengthen out our school
courses if we went into such hairsplitting, and our millions
of potential workers would be kept out of the mills and factories
even longer than they are now. Besides, the complexities
of facts are bewildering and confusing to the average
mind, and never give the feeling of enlightenment you have
when you grasp a simple principle which throws a flood of
logical light on a previously haphazard world.
It is unfortunate—or perhaps fortunate—that we have not
space to go deeply into the history of the way in which the
simple Greek law of temperature distribution has been gradually
broken down by explorers who went to remote places
and came back with stories of conditions that did not fit into
the theory, and how the scientists toiled at fitting together
the mosaic pieces till they finally evolved an explanation that
does fit all the facts. But we must give at least a brief sketch.
The investigation that has been going on since the days of
Prince Henry the Navigator started from the simple Greek
proposition: There is no cold and the greatest heat on the
Equator, no extreme of either heat or cold in the North
Temperate Zone, and no heat but merely intense cold at
the North Pole. The first slight exceptions to this had, of
course, been noted long before Henry’s day: The mountain
tops are cold. Other discrepancies due to sea breezes, ocean
currents, and many other things soon followed, but they
were, on the whole, not very difficult to explain as exceptions
to the rule. True enough, the altitude one was taken to be a
universal exception; mountains were said to be colder than
their surroundings in any zone at any time of year, and it
became a popular saying that climbing a few feet up was like
traveling a good many miles north.
All exceptions other than altitude were explained in the
Middle Ages, and down to our day, as an inroad of conditions
from one zone into the territory of another—the Gulf
Stream warmed the British Isles because it came from the
tropics, the Labrador Current cooled Newfoundland because
it came from the Arctic, and so on. New Yorkers still
speak of sunstroke waves as coming from the Equator, even
on occasions when the press reports few or no deaths south
of Washington and the weather bureau shows that Boston
is hotter than Richmond (those who think about it at all
probably supposing that the heat arrives by some special
conveyance through the upper atmosphere). By similar acceptance
of theory and lack of reasoning, cold winds are still
spoken of as coming from the North Pole.
Serious trouble for the classic theory first developed when
travelers returned from the Arctic with their reports. John
Davis, whose name you find on the strait west of Greenland,
said, for instance, that he had been far within the so-called
Frozen Zone “three divers times” (1585-1588) and that he
had on occasion found the weather there “as salubrious as
ever I did in the Isles of De Verde”—which was certainly
amazing, for those islands lie in the region supposed until
Prince Henry’s time (after 1400 A.D.) to be lifeless “because
of the burning.”
Both before and after Davis there were, however, conflicting
reports from the Arctic explorers, those of the hero
kind speaking (with modest reserve) only about the cold,
while those of the commercial type, like Davis, dwelt on the
surprising heat. On the whole there was reason for the textbook
writers to side uncompromisingly with the Greeks
(particularly in elementary education, where simplicity is
most desirable), so long as any travelers continued to support
them.
The balance was more seriously disturbed than ever before
when the weather bureaus entered the field, and the U. S.
Weather Bureau, for instance, began to report from Fort
Yukon, Alaska, which is within the Arctic Circle, temperatures
and humidities like those which kill people in New
York. After that the classic simplicity of the zone in which
it is “always cold” could be maintained only by ignoring the
records. This has been done with remarkable success, for
the textbooks stating or plainly inferring that it is never
warm in the Arctic were in extensive use in American schools
for more than twenty years after the Bureau at Washington
began to publish at government expense Arctic temperatures
ranging up to 100° in the shade. You can verify this by going
ten years back in the geographies used by the schools of
your own neighborhood—not in every case, but in most.
There are some texts still in use which imply that it is
never warm in the Arctic, but many have felt themselves
compelled to present the following complicated explanation
of Arctic summer temperatures (after stating that the old
law does hold for three-quarters of the year): Practically all
the heat comes from the sun, some arriving at any given spot
directly in the form of light, some transported there by various
agencies, such as winds, ocean currents. The amount of
heat (light) delivered straight from the sun to a unit of the
earth’s surface on a summer day depends primarily on how
nearly vertical the sun is and for how many hours it shines;
but secondarily it depends on other factors, such as clouds or
dust in the atmosphere, the color of the surface the light rays
strike, and so on. The resulting temperature, as observed
either by a thermometer or by the human sensory organs, is
further modified by how long a night, during which heat
was lost, has preceded the day, and by how much “cold” was
stored in that locality by the preceding winter. In some places
that are mountainous, such as Greenland, this winter chill
has been effectively stored in the form of snow, which not
only throws back the light rays without giving them a chance
to turn into heat but also neutralizes those that have become
heat by using them to lessen its own cold; other places, such
as the ocean, have also stored the “cold” effectively, and cancel
the heat of the summer with great success. Therefore it is
never very hot on mountains in the Arctic, nor on the
ocean; and it is probable that if you spent a summer in a
tent on an ice floe at the North Pole out-of-doors you would
never observe a temperature higher than twenty degrees
above freezing (say 50° or 55° F.) measured five feet above
the ice. It would of course be much hotter if you put up a
windbreak and then let the sun shine on a dark tarpaulin
spread on the floe.
But there are in the Arctic, the explanation would continue,
thousands of square miles of low land not very near
either to mountains or to the sea. Over these it is far colder
in winter than at the North Pole (because the air above the
Pole is warmed by the heat radiated by the ocean up through
the floating ice). Winter winds are therefore frequently
warmer when they blow from the north than from some
other direction, and in some places the coldest winds are
southerly. This extreme cold makes a heavy precipitation impossible,
and the average snowfall of the Arctic lowlands for
twelve months is therefore less than the average snowfall of
Virginia or Scotland. This little snow dissolves quickly in
the spring, and after that the sunlight strikes a dark surface,
which helps it turn into heat. Nor is there much cold stored
anywhere near that can become effective to neutralize the
sun. What cold had been stored up by the snow is gone, except
as it is held in a little water on or near the surface. What
has been taken up by the ground through last winter, and
through the centuries, is securely imprisoned there; for the
first few inches which thaw near the surface become an insulating
blanket that confines the rest of the chill and makes
it as powerless to affect the temperature of the air as if it
were hundreds of miles away.
On the Arctic prairie that is remote from mountains or
the sea, one factor, then, far overshadows all others in determining
how hot any given day shall be. This is the quantity
of heat received each hour from the sun at that place, multiplied
by the number of hours. Now, at the Equator the sun
can deliver heat no more than twelve hours out of every
twenty-four, giving the tropical prairie an equal length of
time in which to cool off. But on the prairie north of the
Arctic circle the sun shines the whole twenty-four hours, delivering
less heat per hour than at the Equator, but more per
day, and without any night in which to cool off. There is,
accordingly, a period in summer, varying in length according
to where you are in the Arctic, during which the sun
delivers to your locality about the same heat per day as at
the Equator. This is the rule, for it is based on the broadest
principles; the places where it does not work out are exceptions,
for narrower or special reasons. And it is a fact that
there are many places on and near the Equator where the
hottest day in a hundred years does not equal the hottest
days of the same century at many places in the Arctic that
are equally high above sea level.
Few will deny the interest of the preceding facts; but, says
the really sensible man, the world is full of interesting things,
and we certainly have not room for them all in the textbooks,
nor time for them all in the schools. The practical value of
this curious Arctic lore is very small to the average man, who
stays at home or, at the most, goes to Paris; though it is undeniably
highly useful to those few individuals who travel
to the Arctic and who want to know in advance what sort of
weather to expect, warning them to take fly dope instead of
furs if they are going on a Midnight Sun excursion to Fort
Yukon. But even for the excursionist, facts are not an unmixed
blessing. If you know about the heat and the mosquitoes
in advance, you will not have the pleasure of discovering
them; the fly dope may save you from stings, but
it also spoils the after-dinner value of the tale about how
foolish you were and how badly instructed before you went
north, which sort of story is the only really satisfactory way
of putting your listeners both firmly and pleasantly among
the uninstructed where they belong. And even from their
point of view, too much advance knowledge is rather a bore,
for what is the drawing-room value of that which everybody
has learned in school when compared with: “Jones, you
know, the Famous Traveler, told me once that when he was
in the Yukon, etc.”
Facts are tedious, anyhow, and we should think carefully
before agreeing that the simple and edifying Greek rule shall
go by the board. Consider just a few of the entertaining and
instructive things, some of them with no mean character-building
value, that would have to go, too.
Item: All the ideas would have to go that are similar to
the familiar kindergarten ditty that has been sung by millions
of little Americans and which goes something like this
(there seems to be no standard version):
“Frosty little Eskimo,
In your house of ice and snow.”
and so on, till the final line:
“For in Greenland there is nothing green to grow!”
We might be able to salvage the house of ice and snow temporarily,
though it is a bothersome fact that of something
over 14,000 Eskimos in Greenland, by the last census, less
than 300 had ever seen a snow house. But the “nothing green
to grow” would not last very long under the combined attack
of the unromantic geographers, who insist on pointing
out weather bureau records, and the historians of Greenland,
who will tell you that the country was a republic from 986 a.d.
to 1261 (a good deal longer than the United States has
yet been a republic) and a dependency of Norway and Denmark
thereafter; that they had churches and monasteries administered
from European archbishoprics (you may have
seen the Greenlandic church ruins in the movies some years
ago, as background for the King of Denmark hobnobbing
with Eskimos). The historians will point out that a European
civilization could not have existed in Greenland during
the Middle Ages except for stock raising. The colonists had
cattle, with as many as a hundred head in a single barn.
They lived in considerable part on milk and milk products,
and wove cloth from their own sheep, making garments
which you can examine today through photographs in many
books or study in the museum collections of Europe. Both
cattle and sheep raising are now again practiced in Greenland,
and have been for many decades. That means hay, and
hay means meadows with that “something green to grow”
which is denied by the kindergarten.
Such are the facts, but what of it? If we pressed them upon
children while they were at the impressionable age, we
would so change their mental picture of Greenland as to
rob it of every charm it has so long had for us. What substitute
would they find for the delicious thrills and chills that
creep up and down our spines as we look with the mind’s
eye upon a world of permanent white silence and peer into
Greenlandic snow houses where Eskimos shiver (doubtless
without their teeth chattering, else it would not be so silent)
as they devour (again silently) the blubber that enables them
to eke out their miserable existence. And then there is the
character-building value of thinking what a marvelous thing
is the human spirit that continues its fight against the powers
of darkness and cold even up there on the frozen edge of
the world. On the other hand, too, how fortunate we are
who live in a country of warmth and green grass—and
schools. Take away, if you must, the good old picture of the
North that is always cold; but consider first what it is you
are going to give our disillusioned children in its stead.
Surely it will have to be something better than cow pastures
and a few ruined churches. We already have at home enough
of the one and many of the other.
Teaching Through Educational Movies: While our love
for children makes us conceal from them anything that may
be injurious to their welfare, the same affection leads us to
strive for their instruction in whatever we consider beneficial.
But in this field we are sometimes misled. I have in
mind a special case, parents who were greatly incensed at a
movie called Nanook of the North, which, although not
true to the native life of the Eskimos, had been shown in
their children’s school and recommended as true. But these
parents were wrong, as will appear.
To begin with, the Nanook story was at least as true as
that of Santa Claus, of which those parents approved. It was
the same sort of partial truthfulness, only greater. Real as
well as Santa reindeer have horns, four legs, and are driven
before sleighs in harness, though not such sleighs, quite, nor
in such harness as the ordinary Christmas pictures show.
They run on the ground, not through the air; they are very
swift, though not quite so speedy as Santa’s. There are in the
world old men, too, who would like to give a present to every
child at Christmas if they could, though there is no old man
that actually succeeds in doing it. Thus the Santa story, while
fiction in a way, does represent truths.
Similarly with the movie, Nanook. There are Eskimos in
Hudson Bay where the picture was taken, and the people
you see on the screen are Eskimos, which is more realism,
right from the start, than you have ever had in a Santa Claus
picture. The country you see, too, is the real Hudson Bay.
True enough, not even the coldest month up there averages
as cold as Nanook tells you the whole year averages (35°
below zero), but then you must have something exceptional
in a movie or it would not impress. You are told, too, that
the Hudson Bay Eskimos still hunt with their primitive
weapons, and this is justified. For it would spoil the unity of
the picture to tell the truth about the weapons, though it is
an interesting fact in itself that the forefathers of the Eskimos
shown on the screen have had guns for generations, as the
Hudson’s Bay Company has been trading into the Bay since
1670. Moreover the titles do not actually say that the Bay
Eskimos hunt with primitive weapons only, so you can take
it any way you like. Doubtless the producer meant nothing
more than to say that the children (who are certainly Eskimos)
still play at hunting (which would be hunting of a
sort) with bows and arrows.
No real Eskimos, in my belief, ever hunted seals through
the ice in the manner shown in the picture, nor do I think a
seal could be killed by that method unless he were a defective.
But it is true that certain Eskimos in other parts of the
Arctic (about half of all there are) do know how seals can
be killed through ice. That the Hudson Bay Eskimos, with
whom our producer had to deal, did not know such methods
was no fault of his, and he would have been deficient in resource
if he had allowed that to stop him. Neither are there
libraries in Hudson Bay where he might have borrowed a
book that described the method so he could have studied it
up and taught it to the local natives. There he was with an
expensive movie expedition, the picture just had to be taken,
and audiences in the South would demand to be shown what
they had heard of—Eskimos sealing through the ice. And so
a method was developed (perhaps by the Eskimos themselves
along lines roughly indicated by the director) which
photographs beautifully and gives as much feeling of enlightenment
to an audience as if it showed the real technique
that does secure seals.
I have gone to Nanook many times for the purpose of observing
the audiences. In several cases some movie fan has
noticed that the seal ostensibly speared in the picture is stiff
and dead, clearly planted there. But that, it seems to me, is
all the realism you could expect in a play. You would not
demand that Fairbanks really kill all his adversaries, though
you do appreciate seeing a bit of good swordsmanship. And
in Nanook, what seal but a dead one could possibly be expected
to allow himself to be speared in the manner shown?
Another thing I have found Nanook audiences complaining
about is that they had heard somewhere that Eskimo
snow houses are warm and comfortable, while the Nanook
picture shows the occupants shivering as they strip for going
to bed, and there are clouds of steam puffing from their
mouths and nostrils. These erudite fans are still more
troubled when they see the movie title which says that the
Eskimos must always keep their snow house interiors below
freezing to prevent them from melting, for they have read a
book by someone who has lived in a snow house and who
has explained the principles of physics by which, when the
weather is cold enough outside (and no weather was ever
quite so cold as the Nanook country is supposed to be), the
snow does not melt though it is comfortably warm inside—say,
as warm as the average British or Continental living
rooms in winter. But the answer is simple, and the producer
is quite justified by it: An Eskimo snow house is too small
for inside photography, and the light might not be good
enough. So to get the best light and plenty of room for the
camera man, half the house was cut away (like the “sets”
you see in the movie studios), and the poor Eskimos were
disrobing and going to bed out of doors. But it would have
spoiled the picture to introduce such technical details. Hence
the producer had to explain the shivering people and their
visible breathing by the harmless pretence that snow house
interiors have to be colder than freezing to prevent the walls
and roof from thawing.
And so on for the whole picture.
It was the very fact just stated and others like them which
made my friends angry. That may have been because the
realities of the picture were not so charitably interpreted to
them as we have done above. It is possible to make the same
facts look a good deal worse if you try.
But no charity is needed, and only a proper understanding
of the case, to reconcile any parent to a movie like Nanook
and to its presentation in the school. For the Eskimo, properly
understood, is really the grown-up’s Santa Claus. We
love the world of the imagination. Santa, fat, jolly and generous,
portrays certain things and qualities as we would like
them to be. But in the world of fancy we need contrasts;
ugliness as well as beauty, wickedness as well as goodness.
For the proper effect, we need not only Heaven, but Hell
also. It may be pleasant to think how fortunate you will be if
you go to Heaven, but that is nothing compared to the satisfaction
you get from a reasonable prospect of being able to
keep out of Hell.
What we mean, then, is that the Eskimo is really a sort
of reversed Santa; and that since Hell has begun to fade,
the Arctic is our best substitute. For somehow grown people,
even those who cannot visualize Hell, seem to be able to believe
not only that Hudson Bay is in the Arctic but also that
the Arctic averages thirty-five degrees below zero, as the picture
says the Hudson Bay country does, and that it has all
the other distressing attributes.
In fact, the Arctic, peopled by Eskimos, is much more practical
for our purposes than any inferno ever was when peopled
by tormented spirits. No picture of spirits ever gets us
like one of a wretched flesh-and-blood Eskimo who shivers
from one year’s end to the other. Away up there, crouched
in his foul, unventilated house, drinking oil, he has a power
to make us remarkably contented with poor lodgings, a
careless landlord, and meals at Childs’. In our little backyard
with its one wretched tree we think with a pleasant compassion
of the stunted little Arctic Mongol who has never
seen even a bush. And then, to make his usefulness complete,
we remember in summer when we are perishing with the
heat that Nature has her compensations! She mercifully sees
to it that her chilled children of the snows shall at least
escape sunstroke and the after effects of too much Coca-Cola.
And how could you get these and other similar benefits
from the Eskimo and the Arctic if you did not encourage
such pictures as Nanook of the North, and the books that
correspond? And what better time than the impressionable
years of childhood in which to acquire ideas that are going
to have such high consolatory and moral values later?
******
Perhaps, Gentle Reader, you had arrived at the truth about
Truth before you saw this treatise. If so, you will know, or
you may have guessed by the trend of this inquiry, that
neither side is going to have it all its own way. At first
Truth (in the sense of facts) seemed to be getting the worst
of it, being so frequently immaterial, inexpedient, even
immoral, and nearly always in such bad taste. But the last
argument from geography has shown the merits divided,
with, generally speaking, the “practical” advantages in favor
of the facts, but the idealistic ones against them. We are
likely to feel here an immediate concern that in a crass and
materialistic age the “practical” side will prevail. Not necessarily,
for we may be able to show the higher practicality of
idealism.
We will admit now, partly to save the trouble of a formal
canvass, that the rest of the argument from the schools will
go, on the whole, against us; or, rather, against the conclusions
deduced. The fact is, our position is not really at all
what it has seemed to be. We keep another, and so far unhinted,
solution in reserve.
******
A Glance over the Other Studies: A critical study of psychological
teaching would not go against the preceding
conclusions from history, physiology, geography, and the
educational movies, but in fact decidedly in their favor, more
especially as the newer developments have tended so strongly
toward an undesirable, and, in fact, degrading materialism.
Psychoanalysis and especially behaviorism come near being a
total loss from the point of view of character-building. But
chemistry has scarcely any bad aspects unless you happen to
be a pacifist, objecting to gunpowder and poison gas. But
even so, what is that when measured against soap, a product
of chemistry on which rests that perfect cleanliness revered
today even beyond godliness? Physics, too, is on the right
side, especially those theories of it that are neither so puzzling
that the ordinary man can make nothing of them, or else are
clear in statement but seemingly lead to impossible conclusions—which
can, nevertheless, be experimentally verified.
For it is so valuable to be able to lay one’s hands somewhere
on views that seem either silly or impossible and can
nevertheless be proved. Reasoning from them gives such
force to analogous religious views which it does not happen
to be possible to verify.
Going ahead thus to canvass the rest of the grade school
and high school sciences (for we have inadvertently progressed
on our argument a little beyond the grades before
we knew it) we shall come to the provisional conclusion
that about forty per cent of the truths of education are good
and should continue to be encouraged, about forty per cent
are bad and should be ignored or suppressed, and the remaining
twenty per cent are all right in themselves but too
complicated and should be reserved for those who continue
their education into the universities.
Since our love and care prompt us to make the education
of our children their best and most logical preparation for
the life which we admire, it is not really necessary for our
present examination to go beyond the common and high
schools, for they are a sort of abstract or synopsis of the
world as we both think it is and want it to be. Still it will do
no harm to take another case or two.
In politics, for instance, would you want the whole truth
told about every candidate? You can test that out with a few
simple reactions. When it was whispered around, for instance,
that Harding was partly of negro descent, was it your
first inclination to try to discover if the charge were true or
not? On the contrary, you almost certainly took no thought
of truth or falsehood, but were offended and angered by the
bad taste and poor sportsmanship of whoever it was that
started the yarn. In the case of Wilson, would you have
favored it (even as a Republican) if there had been openly
circulated some of the things which (as a Republican) you
firmly believed about him? Bad sportsmanship again, and
bad taste; you would not have done it and are glad no one
did. Even in the case of so innocent a thing as President
Theodore Roosevelt’s bad eye, said to have resulted from a
boyish sparring bout, would you, as a Democrat this time,
have favored any campaign use of it whatsoever? Once more,
bad sportsmanship, bad taste, an emphatic no.
In the August, 1927, number of Harper’s Magazine Dr.
Joseph Collins, famous as a physician in all literary circles,
had an article on Should Doctors Tell the Truth? It will not
take a reading of that article, nor anything but a backward
glance of the mind over our own experiences, to make us
agree with him when he says: “The longer I practice medicine
the more I am convinced that every physician should
cultivate lying as a fine art.” Nor do we quarrel with the general
conclusion that while a physician should tell the truth in
certain cases, lying is usually the kinder, the safer, and therefore
the better way.
And what of the every day social relations that are more
important than our business or professional contacts to most
of us? Consider the one remark: “How well you are looking!”
Can you imagine the sort of place this world would
be if that little exclamatory sentence, or its equivalent, were
not working overtime in every country? I know my own
case. Ever since I can remember the declaration: “You are
looking better than when I saw you last,” has cheered me
greatly. It was not till a year or two ago that it first struck
me that if this had been uniformly true all these years I
ought to be looking remarkably well by now. But even so,
I am still able to take a little comfort in this serial fiction.
In view of the benevolent nature of the many sample reticences
we have considered, all of which and many more like
them are sure of a heavy vote in their favor could this nation,
or any other civilized country, be polled on the subject—in
view of this and much more that could be said in favor, is
it not rather strange that most of us have allowed ourselves
to fall victims to that cynical outlook on life which considers
the deceiver, almost necessarily, wicked? You see how absurd
that is, particularly if you think back over the cases of your
own deception. As a child you may have deceived your
parents occasionally to get out of a licking; but far oftener,
I am sure, you did it to save their feelings, so they would not
be offended or worried—on the well-known and sound principle
that “what you don’t know don’t hurt you.” And, in
later life, was it not usually the same? In school you bluffed
partly for marks, of course, but very often, almost oftener
than you realized, to save the feelings of a kindly teacher
who trusted you and would have been so disappointed had he
known. In married life, too, you deceive, oftener than not (I
am sure the married will agree) to save the feelings of the
other party. In fact, the conjugal relation calls for the highest
known percentage of benevolent reticence. There are, for
instance, certain situations that do not seem to irk the technically
aggrieved parties, even when they know about them,
so long as they are able to keep up the appearance of not
knowing. And what is more, that public which always takes
an interest in the marriage relations of other people, does not
think it reprehensible for the technically aggrieved party to
know about the dereliction and still do nothing, so long as
he does not know that the public knows he knows.
In fact, next in importance after the systematic deception
of children by parents, comes the amiable deception of husband
and wife by each other. That is not only in the nature
of things, but proper according to the highest standards,
since the family is the social unit and the home the strong
citadel of our institutions.
CONCLUSION
We have now come to a point where we can survey the
whole ground and draw reasonable conclusions from the
facts set down. The irresistible main decision is against the
rest of the philosophers and against all their philosophy. This
is as it should be; for what would be the profit of a new
philosophy if it failed to destroy the old? The philosophers
may, of course, rise to counter-attack; but what do we reck
of that? For we have the public with us, since we have come
to a conclusion which justifies what they always have done,
what they dearly love doing, and what they are at heart convinced
is right—though they did not know it, any more than
the perfect athlete knows how he balances when he walks.
The conclusion is, then, that like religion, truth is neither
good nor bad. There are good religions and bad religions,
good truths and bad.
Generally, though, or at least more often than not, truth is,
in practice, bad—especially in the fields of æsthetics, ethics,
morals, character-building, and business (which last we have
not stopped to argue since it is so self-evident).
We pointed out in the first section of this book the necessary
imperfection of all the sciences except mathematics.
Since nothing is true there by observation or by any evidence,
but merely by agreement, it is obvious that truth in mathematics
need never be bad—since we are not obliged to agree
on it if we do not like it, and nothing is bad unless it is
something we do not like.
Though we have not covered the field exhaustively, we
may agree that truth is good, usually, in engineering, chemistry,
physics, and the allied sciences. It is good in astronomy
and geology whenever it does not conflict with religion. It
is good about as often as bad in sociology, psychology, physiology,
biology, and several of the related sciences, for in
these about half the time it appears to support present-day
manners, current morals and the prevalent religion. In history,
civics and many such fields it is always open to the
gravest suspicion. In the training of very young children as
a general thing it should be rather carefully avoided.
THE NECESSARY REFORMS
Having arrived at this conclusion, we must profit by it. At
first sight it will seem that, since we have found the truth
bad as often as not, the thing to do would be to proclaim our
emancipation from its tyranny. But that would be forgetting
the more important part of our findings—the benevolent
nature and salutary effects of at least a good half of all the
deception there is. How could you carry on a Santa Claus
campaign, or remain happily married, if you said openly
that you were going to deceive whenever you thought it
best? It is only in prestidigitation, where “the quickness of
the hand deceives the eye,” that you can safely tell people
that you are going to fool them. In spiritualist seances, in
praying for rain, or in forecasting a year without a summer,
what effect do you suppose you would produce if you said to
everybody that you were doing everything for its mere psychological
effect on them?
We can well take our pointer as to what to do from a
famous general who has announced publicly that he is going
to explain in a book just how he himself and his associates
invented and circulated some of the most effective (or outrageous)
lies of the Great War. In connection with this announcement
he has had two things to explain, and he has
made an explanation that is not only satisfactory in his case
but admirably suited to broader uses.
Asked how he could, without shame, admit such lies as
he proposed to admit, he replied in substance that if you are
justified in using shrapnel, poison gas, torpedoes from submarines
and bombs from airships, you are justified in using
any means at all. The main concern is to make the nation at
home and the soldiers in the field a unit for the war, and you
cannot do that unless you at least convince them that there
is good reason to fight. The more convinced they are the better
they will fight, and what propaganda does is to make
them more convinced. This argument is so familiar that it
deserves no further amplification.
The General’s second defense was against the accusation
that he had said himself that he expected another war within
twenty-five years from the last, and that such a war could
not be won without propaganda. How, then, did he justify
himself in giving away his country’s secrets of just how its
citizens were fooled in the last war? His reply was that the
remedy would be very simple. All you had to do was to
say: “Yes, quite right; we fooled you in the last war. But
times have changed and that sort of thing would not work
now. Besides, we would not fool you even if it served our
ends, we have become so honorable.” Having said this, you
could go ahead and fool them not only with the old methods
but, in some cases, with the very same tale. All you will have
to do in the last case is to explain: “The story which we invented
in the last war must have given the enemy the idea,
for now they are actually doing what we then accused them
of.”
We may well adapt the General’s ideas to a wider field.
The leaders of thought among us must continue to proclaim
their devotion to Truth, in order that they may be able to
get people to believe and act upon those things that are for
the general welfare.
The conclusions and recommendations at which we have
arrived will receive informal support from most thoughtful
and all public-spirited persons. But will that be enough, especially
in view of the solid front presented by the old-school
philosophers, who still hold that the Good is the same as the
True, and that the True is whatever corresponds to facts?
It should be enough, for we have an initial advantage in the
cogency and popular appeal of our reasoning. By considering
the very same facts as the old philosophers, but merely
selecting them more judiciously and approaching them from
the opposite, or scientific, angle (of reasoning from facts
to principles), we have discovered (what has long been instinctively
felt) that many facts are bad; and have demonstrated
that the Good cannot be synonymous with every
kind of fact, for that would make good synonymous with
bad, which is nonsense. The Good, we have thus demonstrated,
has no necessary relation to facts at all, but is ultimately
determined by the sound instincts of the majority.
The ancients, it seems, anticipated our findings in a measure;
but that is natural, and strengthens our position, for we
are only trying to go back to the first principles of Nature,
and they understood Nature better than we, being closer to
her and yielding a freer rein to their instincts. They expressed
their conclusion in the saying that “The voice of the
people is the voice of God.” The triumph of the same idea
was poetically forecast by Tennyson when he spoke of an
epoch in which “The common sense of most shall hold a
fretful realm in awe.”
Can we secure the triumph which Tennyson foresaw, the
need of which we have shown, without a special organization
to attain it? Pondering the question, it does not seem
that we need any wholly new organization, but rather a
federation of those existing agencies that believe in acting
on our principle—the principle of the sound common sense
of the majority. Consider what we have to start with: The
Fundamentalists would take care of religion, the American
Legion and the Liberty League would see to patriotism and
would safeguard the status quo, the Anti-Saloon League, the
W.C.T.U., and similar organizations would look after the
prohibition of alcoholics (and other prohibitions, as needed);
the Society for the Suppression of Vice, the Watch and Ward
Society, and their kind, would protect our literary and other
morals. And so on through the list.
Of course it will never do for the benevolent organizations
to continue acting separately, each for its own end.
They must unite. The Fundamentalists must agree to support
the Legion and League on patriotism, and they must
return the favor by a united Anti-Darwinism. All of them
must get behind the next Clean Books Bill, and so on till
every organization to promote the common good has the
support of every other.
Such union will be strength, but there will be more power
in reserve that may be called on when needed. Suppose, for
instance, that the schools are threatened. The toy makers, the
printers of fairy tales, and the educational movie people will
see to it that Noah and his Ark remain in our religion, Jack
and the Beanstalk in our folklore, and the permanently
frozen Arctic in our geographies. The politicians will arrange
that the histories shall continue to be reticent and the
soapmakers will look out that the physiology of the skin
does not get too well understood. Back of all such individuals,
corporations, or groups, will be the sound morality
and the good taste of the community, taking care that mere
facts shall not lead us too far astray.
CHAPTER III.
Are Explorers to Join the Dodo?
THERE ARE FEW WHO WILL NOT ADMIT THAT EXPLORATION IS A
Good Thing (we do not here deal with those who question
its economic importance, and so on). In this chapter we offer
proofs that exploration can remain durable after the last
island has been discovered.
With so much recent flying over seas previously unknown,
and no land discovered on any of the flights, the commentators
are beginning to worry about the end of the romantic
Age of Exploration, and the possible extinction of the Columbus
family. Are there to be no more explorers, they ask, or,
at least, no more Great Explorers?
Waiving the question of whether it matters much if the
tribe of Columbuses does perish, we have encouragement, of
a sort, in a study of the inside history of exploration, by
which we see that nearly all the most famous explorers came
into their greatest fame through misunderstanding, or
through the planned or accidental fruits of publicity. That
is good news for those who want us to have Great Explorers
in future. For there is always room for more misunderstandings,
and surely the arts of publicity are not on the wane.
The Columbuses should, therefore, be able to flourish among
us yet awhile. Their last fade-out will come only when mankind
ceases to delight in being humbugged.
For those who want new Columbuses hereafter, there is
nothing more encouraging than the story of Christopher
Columbus himself. If there were any such thing as an abstract
greatness in discovery, then surely the discoverer of
America would not have been Christopher, but the first
human being who stepped ashore on the continent, or who
first saw it from a distance (I rule out of court the beasts that
were ahead of the humans, since the institution of fame has
never been developed among them).
This first human discoverer came thousands of years ago,
and may have been a Negrito or some sort of Negroid person.
He may have resembled a kind of Chinaman, or perhaps
he was a good deal like some modern Europeans. (In that
case the Nordics would assume, a priori, that he must have
been a Nordic, or at least an Asiatic proto-Nordic, in whom
their coming greatness was already foreshadowed.) One
more assumption is that the discovery probably took place
across Bering Straits or along the Aleutian chain, though
some contend that it may have been from island to island
across the South Pacific.
But we are really perverting the meaning of “discoverer”
by this talk of Negro or Mongol, for by immemorial practice
the use of that word is confined to Europeans. No place
is discovered until some European finds it. It might be safer
to narrow down still farther the meaning of “discoverer,”
for there are books claiming that a kind of European (in the
sense of coming from Europe) really found North America
in very ancient prehistoric times. These would not have been
adequate discoverers, for they probably resembled Eskimos,
and no one would suggest that a place was discovered when
the first Eskimo found it—even if he came from Europe.
We do not arrive at a proper competition in claims of discovery
until we begin to discuss whether the Irish found
America. They have enough political and other prominence—in
fact, they are the next most fashionable whites after
the Nordics. Still, merely being Irish is not enough, for what
we really mean by a Great Discoverer is a European who was
hurrahed while living or at least haloed reasonably soon
after he died. The Irish discoverer, if there was one, does not
meet these requirements. The Irish themselves never tried
to make much of him until recently, when they became
ambitious for setting up a rival to Columbus. Greatness
does not sit very securely on even the most deserving dead
man unless, as said, he develops a cult soon after his real or
alleged deeds.
After the Irish, we come to more formidable discoverers,
for we know their names and they have the advantage of
being Nordic—Gunnbjorn, who first of known Europeans
sighted the American island of Greenland, probably around
the year 900; Eric the Red, who colonized Greenland following
982; and his son Leif the Lucky, who visited the American
mainland in A.D. 1000. There are no scholars and few
intelligent laymen who dispute the records of Eric and his
son Leif, but still most of them agree that they were not the
real discoverers of America, even though the Papacy followed
soon and effectively in their footsteps by establishing
churches in Greenland about 1050, maintaining them for
400 years, and encouraging the knowledge of the Western
World to spread throughout Europe by way of the learning
that bound together the medieval monasteries.
Christopher Columbus is the discoverer of America chiefly
because he and what he was supposed to have done got the
right advance publicity. Marco Polo and others had reminded
Europe afresh of the riches of the East. Desert raiders, fairly
well press-agented for those days, were making more dangerous
the overland routes which had always been difficult.
Prince Henry the Navigator and his group had finally
worked out an eastward seaway by rounding South Africa,
but the way was stormy and tedious. Everybody wanted an
easy and cheap eastward route. For centuries many had been
trying and the public interest was constantly getting more
and more inflamed.
Then, at the psychological moment, Columbus sailed westward
for the East, with all his other publicity advantages
strengthened by fashionable royal backing. He struck land,
and at first everybody thought he had discovered a short
route to the wealth of the Indies. A little later doubts arose,
about which people argued violently, and the arguing was
quite as good for advertising as the previous harmony of acclaim.
Before the legend died that Columbus had found
Asia, other legends about gold and jewels and fountains of
youth had grown up to take its place. There never was a
let-down of publicity until colonies developed, and America
became wealthy in her own right.
As a result of the centuries of advertising that thus went
before the rise of historical scholarship, it is hopeless now
to try to disturb the preeminence of Columbus by publishing
the truth about all the discoverers who preceded him. Folklore
has gathered about him until he is almost as safe in his
historical shrine as if he had never existed, like some god or
demigod. When a well-known character is securely mythical
he has such permanence as our world can give. Hercules is
more famous now and his achievements are more widely
known than ever they were in the days when a handful of
Greeks believed in him. Little Red Riding Hood is better
known than Queen Elizabeth, more safely immortal than
Mary Baker G. Eddy. If fame depends on any achievement
at all, it depends only on publicity achievement.
Greatness in the field of discovery can be acquired today
or tomorrow by the same publicity methods that worked for
Columbus. That such modern greatness happens to have been
secured most often by men who deserved well and worked
honestly, is really beside the point. For others who deserved
as well and worked as honestly are now forgotten, or else
were never known to the public at all.
The most striking case in point is that of Admiral Peary.
For integrity, ability, courage, persistence, and many other
admirable qualities, he had few equals. He discovered or
elucidated several laws of nature that are of permanent value
to science, and he widened the horizon of geography. Theories
of the wind circulation of the globe, for instance, hinge
in considerable part on Peary’s work in Greenland. Now
that we are flying, and especially when we begin to fly more
with dirigibles, to understand the winds has become crucially
important. Peary is a world benefactor in helping us to that
understanding, but it is reasonably certain that his fame will
not thereby be appreciably increased. Geographers are nearly
unanimous in holding that his biggest achievement was determining
that Greenland is an island. Also, his demonstration
that the north end of Greenland, now called Peary
Land, is free of snow in summer, and that it supports plant
and animal life the year round, was a death blow to the old
theory that if lands were only far enough north they would
be sure to be covered with ice. But in spite of all these things,
Peary’s greatness has been made to depend almost solely on
his having been first to reach the North Pole. With all his
real worth, Peary would not have become an immortal had
the North Pole not been a well-advertised place. He rode in
on its publicity.
A side issue is that the public will not usually consider a
man great unless he has done something which it can visualize.
Children play with tops and we have all seen vehicles
running on wheels, so we think we know what is meant by
the axis of the earth. We translate axis into axle, visualize
a top or a wheel, and imagine that we understand about the
North Pole. It is one end of the axle on which the earth
spins like a top or wheel. Accordingly, we think we can
understand and value properly the achievement of the man
who first got there.
But what most people knew about the North Pole until
recently was an understanding as far from reality as it was
clear. By an artificially simplified theory of the nature of the
earth, they had arrived at the conclusion that this pole had
many remarkable qualities beside being the end of the axle
of the earth. It was discussed as if it were the coldest place
on earth, the center from which the cold winds were distributed,
the hardest place to reach, and the one toward which
the magnetic needle pointed. It was supposed to be at least
five poles in one—Cold Pole, Wind Pole, Pole of Inaccessibility,
Magnetic Pole, and North Pole. We now know that the
coldest place is more than a thousand miles from it, the wind
center nearly a thousand miles, the hardest point to reach
about four hundred miles away, and that the magnetic needle
points toward a district in Canada that is much closer to the
nearest railway station than it is to the North Pole.
However, during the long time when the North Pole was
still supposed to possess the qualities of all the other poles,
it became so famous and acquired such a hold on the public
imagination that if you were now, by knowledge and argument,
to strip away from it one by one all of its supposed
attributes of greatness you would not detract appreciably
from its fame—just as Pike’s Peak remains the most famous
mountain in Colorado although more than twenty peaks in
that state alone are higher—just as Hercules will always be
more famous than any real strong man—just as Columbus
will remain the great discoverer of America no matter how
many earlier discoverers history may soundly establish.
Peary seems to have agreed with Cicero that to be ambitious
for the immortality of your name is among the greatest
of human virtues. Furthermore, he wanted the glory for
his associates and for the flag of his country. So he went to
the North Pole and became immortal. It was not the most
difficult of his achievements nor the most important scientifically.
But it had the necessary advance publicity, and the
proper follow-up.
In fact, the North Pole has a superfluity of popular reputation,
enough to make many explorers famous. Byrd will
probably become immortal for having been the first to fly
there, and Amundsen for having been the first to fly there in
a dirigible. No motor vehicle yet devised is likely to travel
effectively over the floating ice north of Spitsbergen, but if
such is built it is likely to make its driver semi-immortal for
having been the first to visit the North Pole by automobile.
This Pole is doubtless reachable by submarine, and the first
man who goes there that way will become still another
fixture in history. And so on for several firsts by new
methods.
These will all be international immortalities. National immortalities
will fall to the first Frenchman, the first Japanese,
the first Siamese.
If you want to find out how much glory a man gets for
doing a hard thing that is little advertised, just check up on
the credit Amundsen received for flying over the Pole of
Inaccessibility. That pole is at least as much harder to reach
than the North Pole as the top of Mount Everest is harder
than the highest point yet climbed. But, you will discover,
the applause of the world for Amundsen’s Inaccessibility
Pole achievement was only a faint echo of what he received
a few hours earlier for the North Pole. Although he was the
first man to do the most difficult thing possible on our earth
from the point of view of exploration, he got out of it far
less than for being the third man to visit an easier place that
was better advertised.
True enough, this North Pole flying immortality does not
depend entirely upon the publicity of the North Pole. Some
of it rests in considerable part on the publicity value of the
airplane. Unless it be swimming,[1] nothing has a better press
now. Just imagine the vaudeville salary of the first man to
swim to the North Pole!
Close beside the North Pole and the airplane in publicity
value is femininity, as used recently, for instance, in the
Channel swims. Thus we may one day have immortality
for the first woman who goes to the North Pole, then for
the first mother of a family, and eventually, when we get a
little more advanced, for the first divorcee. And think of the
first visit to the North Pole by Siamese Twins! (A later set
of them could be the first to marry there, perhaps in an
airplane.)
If and when the public gets fed up on the North Pole we
could no doubt, by suitable publicity, convince them that the
Pole of Inaccessibility is really more interesting because more
difficult. Hereupon vast glory will come to the first man to
fly there in an airplane, to the first to walk there, the first to
motor there, and so on. Then would come the first debutante
to go there, the first mother of a family, and so on, with no
limit other than that set by the arts of publicity.
A further encouraging thing about geographic discovery
is that people are forgetful of details, although they remember
generalities.
******
After more than three hundred years of heralded search,
the Northwest Passage has become permanently famous.
Then it was discovered by Sir John Franklin in 1846, but
nobody knew about that and gold medals were awarded to
Sir Robert McClure for discovering it in 1853. The world
resounded with McClure’s glory for a while.
The great public had forgotten about even McClure, but
still remembered that there had been a search for a passage,
when, in 1903, Amundsen sailed west from Norway. Three
years later, when the job was done, some newspaper man
misunderstood Amundsen’s announcement that he had navigated
the Northwest Passage and put a story on the wires
that he had discovered it. The public hurrahed for the discovery
even louder than they had done in the case of McClure
half a century before, and most people think even now that
Amundsen discovered the Northwest Passage. Why not, if
Columbus discovered America?
That it is not the first discovery, but rather the best advertised
discovery that counts, was proved to me from my own
career. For, in so far as I am known at all, I am generally
known as the discoverer of the “Blond” Eskimos. But the
first traveler to report a strangely blond people in the Arctic
was not I, but Nicholas Tunes 256 years ahead of me—in
1656. This seems to have been in Baffin Island, far from my
locality. But in my own district, without attracting much
attention, European-like Eskimos had been reported in the
following order: by Sir John Franklin in 1824, by Dease and
Simpson in 1837, by Captain Charles Klinkenberg in 1906,
by Captain William Mogg in 1908, and lastly by me in 1911.
The report that created a furore was my second, given out
in 1912.
That none of these reports about a European-like people
in the Arctic produced an appreciable stir in the world was
apparently either because the public did not know of the
possible romance behind them, or else failed to make the
proper connection. They certainly did know of the romance
in 1911, but they failed to see its relation to my report, even
though it was published in the London Times, a paper that
commands much attention. But in 1912 the same report was
dressed in newspaper extravagance and joined up by the reporter
with the tragic drama of the colony of 5000 Europeans
who disappeared from Greenland in the Middle Ages. There
was better reason for connecting the report of Tunes with
the lost colony than with mine, and at least a reason equal
with mine of 1912, for connecting those of Franklin, Simpson,
Klinkenberg and Mogg, and my own report of 1911,
but it simply was not done. The achievement of making the
same discovery was presumably a little less each time it was
made, yet more glory resulted from the last one than from
all the others put together—because the right publicity note
was struck.
The connection once made with a topic of high publicity
value (involving also a misunderstanding similar to the
supposition that Amundsen had discovered the Northwest
Passage), the “Blond” Eskimo story swept the world and
has not yet been forgotten after fifteen years—in fact, shows
no signs of fading.[2]
In view of how often America, the Northwest Passage, and
the “Blond” Eskimos were discovered before the hero came
along who got the maximum publicity out of each, we have
little reason to be depressed, thinking that the glamor of discovery
is about to fade. When the first man has climbed
Mount Everest, the first woman can do it, and then the first
mother of a family; when the first airplane has flown over
Everest, there is still room for the first dirigible. You can
go to Northwest Australia this year and visit a black family
who have never seen a white man; next year you can capitalize
the same family by taking a woman to see them, for they
will never before have seen a white woman. Then will come
the turn of the first mother of a family, who really should
take one of her children with her. There would be a tremendous
thrill in the cannibalism angle. To make the front
pages it would not be necessary to have the baby actually
cooked and eaten.
It may seem for the moment absurd that we shall ever be
as excited again as we were recently over the North Pole,
the Northwest Passage, or the “Blond” Eskimos. But the
wisest guessers frequently guess wrong, and especially about
news. During the last several years I have read many estimates
of the journalists of New York; none of them have
failed to put Mr. Carr Van Anda high as a judge of news,
and most of them have put him at the very top. Yet, in 1912,
Mr. Van Anda said to me that, with the North Pole found
and the Cook-Peary controversy settled, the Arctic would
never again occupy much space on the front pages of the
New York papers. But in 1926 he either himself directed or
was present while someone else directed that the entire front
page of the New York Times, along with several of the
inside pages, should be given over to the North Pole, first
for the second party to visit it and a few days later for its
third visitors.
I doubt if Mr. Van Anda would prophesy as confidently
today as he did in 1912 that twenty years from now the North
Pole will occupy little space on the front page. And who
knows but the public may forget Amundsen as they did
McClure, so that a new discoverer of the Northwest Passage
may ride in on a new wave of hurrahs? Some explorer with
a good press may be able to get the same result sooner by
flying the Passage, or swimming it. A new man may in time
get new renown out of my “Blond” Eskimos as I did out of
Franklin’s. The “Tunnit” remains of Labrador were discovered
for perhaps the tenth time in 1926, and the tenth
discovery (if it wasn’t the twentieth) won more glory than
any preceding it. Judging from past records, those “Tunnit
ruins” could be found again with even greater kudos about
1946. And so on for many thrilling discoveries.
It is, then, the best of discovery methods to find a thing
over again after just enough years so that the public has
nearly, but not quite, forgotten. Next best, as a perpetual
device, is to search again and again for a thing never found.
The interest created is not so intense as in the case of a repeated
discovery, but there is the compensating advantage
that you can search perhaps three or four times more often—you
get passable results say once every five years for the repeated
search method; effective rediscoveries need at least
twenty-year gaps.
One of the best examples of perpetual search and resulting
publicity is the quest for an Arctic continent.
Through various theorizing it had been pretty well established
a century back that a great land mass spread across
the northern polar sea. It was the Arctic Continent or Polar
Continent. The corner towards Europe and America had
been found and was called Greenland. The corner towards
Asia had been seen by natives looking north from northeastern
Siberia but had as yet no well recognized name.
Just for walking to the North Pole it seemed best to
climb upon the continent at the Greenland corner. But sailing
might be easier, and there was known to be a lot of
water north of Alaska. So it appeared logical to sail up
through Bering Straits, coast along the east side of the land
seen by the Chukchis. This would presumably take you into
a deep bay. When you got to the head of it you would just
anchor your ship in some harbor and walk the rest of the
way to the Pole.
Meantime the land seen by the Chukchis had also been
seen by the British—by Kellett in the ship Herald, so that
an island was named after the ship and a greater land seen
to the northwest after the captain. A modicum of fame resulted
from this discovery.
The first attempt to pick up the east coast of Kellett Land
and sail north into the polar bay was by the American De
Long in 1879-81. Instead of sailing much, however, he was
caught among eddying floes that with the autumn frost solidified
around his ship and carried him drifting to the northwest
across a corner of the theoretical continent, amputating
Kellett Land—the piece now called Wrangel Island. The
expedition made notable discoveries and was successful in
adding to our knowledge as well as to the record of well-conducted
adventures, but it ended in personal tragedy for
De Long and a third of his men. Some of the interest which
the world gave De Long was through the bearing of his
work on the discovery of the Arctic Continent.
A series of notable attempts to walk over Greenland to
the North Pole was made by Admiral Peary. The result was
one of the greatest geographic achievements of the last hundred
years, the determination that Greenland does not run to
the Pole, but is an island. De Long had made a small amputation;
Peary now made a large one. The Arctic Continent
had contributed materially to his fame.
The work of many expeditions to the north of central
and western Asia, notably the voyage of Nansen, cut farther
into the theoretical continent and the chance became small
it could contain the North Pole. In 1909 Peary marched from
Ellesmere Island to the Pole, the whole distance over floating
ice, and took a sounding at the Pole showing the water
two miles deep. No shore of the dwindling continent was
therefore likely to be very near the Pole. Peary thought, however,
that he had seen land to the northwest of the north
tip of Heiberg Island, which might, of course, be a foreland
on the continent. This was named Crocker Land.
So the two greatest explorers of their time, Nansen and
Peary, had profited materially in popular acclaim and in
more enduring reputation through the bearing of their work
on the Arctic land mass concept.
The interest in the elusive polar land had grown enough
by 1905 that an Englishman, Harrison, organized an expedition
the chief purpose of which was to search for the continent
to the north of Alaska. He might have done something,
for he was a good man himself and had with him one of the
finest northern travelers, Hubert Darrell, whose quality can
be measured from Hanbury’s book, Sport and Travel in the
Northland of Canada, London and New York, 1904, one of
the great travel stories, an account of an expedition shared
in by Darrell. But there was now a whaling fleet at Herschel
Island. Whalers and Eskimos alike were sure that anyone
was crazy who tried to travel afoot over the sea ice to the
northwest, and, strangely, were apparently able to convince
Darrell. Harrison stuck to his ideas but could get no one to
go with him. Therefore, his book, In Search of a Polar Continent,
London, 1908, has in a way a deceptive title—the
search was never started. But it had a good name. The Polar
Continent, through being much sought after and never
found, had become a thing to conjure with.
There was a receptive popular audience when there appeared
in Washington a scientific study by R. A. Harris
which, in the opinion of the author and of many others,
came near proving that there was a continent. The land’s
dimensions and the situation of its corners were pretty well
determined by deductions from what he thought to be
reliable tidal observations taken at a few northerly points.
Between wish thinking and mathematics the continent
grew substantial and for the first time had a name, Harris
Land. The other names had been for just corners—Greenland,
Kellett, Crocker; this was a name for the whole land,
now shrunken but still spoken of as a continent. In size it
still more or less deserved the name.
Our 1913-18 expedition had somewhat better luck than
Harrison’s. The whalers and Eskimos were not able to talk
us into believing that we could not travel over the sea ice far
from land and live by hunting. Between sledge journeys and
the drift of one of our ships (the Karluk, Captain Robert A.
Bartlett master), we made further inroads upon the continent.
More serious, we took soundings of 1386 meters
without bottom near some of the farthest points we reached.
However, to the northwest of the Ringnes Islands where,
on one occasion, we were forced to turn back less than 100
miles from shore the soundings were only around 500 meters,
and there seemed possibility of land.
Between driving Harris Land from some of its outposts
north of Alaska and finding what might be signs of it northwest
of the Ringnes Islands—between these achievements our
expedition got a whole lot of kudos out of the Arctic Continent.
A year after we started our work in the sea north of
Alaska, Donald MacMillan attacked the problem and sought
the theoretical continent under the name of Crocker Land.
He started out from Cape Thomas Hubbard, Heiberg Island,
whence it had been seen and tentatively located by Peary.
MacMillan returned without seeing land but there was no
assurance that it might not be hidden a little way beyond,
for the expedition had taken no deep soundings near its
farthest. It was, therefore, possible to speculate after the return
that perhaps the farthest point might have been over very
shallow water, the land therefore possibly only a bit farther
on, concealed by clouds.
So between our shallow soundings, MacMillan’s absence
of them, and Peary’s report that land had been seen, there
was an interest growing keener with the number of searchers
and the publicity of each.
The interest remained keen and there was much talk of
the undiscovered continent when Amundsen, Ellsworth and
Nobile flew in 1926 from Spitsbergen to Point Barrow by
way of the North Pole. They saw no land and would have
divided the theoretical continent into approximate halves but
for the saving report that for portions of the journey between
Peary’s farthest (the North Pole) and Alaska the
weather had been so thick that they had not been able to see
what lay beneath. This, said the commentators, still left a
chance that they crossed fairly wide stretches of low snow-covered
land. The continent still lived.
In 1927 Wilkins and Eielson flew 550 miles northwest from
Point Barrow and took at their farthest point the deepest
sounding ever recorded in the polar sea, 5440 meters. The
flight itself removed land possibilities through a wide space.
The sounding was a cause of further discouragement to the
geographers, but the public didn’t mind. So far as they were
concerned the Continent was merely elusive, rather clever at
hiding itself.
In 1928 Wilkins and Eielson crossed from Point Barrow
to Spitsbergen. They went some 200 or 300 miles out of their
way to avoid the North Pole, for three assigned reasons—they
wanted to avoid the sections which had been visited by
previous explorers; they did not want to be suspected of a
play to that gallery which was still interested in the North
Pole; and they wanted to cross the area within which, for
reasons we have just given in dealing with the Peary, Stefansson
and MacMillan expeditions, there seemed the best chance
of finding land. The newspaper files show there was a great
deal of speculation as to whether they might find the Arctic
Continent. There was also talk of checking up on the observations
of Dr. Cook who had reported one or more lands
to the west of the course he described himself as having followed
back from the North Pole in 1908.
Wilkins took a course which was for a time approximately
halfway between the areas explored by our 1913-18 expedition
and those seen by Amundsen. Then he swung toward
skirting the district explored by MacMillan, and so on to
Spitsbergen, without seeing land. However, he was forced
to admit that for portions of the flight they, like Amundsen,
had been unable to see what lay beneath. The speculators
said there still remained the possibility of the Arctic Continent.
There was talk that somebody really must go and
settle the question of the Continent.
Between what is reasonably inferred from the soundings
and from the visual report of travelers there is, however,
small chance now for an undiscovered land in the Arctic
bigger than Cuba. Islands from that size down are possible,
though not probable. But the interest in what is now beginning
to be called the lost continent still continues. There
will probably be plenty of talk about it next time anybody
flies. Anticipating discussions have already speculated on the
chance that the next flyer may discover “a lost continent the
size of Cuba.”
As we admitted in the beginning, there have been in the
search for the continent no such storms of excitement as
there were from at least two of the discoveries of the Northwest
Passage, after McClure’s report (third or fourth discovery)[3]
in 1854, and Amundsen’s (fourth or fifth) in 1906.
But on the whole the theoretical continent has given a
pretty consistent performance for a hundred years.
I have myself been in parties, of three in one case and of
four in another, that discovered large islands, rich with vegetation,
birds and animals, which had never been seen before
by human eyes, press agented or otherwise exploited. We
were thrilled, of course. It was one of the great experiences
of our lives. But to judge by outward appearances, there are
friends of mine who have been even more thrilled by “discovering”
hamlets in Brittany that were “absolutely unknown
to Americans.” And I think they really had at least
an equal right with us to the thrill, for I imagine that discovering
polar countries never seen by human eyes is today
easier than the discovery of a Brittany village previously
never seen by Americans.
Adventure, in the last analysis, is measured by the thrill
it gives to the discoverer, and later to those who hear about
it. You can predispose the world to any desired thrill by
suitable advance publicity. A deliberate campaign would be
too long and expensive, so you should choose for discovery
something well advertised already, as, for instance, the word
and idea “ray.” We have long had the rays of the sun, and
they have been very popular. Then there are the X-rays,
radium rays, and many others, until the world is now ready
to be thrilled by anything that is called a ray. It is also important
to have a good adjective for the ray you are going
to promote. “Cosmic ray” is the best to date—see what it has
done for Millikan. If you can find a name a little better than
cosmic, people will go daffy over the discovery of your ray.
(Death rays are perennially successful.)
Thus we arrive at a heartening conclusion: the tribe of
Great Discoverers will not become extinct until the Age of
Advertising has passed.
CHAPTER IV.
Travelers’ Tales
WHAT WE NOW CALL A FISH STORY THE ELIZABETHANS SPOKE
of as a traveler’s tale. I shall discuss whether there are many
fish stories among the travelers’ tales of today, whether they
have an important effect on the sciences which gather their
data in part from the reports of explorers, and whether we
ought to do anything about it. These questions are more
important in our time than in Elizabeth’s, for the explorers
were mere travelers then. Now they all claim to be scientists
or at least to be the leaders of scientific expeditions.
I address you both as an expert and as Exhibit A. For my
own expeditions have been insistently, if not so very effectively,
publicized as scientific; and I am one of the travelers
who, by my own contention and the claims of my friends
and backers, should be taken as a scientific explorer.
I begin, then, by discussing the extent to which my own
books and other protestations are to be taken seriously.
In a way this exposition is the direct result of a talk which
I gave in 1907-8 before the Century Association of New
York City. It is my necessary introduction to repeat in condensed
form what I said there and to tell you what the
Centurions thought about it.
So far as I remember, I began by explaining to the Century
Association that I was an exceptionally reliable witness, and
particularly so with regard to the Arctic. My father and
mother had both been born on the north coast of Iceland on
the very edge of the polar circle, and that furnished me with
a useful background. I myself had been born in Manitoba
where winter temperatures run down to 55° F. below zero,
which is about as low as they get on the north coast of Canada—as
a matter of fact lower than any official record, for
the lowest of these to date is -52°. I had read the northern
literature from infancy and had always been so soaked in it
that my first published article labeled scientific (apart from
a brief linguistic study) was “The Icelandic Colony in Greenland,”
American Anthropologist, April-June, 1906. In North
Dakota I had seen blizzards as bad as any I had experienced
on my first Arctic expedition, which I was then describing
to the Century, and the prairies of my childhood Dakota,
when snow-covered in winter or green in summer, were
much like the Eskimo prairies of northern Canada, so that
I had been quite at home in the Arctic from the first, gathering
information more reliable than if I had been a nervous
visitor who was frightened by conditions different from
those of his childhood—as might easily be the case with, say,
a Frenchman.
Such preliminaries being disposed of, I launched into what
I still believe was to the Century Association a convincing
first-hand picture of how things are with the Eskimos of
the Mackenzie River.
I told how I was taken into an Eskimo home where 22
people and myself lived in one room through the middle of
the winter and where my life with the people was intimate
throughout the year. I enjoyed being there and they apparently
enjoyed having me with them. I entered both into
their routine and into the spirit of their beliefs, so that they
began to discuss things with me or in my presence quite as
freely as if no stranger had been near. In fact, no stranger
was near—I had become as one of them.
On the basis of this I regaled the Century with many
amusing and allegedly important contributions to the ethnology
of the Mackenzie Eskimos. I shall here review only
one topic.
One of the Eskimos, Memoranna, wore an eagle feather
on the left shoulder of his reindeer-skin coat. I asked him
once why he did this and he said there were two reasons:
In Memoranna’s childhood the people of his native village
had been more numerous than now; and, besides, there
were many visitors. Athletic games were common and the
people took off their coats perhaps when wrestling or running
foot races, throwing them in a pile. Every coat was
of deerskin and most of them had the same trimmings,
but they were not all of the same size or workmanship and
some were newer than others. It was, then, important that
when the games were over each man should be able to find
his own coat. “Therefore we each had a mark on our coats.
One man would have a weasel tail in the middle of his
back, another perhaps a strip of wolf skin on his sleeve.
I had an eagle feather on my left shoulder.”
The second reason for these marks was that when everyone
was dressed alike and when there were hundreds together
you could not recognize a man unless you saw his
face. But with the eagle feather on the shoulder of the coat
anybody could tell that the wearer was Memoranna.
The chief reason why I repeat all this is that at the end
of my talk Dr. Franklin H. Giddings, Professor of the
History of Civilization at Columbia University, a foremost
figure in American sociology, came to me. He had been
making a study of property marks, he had been much interested
in this particular contribution of mine, and he was
satisfied of its accuracy not only because of my careful methods
of observation and my intimate life with the people but
also because it fitted in with his studies of the origin and
development of property marks among primitive people.
This address of mine before the Century was based on a
year with the Eskimos of the Mackenzie River. I returned
north in six months and spent four years more, making five
all together. In the last of those years I finally acquired such
a control over the language that I could speak with the
people almost as freely as they spoke with each other. Then
at last I learned that the eagle feather was a talisman, with
no intentional property mark connection.
Some weeks after I learned this I met Memoranna and
asked him why he had deceived me four years ago. He replied
in substance that he had been almost brought up as
a cabin boy on whaling ships and had besides associated with
missionaries, so that he knew the white man’s point of view.
If an Eskimo told his real beliefs, a sailor would call him
a damn fool and a missionary would explain how wrong
and wicked they were. Through long experience he
had learned the kind of explanation a white man likes; giving
that kind saved a lot of trouble. He had not meant specially
to deceive me; he was merely treating me as just one
more white man.
There are within the social sciences few more broad-minded
or with a keener sense of humor than Professor
Giddings. Still, it is my impression that he felt just a little
bit more enlightened and pleased when he heard the original
incorrect property mark explanation of the eagle feather,
which agreed with his own theories, than he did when later
I told him the final and as I still believe correct explanation—which
did not fit into his sociology quite so neatly.
If this property mark tale were an isolated case it would
not be worth repeating, but it is typical of my work. The
impressions and conclusions of my first year in the Arctic
were, I now think, mostly wrong. Luckily for me I did not
publish a book at the end of the first expedition but placed
the diaries of it in storage with the American Museum of
Natural History of New York City. They remained there
during my second expedition of four years and while I wrote
my first published book, called My Life With the Eskimo,
1913. They remained there also during my third expedition
of five years and while I wrote my second book, called The
Friendly Arctic, 1921.
It was only in 1922 that I got out the diaries of the first
expedition and studied them as the basis of my third
book, Hunters of the Great North. In the introduction to
that volume, I said: “As I look over my diaries I shudder to
think how vastly I might have augmented the already great
misknowledge of the Arctic had I published everything I
imagined I had seen and everything I thought I knew.”
You may think this autobiographical preface strange. But
I shall presently be dealing with names far more eminent
and respected than my own, even with those holding membership
in this oldest of the great scientific societies of America,
and I need myself as the thin entering wedge for a general
discussion.
The introductory remarks closed, I turn to what I intend
as a criticism of the social sciences in so far as they depend
for their data on the findings of explorers.
If I were giving a course of lectures, and had at my disposal
ten evenings instead of one, I should like to consider
under three heads the misinformation contained in the
books and reports of travelers. The first would be intentional
misrepresentation, the deliberate drawing of the long bow;
the second would be that unintentional misrepresentation
which results from careless observation or from misplaced
confidence in witnesses; the third would be that subdivision
where the traveler states as a fact which he has observed a
thing which he cannot possibly have observed but in which
he believes because it conforms to, or is part of, a belief which
he holds and has never questioned.
Since I have only one evening, too short for me although
it may be too long for you, I shall not merely confine myself
to the third heading but shall discuss only a few typical cases
under it. What I said awhile ago, then, about property marks
does not belong to our subject and has its use merely as part
of the introductory approach.
We turn, then, first to a large body of false testimony
which is nevertheless a small subdivision of the last third of
our subject, and consider some of the things that have been
testified to about animal and plant life in that small but
typical sample of our world, the Far North.
The foundation of European belief about the distribution
of life over the earth was laid by the Pythagorean Greeks,
if not by someone else from whom the Pythagoreans borrowed
the idea. Essentially it was that terrestrial life depends
on heat from the sun. This heat, when it is of a degree called
warmth, permits life in a belt called the temperate zone. To
the south of the temperate zone there was, according to
orthodox Greek belief, a burning region where the rocks
were red-hot and the oceans boiling. North of the temperate
zone was a region frozen solid. One of the ancient authorities
has it that in the North life is as impossible because of
the freezing as it is in the South because of the burning.
It is not a part of my northern specialty to review what is
so well-known to historians, that from the Greek learned
period before Christ to the age of Prince Henry the Navigator,
and therefore through almost 2000 years, it was nearly
or quite the unanimous opinion of the learned world that
no human beings would ever cross the lifeless, burning and
boiling tropics. It is more within my field as an Arctic explorer
to point out that the accepted Greek belief was at
one time that because of the cold no living thing could
exist north of Scotland. Then the Irish discovered Iceland,
600 miles north of Scotland, and the Icelanders, or someone
else, discovered Spitsbergen, another 600 miles still farther
north.
The average January temperature of Reykjavik is about
the same as that of January for Milan in Italy or Philadelphia
in Pennsylvania, and the tourist companies which contract
with their passengers to show them pack ice are forced, some
years, to carry them 200 miles beyond Spitsbergen to keep
their promise. But at every advance of knowledge, which in
this case has been the northward advance of travel, it has
been discovered with profound surprise that life was there
ahead of the traveler. The interpretative scientists have been
driven to every expedient of logic to explain the contradiction
between what they believed and what they saw. This
effort, in turn, has been the foundation of much false testimony
by those of them who were explorers.
Take the case of perhaps the most solidly famous and respected
of the British polar explorers, Sir Edward Parry. He
landed on Melville Island the summer of 1819 and found
musk oxen grazing there. This was startling, but had to be
accepted. Presently he went into winter quarters, practically
hibernating with his men for several months. When
they emerged in the spring they saw musk oxen. Hereupon
Lieutenant Sabine, himself later a distinguished explorer
in his own right but acting for the time as naturalist in the
publication of the scientific results of Parry’s voyage, wrote
as follows:
“They (the musk oxen) arrived in Melville Island in the
middle of May, crossing the ice from the southward, and quitted
it on their return towards the end of September.”[4]
This was accepted by the entire learned world because it
fitted in with two of their preconceptions—that Parry and
Sabine were reliable witnesses, and that the Far North was
by nature hostile to animal life. It had been believed earlier
that no animals could exist, at any season, as far north as
Melville Island. Now, when they had been found to be there
in summer, the scientists executed a strategic retreat by saying:
“The beasts make a summer foray deep into the Arctic,
but they flee from the winters to the hospitable shelter of
the temperate zone.” The theory of the complete absence
of grazing animals from this part of the Arctic was thus
replaced by an elaborate theory of seasonal migration.
For a quarter century after Parry’s first voyage there seems
to have been practically if not complete unanimity among
the explorers and the stay-at-home scientists alike that the
musk oxen, in spite of short legs, made each year a 1200-mile
round trip between the winter shelter of the forest on the
North American continent and the summer stamping
grounds in Melville Island.
Lieutenant Sherard Osborn, who both shared in and wrote
books about the Franklin Search, appears to have been the
most thoughtful of those officers. Yet in 1856 he published
The Discovery of the North-West Passage ... and assumed
in it that the grazing animals of the islands north of Canada
migrate south to the mainland in the Autumn to return each
Spring. But in 1857 he published a second edition with a
new Chapter, XVII, on “The Migration of Animals Theory.”
For the views there expressed he says he has been “nearly
excommunicated as a heretic.” In this chapter he points out
the manifest theoretical absurdity of the postulated migrations
and cites a little testimony he had been able to get
which tended to show that there was no migration.
Thirty years later Greely was sure that the musk oxen of
the Arctic islands do not migrate south[5] and most observers
are now agreed that they do not move from one Arctic
island to another at any time in any direction. Yet there are
still in use in the English-speaking countries, among others,
textbooks of recent copyright which retain the Parry statement
and the Parry explanation—that the musk oxen migrate
and that they do it because they need the shelter of
the forest against the severe climate of the northern winters.
When the scientists were finally converted to believing
that the musk oxen do live in the remote Arctic permanently,
they and the travelers cast about for some more explanations—the
philosophical scientists are continually busy trying to
reconcile new knowledge with ancient theory. They now
hit upon something clever. People had believed, they explained,
that grazing animals could not exist without grass,
and that was why they had thought there would be no such
animals in the Arctic. They were right in part; there was
no grass. What they could not have foreseen was that in the
Arctic the place of the flowering plants is taken by mosses
and lichens. The musk oxen live on mosses and lichens!
The musk ox still lives on mosses and lichens in the usual
reference works; he is mounted with his mouth stuffed with
them in the usual museums. This is in part because many
explorers have supported the philosophizing scientists by testifying
that lichens are verily the food of the musk ox.
But many explorers have denied this flatly. Greely said[6]
“... in no case did I ever note the musk-ox feeding on the
latter vegetation (lichens), although in many places near
Conger the ground was covered with scanty, minute lichens
for acres in extent.” Roderick MacFarlane says[7] that musk
oxen live mainly if not wholly on flowering plants, and I
have said the same.[8]
But the traditional belief is still being advanced by explorers
as testimony and as observed fact. For instance, a
statement implying that musk oxen do live on mosses and
lichens was issued within the year by the Northwest Territories
and Yukon Branch of the Department of the Interior
of Canada, for they published a photograph of musk oxen
with an accompanying letterpress which said that they were
here shown grazing on mosses and lichens. I wrote at once
to a friend, O. S. Finnie, who is official head of this department
although not personally responsible for the picture and
description. I asked him how did they know that these
animals were feeding on lichens and whether their botanists
could not (by examining the original photograph and perhaps
enlarging it) determine what plants were really visible
along with the animals. Finnie then submitted the photograph
to A. E. Porsild, the distinguished Danish-Canadian
botanist and specialist in Arctic flora, whose verdict came
in a letter of February 27, 1930:
“There is a firm and rather hard turf composed chiefly of
grasses and sedges with a slight admixture of flowering plants.
Most predominant is the Alpine Foxtail grass (alopecurus
alpinus) which probably has a higher food value than any other
Arctic grass. With the foxtail grow a few sedges (Carex). In the
foreground to the right are flowers of the Alpine Chickweed
(Cerastium alpinum). A few twigs of a decumbent willow
(Salix) show in the center of the photo.”
Not only these recent Canadian Government observers
but also many scores of normally honest travelers have, then,
testified, because of a solidly founded belief, that musk oxen
live exclusively or mainly on a food which in fact they rarely
eat—and then probably not by choice.
One of the most interesting of the systematic fabrications
about the polar regions is within the observational domain
of the exact sciences, although its effects are noticed chiefly
in the social sciences. This is the statement that at a certain
place a certain observer has noted that the midnight sun was
visible for a given number of days in summer and that correspondingly
the noonday sun was invisible at the same
place for the same number of days in winter. All statements
ever made to this effect are false. They could not be true
anywhere in the world unless at least one important fact
were changed and some laws of nature altered or abolished.
The fact needing change is that the sun would have to be
contracted down to a pinpoint; the laws needing change are
those governing refraction.
“In its northern part (of Norway) live the people Adogit,
who, it is said, in the middle of the summer have continuous
light for forty days and nights, and likewise at the time of the
winter solstice do not see the light for the same number of days
and nights.”
On this Nansen comments[10] to the effect that there can
never have been any such place. For, says he, if the sun was
visible at midnight 40 days in summer then it never
disappeared at all in winter. Or if it was invisible 40 days
in winter then it was visible 63 days in summer.
Nansen conjectures for the writers of this immediate
group, the commentators on northern Norway, that they had
heard for a given place that the sun was invisible for a certain
number of days in winter and had then added a gloss
(in conformity with Greek theory) to the effect that the
midnight sun was visible for the same length of time in
summer. Nansen seems to believe, then, that had the writers
themselves been residents of northern Norway, or had they
spent a year well beyond the Arctic Circle, they could not
have written as they did. In this judgment Nansen is not at
his best as a student of human nature. Nor does he show thorough
familiarity with the writings of his contemporaries,
for there are on record a number of them who without question
have seen with the eyes of the body that the periods of
the sun’s invisibility and visibility are unequal, but whose
mental eyes have been holden so that they thought they had
observed the periods to be equal.
We could go into a long catalogue of instances but shall
actually use but a single example which, although typical
in a sense, is striking for three reasons among others: that
the witness is a Russian and therefore a member of a northern
people who ought to understand northern conditions,
that his general scientific work is looked upon by his colleagues
as good, and that he has undoubtedly spent long
periods within the Arctic Circle. The quotation we are about
to give was published on pp. 581-2 of the American Anthropologist,
for October-December, 1929. The author is Waldemar
G. Bogoras, who says:
“The north polar circle forms the southern border of the area
which has in midsummer the continuous day and in midwinter
the continuous night. And so, for instance, on 68-70 degrees of
north latitude, we have in the polar zone three or four weeks
of continuous night in winter and as many weeks of continuous
sunshine in summer.”
Unaware of the laws of refraction and forgetful of what
they knew concerning the brightness of the twilight before
sunrise and after sunset, Europeans throughout the Middle
Ages and down to our time have assumed generally that
darkness comes in the Arctic when the sun dips below the
horizon. This belief is popularly translated into saying: “In
the Arctic there are six months of daylight and six months
of darkness.” That most people hold this belief is shown
by the frequency with which the idea appears in school texts,
in serious newspapers, and in the humorous journals. The
average reader supposes the humor to rest upon some basis
of fact when an Eskimo wife who sits up to await her husband’s
homecoming starts scolding and he replies: “Why,
my dear, it is only half past October.” The father of a baby
with the colic walks the floor with it through the night and
is then referred to as being on a six months’ tramp. A funny
paper tells that Macpherson operates his business from San
Francisco during the summer and from Point Barrow during
the winter. You want to know why he goes north in
winter and are told he conducts his business a good deal by
telegraph and uses the Barrow office six months to get the
benefit of night rates.
That great universities and leaders in science are still teaching
the view on which the humorists base their quips, was
brought in upon me through a talk I gave at the Explorers
Club in New York. There I cited one traveler after another
who had reported from various places within the Arctic
Circle, some of them far north, that they had observed the
sun to be fully visible in summer and wholly invisible in
winter for equal periods. These men, I contended, had reported
what neither they nor anyone else can ever have seen.
A few days later a troubled voice called me on the telephone
for an appointment with regard to a situation at Columbia
University. On arrival he proved to be a student in
a course on meteorology. He had heard my talk and had
reported to his instructor my saying that there was no spot
on earth where the days of the sun’s complete visibility and
invisibility could be equal in number. The instructor had not
been impressed, and had pointed out that the author of a
book they were using in the class, Robert DeCourcy Ward,
Professor of Climatology in Harvard University, likely knew
what he was talking about when in defining the zones he
said:
“In the polar zones, the sun is below the horizon for twenty-four
hours at least once in winter, and is above the horizon for
the same length of time at least once in summer.”
I had Ward’s Climate: Considered Especially in Relation
to Man in its 1908 edition. Sure enough, on p. 20 were the
lines cited by the Columbia instructor. I procured a “Second
Edition, Revised” which says in a note dated August 1917:
“I have taken the opportunity offered by the publication of a
second edition of this volume to make some revision of the
chapters on ‘The Characteristics of the Polar Zones’....”
In that edition I found, unchanged, the statement we have
quoted.
Professor Ward had, then, taken special thought of his
chapter on the polar zones and had nevertheless repeated
himself verbatim. No wonder the Columbia instructor was
also firm.
Some textbooks, with a pretense to meticulous accuracy
that makes them more effectively deceptive than others, will
contain such statements as: “Among the Eskimos there is
continuous darkness for three months.” There are, of course,
no Eskimo settlements that have continuous darkness for
even three days, or one day.
The textbook writers are in a vicious circle. Embryo explorers
learn from school texts about the continuous Arctic
winter darkness; they come back some years later from an
Arctic expedition with testimony of having observed the said
darkness, and this testimony becomes in turn the basis of
new incorrect textbooks. A case is Elisha Kane, the most
famous of American polar explorers before Peary. He reported
having wintered at a place where there was no trace
of daylight in a clear sky at the winter solstice. For comment
on this it suffices to quote Captain George E. Tyson,
who says: “Have passed Rensselaer Harbor, where Dr. Kane
wintered during 1853-55. I am surprised that in the latitude
of Rensselaer Harbor (N. Lat. 78⅔°) he should have found
the darkness so intense as he describes it. It was not
totally dark with us at high meridian at any time in clear
weather....”[11]
In Heft 1/2, 1930, of the international scientific journal
Arktis, Dr. Wilh. Meinardus of Göttingen, has published a
diagram of the distribution of daylight and darkness within
the polar regions throughout the year which shows not only
that Kane (as Tyson implies) must have had a lot of daylight
at noon on the shortest day of the year but also that no
polar explorer except members of one Nansen and one Peary
expedition have ever been so far north (or south) in midwinter
that they could say accurately that there was no trace
of daylight in a clear southern sky at the solstice. Yet there
are dozens of explorers who have said so in books or reports
which have been believed. Many of these were as respectable
and respected as Nansen or Peary. They were not liars;
rather they were observers and reporters who had been
hypnotized by a belief.
It may be said in the defense of these travelers that when
they said “no daylight” they meant “only a little daylight.”
But would we similarly excuse a chemist after an autopsy
if he said “no trace of arsenic” and really meant “only a
little arsenic”? Explorers are putting themselves forward as
scientists. If we are to take them seriously and at their own
evaluation, we should require of them the standards not only
of truthfulness but also of precision that we require of
chemists or astronomers.
It follows naturally from what we have said above how
ridiculous it is to suppose, as many school textbooks still
assert or imply, that you have “six months of daylight and
six months of darkness at the North Pole.” If you mean by
daylight what Captain Tyson means in criticizing Dr. Kane,
then we have at the North Pole more nearly four months of
darkness (from October 6 to February 5) and eight months
of daylight (from February 6 to October 5). If, on the other
hand, you mean ability to read ordinary print throughout
a clear day out-of-doors, then the division must be something
like 5 months of darkness and 7 months of daylight.
A further corollary is equally plain. It is that we are being
misled when it is constantly being stated or implied that
there is less daylight per year in the polar regions than in
the tropics or temperate zone. You can perhaps defend that
old view if you say that by daylight you mean the quantity
of sunlight delivered per unit of earth’s surface per year,
but that is not really at all what we mean when we say daylight.
For instance, you will hardly say that daylight is lacking
when there is so much of it that you have to wear colored
glasses to protect your eyes and must be careful to
sleep in dark places so as not to go snow-blind while in bed.
Judged by ability to read print out-of-doors, there is more
daylight at an average Arctic station per year than there
is in the temperate zone or in the tropics. (We are not here
entering into niceties of how dark it is in Arctic mountain
canyons or how light on snow-clad tropical peaks.)
There was a time when it was commonly believed in
Europe (by those who did not identify travelers’ tales with
fish stories) that the people of a certain remote land had
ears so conveniently large that in sleeping they used one for
a mattress and the other for a quilt. This we now consider
a strictly medieval belief. But it is thoroughly modern to
believe that Eskimo women carry babies in the hoods of
their coats. We shall cite you eminent men, many of whom
are living, who have asserted that they themselves have seen
Eskimo women carry babies in their hoods, but first, departing
from the main chronological order of our discussion, we
give the testimony of the man indisputably the best authority
on this subject.
Knud Rasmussen was born in Greenland of a Danish
father and a mother who was part Eskimo. He was brought
up by the Eskimo women somewhat as our Southern babies
are by their Negro mammies. He was raised bilingual, his
two mother tongues Danish and Eskimo. He associated with
Danes in the house and played with Eskimo children out
of doors. In due course he was taken to Copenhagen where
he went through that university and other training which
has made him both a well-equipped scholar and a cosmopolitan
gentleman.
Quite apart from his childhood, which is in this connection
the most significant period, Rasmussen has spent more
time in the countries inhabited by Eskimos than any other
man who is ordinarily classified as an explorer. He is the
only one of us explorers who has visited every Arctic Eskimo
territory and practically every Arctic Eskimo people from
the east coast of Greenland to the west coast of Alaska and
to the East Cape district of Siberia. He is primarily an
anthropologist and geographer. For his sound work in
these fields, and especially for his interpretation of the
Eskimos to the learned world, he has been awarded gold
medals by nearly every important geographical society in
Europe and in the United States.
On the basis of the studies for which Rasmussen has
really deserved these medals, he says about the belief that
Eskimo women carry babies in their hoods: “The women
in Greenland have never in the past carried their children
in their hoods, nor do they do so now ... the child is decidedly
not (carried) in the hood, as that would simply
choke the mother.” (Letter to Vilhjalmur Stefansson, 3rd
May, 1930.)
Now we turn to the history of the belief. The early travelers
through Eskimo lands described from most if not all
districts a custom whereby women’s coats were made especially
roomy in the back so that a baby could be slipped up
under the coat and supported by a belt. The child was then
held by the coat and belt against the small of the woman’s
back. Usually in removing the child the mother would undo
the belt and let the baby slide down, but the neck of the
coat was naturally made roomy to enable the child to breathe
and sometimes the mother would reach in that way and
pull it up and out. It is not impossible, but was at least
geographically rare, that mothers inserted the baby into
the coat from above. But whatever the method of ingress
or egress, the baby, according to early northern books, was
always carried inside the body of the coat, never inside the
hood.
Since there are now living men who hold distinguished
professorships in great universities and others of equal rank
who say that they themselves have seen babies carried in
hoods, I am planning one day to write almost a book on this
subject, citing, so far as my researches allow, practically
every traveler who has said anything about how Eskimo
babies are carried. Here I give only a few typical cases, generally
men who are not only entitled to respect but who
have received it from the learned world.
Taking them chronologically, the first writers examined
are the following:
Hans Egede: A Description of Greenland, first published in
1757 (pp. 132 and 148 in the London, 1818, edition).
David Crantz: The History of Greenland, London, 1767. Vol. I,
pp. 138 and 162.
Hans Egede Saabye: Greenland ... in the Years 1770 and 1778,
London, 1818, pp. 13 and 259.
Vol. XIX of the Continuation of the General History of Voyages,
Paris, 1770, in which there is a “History of Greenland” by an
anonymous author.
All of this early Greenland evidence agrees with Rasmussen—the
manner in which the child is carried and the
coat in which it is carried are described in almost the same
terms as he uses.
But there existed a stream of contradictory testimony.
Henry Ellis published his Voyage to Hudson’s Bay at London
in 1748. There you find on p. 136:
“The Difference between the Dress of the Men and the
Women is, that the Women have a Train to their Jackets, that
reaches down to their Heels. Their Hoods are also larger and
wider at the Shoulders, for the sake of carrying their Children
in them more conveniently on their Backs.”
On pp. 495 and 496 of Sir Edward Parry’s Journal of a
Second Voyage, London, 1824, the hood-carrying is weightily
reinforced.
Between Parry’s time and about 1855 I have found the
following references:
BABIES CARRIED IN HOODS:
G. F. Lyon: The Private Journal, London, 1824, p. 315.
John Franklin: Narrative of a Second Expedition in the Years
1825, 1826, 1827, London, 1828, p. 118.
John Rae: Narrative of an Expedition to the Shores of the
Arctic Sea in 1846 and 1847, London, 1850, p. 39.
John Richardson: Arctic Searching Expedition, London, 1851,
Vol. I, pp. 252 and 369; also The Polar Regions, Edinburgh,
1861, p. 306.
Berthold Seemann: Narrative of the Voyage of the H.M.S.
Herald during the Years 1845-51, London, 1853, Vol. II, p. 53.
BABIES NOT CARRIED IN HOODS (BUT CARRIED INSIDE COATS):
Captain W. A. Graah, Narrative of an Expedition to the East
Coast of Greenland, London, 1837, p. 118.
Thomas Simpson: Narrative of the Discoveries on the North
Coast of America, London, 1843.
Joseph Bellot: Memoirs of Lieutenant Joseph René Bellot,
London, 1855, Vol. I, p. 186.
Around 1850 there was living in Greenland a man who
knew the Greenland Eskimos at least as well as even Rasmussen
does now. This was Samuel Kleinschmidt, born of
missionary parents and brought up there until he had
learned Eskimo as one of his mother tongues. He was then
educated in Germany and went back to Greenland to spend
the rest of his life, much of which he devoted to the preparation
of an Eskimo-German grammar and an Eskimo-Danish
dictionary.
In some Eskimo dialects amaut, amaun, or some variant
of that word is the name of an enlargement for child accommodation
in the back of a woman’s coat, or it may be the
name for an entire coat which contains this enlargement.
In many districts the nursing mother wears a coat of no special
design but one simply large enough so the child is well
accommodated. The name of the coat is still amaun. This
is, then, a word referring to the purpose for which the coat
is used, not to its design. Amaun is never used as the name
for a hood, of a woman’s coat or of any other garment.
In Den Gronlandske Ordbog, Copenhagen, 1871, p. 24,
Kleinschmidt defines the verbal form amarpok, “carries a
child on her back in a roomy coat designed for that purpose”;
and the noun form amaut, “such a coat for carrying
the baby.” Thus we see that while most of the travelers had
by this time been converted to the Ellis-Parry hood carrying
and were testifying that they had themselves observed it,
Kleinschmidt, working as a missionary and scholar in his
native Greenland, had either never heard about the belief
that children are carried in hoods or else considered it so
absurd as not to be worth noticing in his dictionary.
In 1927 Schultz-Lorentzen published a dictionary which
in many respects is an improvement on Kleinschmidt’s. At
that stage, as we shall show in a moment, the books were
favoring by a substantial majority the Ellis-Parry view, at
least if you merely count noses among the testifiers. Greenland
books, among others, were favoring it and on p. 16
of the Schultz-Lorentzen dictionary we find: amaut, “fur
jacket with hood for carrying child.”
But this is really an ambiguous definition. If you think
already that babies are carried in hoods, you will read that
meaning into Schultz-Lorentzen’s words; but if you think
that babies are not thus carried, you will understand him to
mean that the coat is for carrying the baby and that this coat
also has a hood. It is therefore fair to him to cite some of his
allied definitions: amaq, “child carried in fur jacket with
hood”; amarpa, “takes him on his back; carries him on his
back”; amarpoq, “carries a child in fur jacket with hood.”
From about 1855 down to about 1888 the evidence of explorers
who had traveled among Eskimos is divided as
follows:
BABIES CARRIED IN HOODS:
Charles Francis Hall, 1865.
Isaac I. Hayes, 1867.
Dr. Henry Rink, 1877.
AMBIGUOUS:
A. W. Greely, 1886.
BABIES CARRIED INSIDE COATS:
No testimony during this period.
Now we come to what makes our discussion really worth
while. It is that one of those who report Eskimo babies carried
in hoods is Franz Boas, Professor of Anthropology in
Columbia University and President of the American Association
for the Advancement of Science.
Boas is, if not the most eminent living anthropologist,
which he very well may be, at least the most distinguished
of those who are also Arctic explorers and who have made
some specialty of Eskimo studies (we classify Rasmussen
here as a traveler or geographer rather than as an anthropologist).
Moreover, the Smithsonian Institution, through
which Boas published a book on the Eskimos on Baffin Island
and neighboring districts, is in one sense at least our foremost
scientific body. It is then significant that on p. 556 of
the 6th Annual Report, Bureau of Ethnology, 1884-85, in the
Section, The Central Eskimo, by Boas, we have:
“The women’s jacket ... has a wide and large hood reaching
down almost to the middle of the body.... If the child is
carried in the hood, a leather girdle fastened with a buckle is
tied around the waist and serves to prevent the child from
slipping down....”
Boas spent a winter with the Eskimos at Baffin Island and
undoubtedly had hundreds of opportunities of seeing how
the women carried their babies. He was there for the purpose
of studying just such things and there is no doubting
his sincere desire to record and interpret rightly everything
he saw.
But Boas had in a considerable part of his Eskimo work
the collaboration of a man who testifies directly against
him, a man, too, of keen observation, shrewd judgment,
and much longer experience among Eskimos. This is Captain
George Comer, who lives at East Haddam, Conn., co-author
with Boas of The Eskimo of Baffin Land and Hudson
Bay, Bulletin of the American Museum of Natural
History, Vol. XV, 1901. On the subject of the belief that
Eskimo women carry babies in their hoods, Captain Comer
says:
“... (The statement that) Eskimo women carry their babies
in the hood of their garment is perfectly absurd.... Once when
I spoke of the child being carried in the hood it made the women
laugh.” (Letter to Vilhjalmur Stefansson, May 22, 1930.)
This discussion has been based on the easiest reading of
Boas, which is that he means to say the Eskimo babies
are carried in the hoods of the women’s coats. However,
the part about the leather girdle serving “to prevent the
child from slipping down” may be taken to show what
Boas really meant was that the child is carried not in the
hood, but inside the coat as described by Rasmussen. For an
examination of Baffin Island women’s coats in museums, or
an examination of the pictures from Boas and others which
give the women’s coats of Baffin Island, will show that if a
child (or anything else) is in the hood, then there is no
chance of its sliding down along the woman’s back whether
or not she wears a girdle.
Continuing our studies, we have made the following
classification of the reports on the Eskimo manner of carrying
babies by travelers later than Boas.
BABIES CARRIED IN HOODS:
Lucien M. Turner (Bureau of Ethnology), 1894.
David Hanbury, 1904.
E. W. Hawkes (Canadian Dept. of Mines), 1916.
Donald MacMillan, 1918.
BABIES CARRIED INSIDE COATS:
Alfred H. Harrison, 1908.
John W. Kelly (U. S. Bureau of Education), 1890.
Fridtjof Nansen, 1893.
John Murdoch (Bureau of Ethnology)—reports them carried
in coat for those Eskimos he visited but says that among the
eastern Eskimos (whom he had not visited) the baby is
carried in the hood—1892.
Josephine Peary—describes method of carrying, showing that
child is really carried in coat; but she calls it the hood—1893.
Henry Rink—same as above, description correct for carrying
in coat but speaks of it as hood—1877.
You may think that in spite of the distinction of some
of the advocates, the carrying of babies in hoods has by now
been relegated generally to the domain of folklore and that
this discussion has therefore grown academic. But until
within the last twelve months several of the foremost up-to-the-minute
authorities have in reality been influenced to
believe that the baby hood-carrying is a fact.
For with Rasmussen and Boas in knowledge of the
Eskimo we might well group Diamond Jenness, Chief
Anthropologist of the Canadian Government at Ottawa,
who, as anthropologist on the staff of the expedition which
I commanded from 1913-18, spent three years in studying
the Eskimos from western Alaska eastward along the north
Canadian coast as far as Coronation Gulf. Since then,
through his continued studies and official position, he has
been in close touch with anthropologists and with the development
of Eskimo research. On March 29, 1930, he wrote
me in substance that, although he was convinced those early
travelers who had testified that babies were carried in hoods
in the districts which he had himself later investigated were
mistaken, nevertheless he was willing to believe other travelers
who said that in certain districts which he had not
visited the babies were so carried. It was only when Rasmussen
and Comer testified about those very districts in
which Jenness still credited the hood-carrying that he realized
the belief had a folklore nature outside his own territories
as well as within them.
There is plenty of evidently correct testimony that Eskimo
women do carry certain things in their hoods. Among things
frequently mentioned are cigarettes (in recent times), needle
cases, dolls or other playthings for their babies, and small
stolen articles. Why is it not, then, reasonable that they
might carry babies similarly?
The reply is that the admittedly hood-carried articles
are light. A baby is so heavy even at birth that (as Rasmussen
points out) it would choke, or at least seriously incommode,
the mother if its weight reposed in the hood.
(Babies are carried on women’s backs until they are three
or four years old, making the weight increase considerably
each year.)
The second paragraph in rebuttal will be that most testimony
represents the babies in the hoods as usually naked,
at least while very young. If you study the construction of
the hoods on women’s coats in any of our museums, you
will find not only that a weight in them would press
against the mother’s throat with choking action, but also
that they are so open at the top that a naked baby would
necessarily suffer a great deal from cold, at least in winter,
even if it were not frozen to death.
It may be suggested that when Boas, for instance, speaks
of a hood he is actually referring to the enlargement farther
down in the coat which makes it commodious, as described
by many travelers and easily seen in museums.
The reply is that this might not be a bad defense argument
for Greenland, where the women frequently have
coats without hoods, but that Boas is dealing with Baffin
Island and other neighboring districts where the women’s
coats, at least usually, have hoods. Since Boas does not describe
the coat he has in mind as having two hoods, we are
inclined to feel that by hood he means what the rest of us do.
Then it may be advanced that there are motion pictures
and other photographs in existence which show Eskimo
babies actually in the hoods of women’s coats. This would
serve as good argument, if not full proof, were it not that
we know the circumstances under which those photographs
were taken, which are that to oblige the photographers, or
for pay, the women consented to place the babies in the
hoods for the time of as much photographing as the explorer
needed to show graphically on his return what he
believes to be the custom of a primitive people.
In other words, we are driven to the conclusion that the
many travelers who have said they have seen Eskimo babies
carried, as a matter of widespread custom, in the hoods of
women’s coats, have all testified to having seen things
they did not see. The merited eminence of some of these
unreliable witnesses comforts the rest of us who, led by
faith, have said or implied in print that we have seen certain
objectively non-existent things. For it is not only misery
but error that loves company. People like Dr. Franz Boas
and Sir Edward Parry are very good company indeed.
The importance of the babies-in-hoods case is in that it
shows strikingly the danger to which the social sciences are
exposed when they include the testimony of explorers among
their data.
There are bound to be many in every scientific audience
who feel that the misrepresentations and misstatements of
their own science are as serious as any that will fall within
the domain of the geographers and anthropologists. They
may be right, which, if they are, makes the case more interesting.
What we cite are then not exceptions but fair samples
of the body of knowledge.
I have, in reality, never met any specialist who thought
that fully half of what is now being taught in the schools
about his subject was contrary to fact or definitely misleading;
but that proportion fits my opinion with regard
to my specialty and I shall use the last few minutes of my
time in dwelling upon it.
The first reason for there being abroad fewer “untrue
facts” about the Temperate than the other zones is that
ours is a temperate zone civilization and that to our forefathers
(and, to an extent, ourselves) the two regions of
unrestrained imagination were the tropics and the Arctic.
Five hundred years ago the percentage of misinformation
was no doubt approximately the same with regard to the
zones north and south of the North Temperate, but of late
books and ideas about the tropics have become relatively
correct. For the crossing of the tropics has been a commonplace
these 400 years, while the crossing of the Arctic was
not accomplished until within our own time and is not yet
a commonplace, though it soon will be.
The tropic myths have been dispelled by the frequent
journeys of investigators and by the necessities of commercial
development. The Arctic myths have not been dispelled
by these or any other causes, or at least not to the same extent.
Moreover, the human mind appears to crave some
district where the fancy may roam. Our favorite character
of the imagination is Santa Claus and we are perhaps right
in feeling subconsciously that it is fitting and necessary for
him to reside in an imaginary world. Moreover, our present
attitude towards explorers makes them the grown-ups’ equivalent
of childhood’s Santa Claus. The explorers, then, need
an imaginary world for a satisfying background.
I might confess here that to the extent that I am successful
in talks such as this, I feel as if I were stealing candy from a
child when I make it increasingly difficult for the rest of
the world to swallow the good old hokum about the Arctic.
Fortunately, I have never been very successful.
But it is equally fortunate that I am not very serious about
Truth—fortunate at least for me. I am no Jeremiah declaiming
against iniquity. I like to contrast my benevolence with
the misanthropy of the satirists, and I go on now to point
out the amusing but effective ways which the scientific organizations,
some of them nearly as lofty and respected as
the American Philosophical Society, have discovered for
keeping Santa Claus in his Arctic so that all may be well
with the imaginary world.
One of the branches of our government is the Geological
Survey and another branch is the Signal Corps. Lieutenant
P. H. Ray, of the United States Army, discovered on the
Signal Corps expedition to Point Barrow (1881-2) that
“willows” 20 feet in height grow a little way inland
from Barrow, more than 200 miles north of the Arctic Circle.
But it is out of character to picture such large vegetation
in the Arctic, and so the Geological Survey now comes to
the rescue by issuing through the journal Science, the official
organ of the American Association for the Advancement
of Science, and through Science Service, a statement that
in the great triangle north of the Endicott Mountains in
Alaska (an area larger than that of the great Commonwealth
of Pennsylvania) there is no tree-like growth bigger than a
lead pencil.
Before any of us were born the Hudson’s Bay Company
had a trading post called La Pierre’s House, on the Bell
branch of the Porcupine River, and at Fort Yukon, where
the Porcupine enters the Yukon. Ever since then missionaries,
traders, and white men and women of nearly every
condition and description, have been traveling up and down
that river or residing upon it. Now the United States Bureau
of Education, among its other contributions to the Santa
Claus background, tells that one of its agents will go northward
and associate on this river with Indians who are untouched
by the white man’s civilization. The implication is
that some of them will never have seen a white man until
the Bureau representative gets there. Really he will find
there Athapaska Indians speaking English with a Scotch
accent, their inheritance from the Orkneyman “servants” of
the Company.
We have been listing a few of the notable contributions
from scientific departments of the American Government
to our knowledge of the Arctic. There are naturally similar
contributions from the governments of other countries. We
close our remarks on this subdivision of our topic with a
note on the Antarctic which appeared in Science on February
27, 1925:
“The Minister of the Colonies, by a decree dated December
30, has created a large game sanctuary in France’s Antarctic
possessions ... the principal animals protected are polar bears,
walrus, sea lions and penguins. The French naval station in
Madagascar will be responsible for the patrol of the new preserve.”
In this French decree we seem to have the first published
reference to walrus south of the equator. The polar bear citation
is even more remarkable, for up to this time there had
been discovered in the Antarctic no land mammal, small
or big.
The walrus in southern waters has apparently not been
reported again since the French government’s original note;
but the polar bears, once introduced (and protected by gunboats
in Madagascar only a few thousand miles away) have
been doing well in our Antarctic mental world. True, they
appear as yet with comparative rarity in print; but they
appear frequently in pictures—not in photographs, of course,
but in drawings. A sample contribution was a cartoon of
the New York World, spring 1930. Formerly in such drawings,
penguins by themselves had symbolized the Antarctic;
now they were joined by the polar bear. Father Knickerbocker
was shown standing at the New York waterfront
to welcome Byrd home from his southern adventures. The
boat conveying the hero toward shore was rowed by a crew
of polar bears and steered by penguins.
These same late years that have been so propitious to the
Antarctic have seen a reciprocal enrichment of the Arctic.
As there had been no bears in the South so had there been
no penguins in the North. Or, rather, there had been a sort
of penguin, the Great Auk, which became extinct a century
ago. It would manifestly add charm to have penguins, and
so they have been appearing more and more frequently in
references to the North. As with bears in the South, they
are most frequent in drawings. There is, however, a growing
demand for photographs of them. It happens to me, for
instance, with increasing frequency that lecture committees
bargaining for talks on the Arctic request that I shall use
movies, or at least stills, showing penguins.
I get friendly advice, too, after my talks—what I said was
interesting and they didn’t realize before they saw my pictures
that there are flowers in the Arctic. But why did I not
also show the penguins?—they are so solemn, so funny and
so human.
Next after the official Government agencies in the Santa
Claus propaganda, with regard to Arctic and Antarctic, may
be ranked our great universities. Few of them are greater
(and I remind you again I am not trying to be satirical)
than the University of Chicago. In the spring of 1928 that
university informed us through what appears to be an
official press release that a graduate student of theirs, Cornelius
Osgood, was going to live on Great Bear Lake. They
said:
“If he is successful, young Osgood, ... will be the first white
man ever to live in the Great Bear Lake region. Two missionaries
who tried it in 1912 were slain by the natives. Armed only with
rifles, cameras, note-books, recording phonograph disks and a
sleeping bag to withstand the 79 degrees below zero weather,
Osgood will seek to win the confidence of the natives, living their
lives, helping in their work and eating their food.... The only
other white men who have penetrated the district are Steffanson,
the Arctic explorer, and his companion D’arcy Arden, a famous
figure of the North, and a Northwest Mounted Policeman who
captured the murderers of the missionaries.”
The stodgy fact is, of course, that John Franklin wintered
at Fort Franklin on Great Bear Lake a hundred years ago,
that the Hudson’s Bay Company operated on the lake
thereafter, that Richardson and Rae, three quarters of a
century ago, built their Fort Confidence on Great Bear Lake,
and that white men too numerous for easy cataloguing
have been there off and on ever since. I was so overborne
by this knowledge that when I was there in 1910-11 I lacked
the courage, or something, to claim I was the first white
man ever to winter.
The bit “Steffanson ... and his companion D’arcy Arden”
will be news to him, as it is to me. We never met at or
near Great Bear Lake. I believe he began his long residence
in that district a year or so after I left there. The lake is
big, however, and the country is big—he may have been
to the west somewhere in 1910 without my knowing it.
It is perhaps heaping Pelion on Ossa to prove further the
thesis of this paper, that even scientists will constantly and
solemnly report, as having been observed, things for which
there is no foundation but an inherited belief. I might have
resisted the temptation except that a beautiful example has
just fallen into my hands.
In Canada, Dr. F. G. Banting, Professor of Medical Research,
Toronto University, Nobel Prize winner, is the
country’s foremost scientist in that more people know his
name than that of any other Canadian scientist now living.
The Canadian Government has deservedly recognized his
position by what the papers say is a lifetime stipend. There
is in Canada now an organization called the Canadian Geographical
Society, a purpose of which is the increase and
diffusion of knowledge of Canada. I shall list for you a few
of Dr. Banting’s observations on a summer trip North, as
chronicled in Volume I, No. 1 (May 1930), of the official
organ of the Society, the Canadian Geographical Journal:
1. “The thickness of the pans (of sea ice) varied from twenty
to forty feet, depending on whether they were one-year-old
or two-year-old ice.”
Many Northern explorers, prominent among them Nansen,
have studied the time required for the thickening of sea
ice. Their reports are of the order that the first winter’s
freezing is from seven to nine feet, that of the second winter
adding one to three feet, the third perhaps less than a foot.
2. “On the surface of the older pans were pools of fresh blue
water, while on the year-old pans the pools were of salt
water.”
“Pans” several years old and those a year old will both
have on them pools of water fresh to the taste in summer,
if the spray has not reached them. It is ice much younger,
only a few weeks or months old, that has salty pools.
3. “Varieties of saxifrage, fireweed and stunted willow spring
up beneath the snow and ice.”
Probably what Banting means is that during the winter
they had been under snow, as plants are in Minnesota. Some
of the spring processes may conceivably quicken a little
while the snow is still above the plants, but, if so, how could
Banting learn this on a summer trip? Since he distinguishes
between ice and snow, what can he mean by their springing
up beneath the ice? What ice other than snow would there
be?
4. He lauds Franklin and his men who, on Franklin’s last expedition,
“in tiny sailing vessels, ventured through these
perilous waters.”
Franklin’s Erebus was 370 tons and his Terror was 340
tons, large to date for ships which have gone in among the
islands that are north of Canada. Amundsen’s Gjoa, by
which he navigated the Northwest Passage, was 47 tons.
The largest of the six ships of my own third expedition was
the Karluk, 247 tons; the smallest, the North Star, about 30
tons.
5. “In protected spots the flowering mosses of various colors ... reminded
us of a summer day at home.”
Either Banting here made some startling discoveries or he
was a bit confused as to the nature of mosses. Not a few
works of reference divide plants into flowering and non-flowering,
putting the mosses on the non-flowering side of
the fence.
6. “During these blizzards the land animals huddle together
with their backs to the storm and allow the snow to drift
around them.”
Banting must have been thinking of cows and horses
down Ontario way. The ordinary report of hunters and
naturalists is that both caribou and musk oxen feed into the
wind and are more likely than otherwise to travel into it.
7. “... thunder is so rarely heard that the natives are frightened
by it.”
I know people in New York who are frightened by thunder,
and have seen the like farther south.
8. “The married women wear larger hoods which are used for
carrying the baby.”
We have earlier in this paper dealt with the question of
whether babies are ever carried in hoods.
9. “... the Eskimos live in igloos made from blocks of hard
snow.”
We consider this under two heads:
(a) If Banting means that an Eskimo calls his dwelling
an igloo, then he is of course right; the Eskimo word iglu
means dwelling. A lot of people in a lot of countries live
in dwellings.
(b) If by igloo Banting means a snow house, then he
should not have said “the Eskimos.” Certainly there are
Eskimos who live in snow houses in winter; but it is equally
certain that the number of Eskimos who have never lived
in a snow house is larger than that of those who have lived
in them. This statement goes not only for the 20th century
but, so far as we believe, for the 19th, 18th, and 17th centuries
at the least. In fact, there are good reasons to consider
that the snow house was geographically more widespread
in 1900 than it was in 1600.
10. “... the native has no natural immunity.”
The only necessary comment is to say that the italization
in this quotation is ours.
11. “In a country where there is no sunshine for three months
of the year the people are dependent on their food for their
vitamins ...”
The inference seems to be that if there were more sunshine
these remarkable people would not have to depend
on food for any of their vitamins. The recipient of one Nobel
Prize for endocrine studies may then well be candidate for
another in comparative racial physiology and in deficiency
diseases.
12. “Perhaps the most important introductions (from whites to
the Eskimos) are the darning needle, which has been the
greatest help to the women in making the clothes and boots,
and matches for igniting their lamps.”
The testimony of many travelers has been that Eskimos
felt it a hardship to sew with copper or bone needles which
almost necessarily were too large for their purpose. Accordingly,
the needles which the Eskimos most valued when
the whites arrived were those that were smaller than darning
needles. No. 1 needles are much smaller than darning size
but are, nevertheless, about the largest that I have found the
Eskimos of my territories to value at all appreciably. No. 3
was a rather large needle for most of the seamstresses whom
I have known, who did most of their sewing with size 5 or
smaller. So far as my experience goes, it has been a standing
marvel with white women, and with white men used to sewing,
that the western Eskimos sew with such small needles.
I do not recall ever seeing one use a darning needle for anything
but darning or sewing heavy cloths, like tenting.
As to the preciousness of matches to the Eskimos: I have
reported that the Stone Age people of Coronation Gulf, with
whom we spent the summer 1910, often got their camp fires
lighted with blocks of iron pyrites quicker than we did ours
with matches. On days of strong wind pyrites has particular
advantages, so that it seemed to me the Eskimos needed
matches less, and appreciated them less, than they did many
of our other contributions to their way of life.
The issue is not so clear with the matches as with the
needles. It is ludicrous to claim that darning needles supplied
a keenly felt want. Whether the matches did is in the
field of legitimate dispute.
To guard against misunderstanding I close this discussion
of the Banting paper by reminding you, and insisting upon
it, that I am on the whole one of his great admirers. It
appears to me that his career and character are both of a
high order. That is my point. We get from eminent and
deservedly respected men substantial contributions of misinformation
useful in maintaining the general unreality (or
shall we say poetic quality, imaginative charm?) of our
world outlook.
Before introducing the next example of how the great
stand with us shoulder-to-shoulder in the battle to keep the
world unreal, we mention that the North Pole of reality lies
in a deep ocean and is removed some 400 miles from the
nearest land. During a hundred years there have been numerous
explorers studying this ocean. No one has during
this century, or at any other time, seen an iceberg within
300 miles of the North Pole; few have been seen within 600
miles. We know, too, the conditions under which icebergs
are formed. So it appears both from well-established theory
and from uniform observation that there are not and cannot
well be icebergs anywhere near the North Pole.
Now we come to a statement that could not be introduced
to you more impressively than by a simple recital of facts.
The publication is the September 20, 1928, number of
Science. The original author of the statement is Sir James
H. Jeans, who, according to Who’s Who, is M.A., D.Sc. from
Oxford, LL.D. from Aberdeen, F.R.S. and secretary of the
Royal Society. He is quoted with implied approval by Robert
A. Millikan, who, according to Who’s Who in America, is
A.B., A.M., Ph.D. from Columbia, studied at Berlin and
Göttingen, is D.Sc. from Oberlin, Northwestern, University
of Pennsylvania, Columbia, Amherst, Dublin and Yale, and
LL.D. from California, as well as holder of the Nobel Prize.
And this is what Millikan says, quoting Jeans: “Our position
is that of polar bears on an iceberg that has broken loose
from its ice pack surrounding the pole.”
Millikan and Jeans consider, then, that icebergs come from
the vicinity of the pole. But if you could take a census of
icebergs as we take a census of the human population of the
United States, you would find more of them in the temperate
zone than in the Arctic; if you could determine the population
center of icebergs as we determine the population center
of the United States, you would find this center is nearer the
British Isles, where Sir James lives, than to the North Pole.
Or, speaking astronomically, since Jeans is an astronomer,
it would be as correct to imply that Saturn is the center of
our solar system as it is to imply that the North Pole is the
center of icebergs.
Jeans tells us in a recent work on Cosmogony that light,
which goes eight times around our earth in a second, requires
140,000,000 years to reach us from the farthest celestial
object that our telescopes now show. With his intellect and
with that marvelous tool of the intellect, mathematics, he
probes these depths. The while he probes the vulgar onlooker
speculates as to how accurate Jeans may be about
those distant reaches when he is so far from being accurate
about things that are, comparatively speaking, within a
stone’s throw of his house.
It may be said that many people have heard of icebergs
who have never heard of sea ice, and that Millikan and Jeans
were perhaps just catering to their audience in using the
better-known word. For it is a common view that scientists,
addressing the laity, have an obligation to translate their
rigorous phrasing into the looser forms of common speech.
But when Millikan referred to the iceberg as “broken loose
from its ice pack surrounding the pole,” he was, according
to Science, giving not a popular talk but an “Address before
the Society of Chemical Industry, New York, September 4,
1928, on the occasion of the conferring on Dr. Robert A.
Millikan of the Messel Medal in honor of his work on the
structure and relations of atoms.” We are too polite to believe
it was necessary to talk down to that audience.
Jeans and Millikan were no doubt really thinking of floe
ice when they said iceberg. Their precision of speech would
then be like my referring to Halley’s planet or calling the
moon a nebula. An iceberg differs as much from sea ice as a
comet does from a planet.
The iceberg is formed on land; floe ice at sea. The iceberg
begins as snow and gradually acquires the semblance of common
ice through time, pressure, etc., while sea ice forms
directly from liquid water. The iceberg has been fresh since
it started; the floe ice began salty and, if fresh now, has attained
that state through a long process. The ice destined
to be a berg gradually approaches the sea; the floe ice was
on the sea from the start. These are but a few of the
differences.
It is possible, however, that Jeans and Millikan were not
confusing an iceberg with any form of sea ice. For it appears
to be the view of the average scientist who is not a geographer
that the northern polar sea is just filled full of icebergs.
For instance, practically everybody whom I ever heard objecting
to the use of submarines in the northern polar basin
will say that you are bound to collide with icebergs even if
you can navigate deep enough so that there is no chance of
colliding with sea ice.
It may be said, finally, that since Jeans is an astronomer,
and Millikan a physicist, you can’t expect them to know
much about the earth. But why not? I find in several of
Jeans’ books which I own, and have even read, that he talks
a lot about the earth in general. He analogizes from earth
to moon and to various other bodies. And Millikan should
know something of land, sea and air, for he and his agents
scale mountains and go aloft in aircraft to study his later
rays, sometimes crossing oceans to do so. Meteorology and
geography should be to him, then, not wholly alien professionally.
The fact is, of course, that this whole reasoning is beside
the mark. Jeans and Millikan, leaders in science, are simply
acting, too, as leaders in that great effort where we all collaborate,
the struggle to keep the world unreal.
Or, declining to close with a negative statement, we affirm
that all the way through from my telling the Eskimo method
of property identification to Millikan’s telling of icebergs
breaking loose from an ice pack surrounding the pole—through
that whole gamut we multitudinous scientists are
champions of a higher knowledge which I have advocated
in The Standardization of Error, knowledge derived from
facts-by-definition.
There is a perhaps subconscious awareness that lands near
home are getting dull through excessive familiarity and it
may be this feeling which prompts many who are not scientists
to join them towards keeping the ends of the earth
from becoming too ordinary. There are many examples in
recent polar exploration and we take a few.
The New York newspapers carried one day a statement
that Byrd had flown over the North Pole and that the temperature
of the air had been 10° F. above zero. Now that
is a commonplace temperature, without fascination; for
every state north of the Mason and Dixon Line has had it,
as well as a good many states farther south. This cheapening
of the North Pole needed counteracting. Accordingly, there
was an editorial the next day to the effect that in properly
evaluating Byrd’s achievement we must remember that the
flight was performed in cold so intense as to be unimaginable
to New Yorkers.
The reports from most of the winter flights in the Arctic or
Antarctic have been that the planes flew in warmer air than
on the ground. There have been instances where they flew
at 40° or 50° warmer; in one case the temperature was
79° higher at the plane than on the ground below. Reports
of this kind we neutralize in our discussions by assuming,
without citing figures, that (because high mountains are
snow-capped and for various other reasons) the heroic polar
flyers contend during their journeys with temperatures even
colder than those endured by their earth-bound predecessors
who explored by dog and afoot.
A danger well-known to the air mail between New York
and Cleveland, too well-known in most parts of the so-called
temperate zone, is that of ice forming on wings to
make the plane heavy and, what is more serious, to change
its aerodynamics so that it becomes unmanageable. This
occurs in what the people of New York and Cleveland think
of as cold weather. Accordingly, in our discussions of polar
flying we just assume that because it is much colder the
danger to the flyers, through ice formation, must be that
much greater than on the New York-Cleveland winter run.
This gets by 90 per cent of the readers and is one of our most
effective devices in keeping the polar districts unreal. The
fact is, of course, that ice forms on wings chiefly at temperatures
between freezing and fifteen degrees below that point
(between 30° above zero and 15° above). When it gets
colder you have comparatively little icing trouble with a
plane.
The Arctic and Antarctic have their chief social usefulness
as proving grounds for heroes. The stay-at-homes are thrilled
by that courage, that devotion to the aims of science, which
leads men to expose themselves to the terrors of a frozen and
lifeless wilderness. In order that the said terrors shall have
their maximum appeal to the reading public there should be
a good many of them. One of the things commonly dreaded
is illness, and it is therefore desirable to have it believed that
the polar risks include the greatest possible number of
diseases. Recent deficiency-disease study has been helpful
through showing that one at least of the vitamins can be
produced by sunlight falling on the human skin. Obviously,
then, the members of exploring parties are going to suffer
great deprivation, are going to be in imminent risk of their
lives, because of the long absence of the sun in winter. This
belief has been utilized in two chief ways: You take along
ultra-violet lamps and then make a great play on the forethought
of a commander who enlists the newest powers of
science towards protecting from disease the members of his
courageous band. Or else you have the expedition go into
the field without the lamps, and then work up a suspense on
whether by cleanliness, regular exercise, amusements, and
strict medical supervision it may turn out possible for the
men to retain their health until the sun comes back after
the Long Polar Night.
On the whole, disease scares have been managed satisfactorily
by the public relations departments of at any rate
the larger expeditions; but until just recently there was a
serious exception. It had been found by many explorers, and
had been so often reported as to reach the public consciousness,
that head colds and the related diseases of the pulmonary
passages were rare on polar journeys. Some said they had
been practically absent. For instance, it was reported on one
of the British expeditions that nobody had a cold for several
winter months, that everybody then caught cold from germs
which emerged when boxes of clothing were unpacked, and
that when this flare-up was over no more head colds appeared
through the rest of the year.
Obviously the polar explorer is deprived of half his chance
to be courageous if the life and the climate are represented
as normally healthful. The growing awareness that cold
prevents colds had to be dealt with. Simplest was, no doubt,
to counteract this through the old belief that cold produces
colds. Notable help in the campaign was received from the
cough-drop industry.
CHAPTER V.
Standardized Wolves
THOSE WHO WANT TO BELIEVE THAT WOLVES DO NOT RUN IN
packs should read only the first two-thirds of this chapter.
For believing in wolf-packs, read the sections “Crumbs for
Believers” and “Wolves for Posterity.” The section “Wolves
and Babes” can be read safely by believers and non-believers,
for these are an entirely different (though standard) species
and the nursing complex, save for one classic exception,
seems to be confined to Hindu wolves.
To read all sections may prove not merely difficult but
also confusing—may we hope even befuddling.
******
Everybody knows that wolves run in packs. One of the
standard definitions of pack is: “A large number of predatory
animals, such as wolves, banded together for the purpose
of hunting their prey.”
That used to be an undisputed statement of the case. But
now there is an argument about whether any wolf-pack ever
really existed, with the scientists nearly all on one side, the
general public nearly all on the other, and the sportsmen
divided about half and half.
On the affirmative side we have the undoubted fact that
“everybody knows,” especially in Russia, that wolves do run
in packs. If you want to refresh your mind as to what Russian
wolf-packs are believed to be like, you can do so easily
and pleasantly by turning to Willa Cather’s My Antonía,
page 63. The people Miss Cather is going to feed to her
wolves are the very diet to which Russian wolves are most
accustomed—a wedding party. There are six sleighs drawn
by three horses each and carrying from six to twelve passengers.
There is starlight on the snow and the road is through
a forest. The first distant wolf howl does not drown the
tinkle of the sleigh bells or the laughter of the wedding
guests. But the rallying cry is answered from many sides,
the leaders of the pack draw nearer, and fear grips every
heart. The bride sobs on the groom’s bosom and the drivers
lash their horses to breakneck speed. The rear sleigh upsets,
the passengers sprawl out over the snow and the wolves are
on top of them in a moment. The screams of horses being
eaten alive are more dreadful than the shrieks of people
whose entrails are being torn out. The cries of terror from
the remaining sleighs are as loud as the cries of pain from
the dying. The wolves are silent now—they have other work
to do.
And so the story goes on for sleigh after sleigh in Miss
Cather’s story, and in all the typical stories, until only the
bridal sleigh is left. About forty or fifty people and fifteen
horses have now been eaten, but the wolves are still hungry
and going strong. There are hundreds of them, you see, and
wolves have proverbially good appetites. Nothing will save
the last sleigh but throwing the bride to the pack. This Miss
Cather accordingly does, and so do half the other authors of
tales. But it seldom happens that quite everybody is eaten.
Somebody has to be saved, to give the narrator a chance to
portray the survivor’s life of shame and remorse through
many effective pages that lead to a distant and friendless
grave.
Such tales as Miss Cather’s we usually consider to be “true
in spirit” only, since they occur in novels, but we take them
for sober fact when we read them in books of travel or in
newspapers. The press stories excel the books in verisimilitude,
for they tell us what is said to have happened yesterday
or last week. They give the names of places that are on every
map, they frequently mention the widow and orphaned
children, they sometimes tell that the funeral of the fragments
left by the wolves was conducted by the home lodge
of Masons. There is every detail to prove that what you see
in the Sun (or the Bee or the American) is really so.
If you look in the index to the news published by the New
York Times, you will discover scores of authentic-looking
wolf-pack stories. I have the space to reproduce here only a
sample:
WOLVES DEVOUR 3 MEN IN
NORTHERN ONTARIO
An Elderly White Trapper and Two Indians Fall Victims to a
Horde of Hungry Beasts
Port Arthur, Ont., Dec. 27—A great roving band of hungry
timber wolves has devoured three men.... Last Saturday an
elderly trapper left his cabin in the woods seventy miles north of
Ignace to mush down to the settlement for his Christmas mail....
There was no mail, however, and the old man said he would
come back Christmas morning. At noon he had not arrived. The
postmaster sent two Indians to follow the trail....
About two miles from the settlement the Indians found a
spot pounded down in the snow. There was blood. Bits of dog
harness torn to shreds were scattered about. In the midst of them
the Indians found human bones. They hastened back to report
their discovery. The lure of the bounty on wolves, however,
urged the Indians to take the trail again, with extra ammunition.
They sped behind the dog team into the woods as the villagers
waved good-bye. They did not return.
Yesterday a new searching party departed. They found another
patch trodden in the snow, with much more blood, about two
miles from the first. The two guns the Indians had carried were
lying in the crimsoned snow. Scattered about were bones, bits
of clothing and empty shells.
The carcasses of sixteen dead wolves—some half eaten—lay
stretched in a circle about the remains of the two Indian hunters.
I quote from the New York Times of December 28, 1922.
The story, from what is justly considered one of the world’s
greatest and most reliable newspapers, gives proof of the
cunning no less than of the ferocity of the North American
wolf. Judging from the evidence, the pack must still have
been hungry when they got through eating the trapper
(perhaps he was small and skinny), so they lay in wait to
finish their meal on the search party, which they evidently
knew was coming. Then, still hungry, and fearing the size
and prowess of the second search party, they reluctantly ate
a few of each other for dessert before retreating into the
shadows of the forest. That was discretion and admirable
generalship. They fought when there was a chance to win,
and then withdrew before superior numbers.
There are plenty of such wolf stories in the papers, and
now and then others even more impressive. During 1926, for
instance, in the pages of the New York Sun packs of wolves
held Italy under a reign of terror; a bit later in the New
York Times villages in Siberia were barricaded against
wolves. Two million cattle and many people were killed.
Thus stands the evidence for the affirmative—wolves do
run in packs. They devour wedding parties in Russia and
they eat trappers and Indians in Canada. They terrorize
Italy and lay siege to towns in Siberia—in the papers, at least.
But there are skeptics who do not believe all they see in the
papers or read in books of travel. These iconoclasts tell you
that every story of a wolf-pack that you ever read or heard
is fib, fiction, or folklore, and that there never has been a
pack of wolves in Russia, America, or anywhere except in
people’s imagination. That seems a hard position to defend,
but they go at it valiantly. Their defense lies in both logic
and fact. For the logic they ask you to consider the caribou-hunting
wolf as a sample.
Their argument begins with the generally accepted fact
that there are more than ten million wild caribou in Northern
Alaska, Northern Canada, Northern Siberia and the
Arctic islands. From these at least two million caribou are
born every year; two million must, therefore, die, or the
numbers would increase. Certainly less than 10 per cent of
these are killed by human hunters. None die of old age and
very few of accident or disease, for if a caribou is old or sick
it moves slowly and is soon overtaken and devoured. This
means that wolves kill every year a good many more than a
million and a half caribou.
In summer, when their puppies are being brought up, the
northern wolves live in part on eggs, fledgling or moulting
birds, and rodents. But in winter the birds have flown south,
the rodents are safe asleep in their frozen burrows, and
almost the only thing a wolf can find to eat is caribou. I
know how wolves kill caribou, and I can offer some personal
testimony on wolves in general, for I was born on Lake
Winnipeg in a wolf country; I was brought up among
wolves and coyotes in Dakota before it became “civilized”
and was split up into North and South Dakota; I lived for
some ten years in the Arctic, supporting myself most of the
time by hunting. I have shot wolves with a rifle and have
seen hundreds of them either trotting quietly along or loping
steadily in pursuit of caribou. I have seen the tracks of
thousands following game, and have found signs of hundreds
of tragedies where they had killed some bird or beast.
I have asked dozens of Arctic Indians (Slaveys, Dogribs,
Loucheux) and hundreds of Eskimos about how the wolf
hunts, and there has been no divergence between what they
have told me and what I have seen.
A wolf cannot run nearly as fast as a caribou, and must
capture it by tiring it out. That is the essence of all I have
seen and all I have been told. It means that, before it is
killed, each caribou has to be pursued by the wolves from
several hours to several days—nobody knows exactly how
long. All hunters agree that (except for newborn calves) the
youngest caribou are the swiftest and staunchest runners.
The ones killed by wolves are therefore chiefly the old bulls
and old cows. A cow may weigh two or three hundred
pounds, and a bull three or four hundred, live-weight.
Nearly half of that is waste. The wolves are, then, pursuing
anything from 100 to 200 pounds of food. For, no matter
how large the caribou herd may be when the chase begins,
they eventually scatter, and the pack, if there is a pack, finds
itself pursuing the single slowest animal.
Suppose, now, there are 200 or 300 wolves, as in Miss
Cather’s heart-rending story. She provided hers with six
sleigh loads of Russians, six to twelve in a sleigh, and three
presumably fat horses hitched to each. That would make a
square meal for even 300 wolves. But it would be far otherwise
if the 300 followed a single 300-pound caribou for
three days, or even one day. They would be so hungry that
the beast, divided by 300, would be to the pack no more
than a tantalizing appetizer. There would be nothing for it
but to resort to another well-known habit of the fiction wolf
and use their whetted appetites on each other—eating, let
us say, a dozen to correspond to the soup course, a dozen for
the fish, and two dozen for the roast, with at least another
dozen of the youngest and tenderest for dessert. But the continued
practice of dining on each other like that would soon
reduce a wolf-pack below fiction and movie standards. In
fact, you might as well do without a pack altogether; for it
is scarcely worth the bother to build one up to the required
size, just to have it disappear again in a few weeks by the
members of the troupe swallowing one another.
Those who are trying to prove that the wolf-pack really
exists will perhaps admit that the abstract logic of pack
hunting seems a little faulty, but will insist, and quite rightly,
that logic does not amount to a hill of beans when contradicted
by facts. The pack stories, they will tell us, are simple
truth. Newspapers may exaggerate, but the better ones never
invent. Besides, nearly everybody has an uncle or an aunt
who had a grandmother or grandfather that was eaten or
nearly eaten by a pack of wolves.
That brings us to the evidence—are the wolf-pack stories
true? To save time, we shall take at once the testimony of a
group of scientists and practical hunters who ought to know
because they make the study of wolves their profession—studying
also the testimony of everyone they ever heard of
who claimed to have seen a pack of wolves. They are Americans,
too, and within your reach, so you can write postcards
to them tomorrow and see what they really think. Don’t be
diffident about asking. You are probably a taxpayer. They
are your servants, for they work for the government that
taxes you.
The branch of the government that studies wolves as a
part of its business is the Bureau of Biological Survey at
Washington, and the head of it is Dr. E. W. Nelson,[12] a
lifetime student of wild animals. He was four years among
Arctic wolves in Alaska (1877-81) and has himself studied
wolves in Mexico and all over the United States. Furthermore,
he has under him other men who have studied wolves,
among them Edward A. Preble, who has spent much time
in the sub-Arctic and Arctic forests and prairies of Canada.
But more significant still, there is under Dr. Nelson’s successor’s
direction the wolf-killing service of the United States
Government. This is a body of men who hold themselves
in readiness for telegraphic appeals from stockmen, usually
in the West, who find their animals being destroyed by
wolves. They come and exterminate the wolves “scientifically,”
and the flocks and herds are safe again.
In gathering material for a book I was writing about
wolves, I consulted Dr. Nelson. We agreed, first, that the
accepted meaning of the word pack, when applied to wolves
is a large number of wolves that have come together to help
each other in hunting. In other words, one mother with her
puppies would not constitute a pack. Dr. Nelson felt so positive
about the nature of wolves in North America, from
Mexico to the Arctic, that he thought I would be safe in
denying flatly in my book that any wolf-pack ever existed
on our continent. But, just to make sure that no different
opinion was held among people of authority corresponding
to his own, we formulated a letter which he addressed to
certain scientific students of wolves, and to all his wolf-killers.
As to how many wolves had been seen together, the various
replies naturally gave different answers, for experiences
varied somewhat. But they ranged only from two to five.
They were unanimous in reporting that if several wolves
were seen together then these were always the mother with
her puppies, or conceivably the father and mother with their
puppies, and never a pack in the usual sense of that word.
Then what about the story of the wolves that killed the
elderly trapper and the two Indians on the front page of the
Times? Surely that was no family of puppies—sixteen dead
wolves, killed by the Indians; a few, presumably, killed by
the old trapper, and enough left over to eat up one white
man, two Indians and part of sixteen dead wolves. To make
the inquiry into the truth of the story official and more
authoritative than if I were doing it myself, I suggested to
Dr. Nelson that he write to Ignace, Ontario. For checking
up, I wrote also to Mr. J. B. Harkin, Commissioner of National
Parks, Ottawa, who was at that time (1922) in charge
of the administration of the game laws of Canada, and therefore
in a position to set in motion official machinery to find
out about this wolf story. Thus I received the same replies
from two directions, one through Dr. Nelson and the other
through Mr. Harkin. They were, in substance, that no such
man as the old trapper ever existed and that no white man
had been killed by wolves. No such Indians as described
existed there and none had been killed by wolves, whether
in packs or otherwise, either in the vicinity of Ignace, or
anywhere in the world, as far as anyone living in the vicinity
of Ignace knew.
Hundreds of other tales about wolf-packs, published in
newspapers or books, have been traced by the United States
Biological Survey and by various students, including myself.
In no case was evidence found to support them. Just try it
yourself on the next American despatch you read. In spite
of all the pretended details—the sorrowing family, the Masonic
funeral—it will be reasonable odds to bet dollars to
doughnuts that the story will turn out pure fiction, or at best
will rest on testimony no court of law would accept as proof.
The case seems to be definitely settled against the wolf-pack
in North America. But there still remains Russia. Well,
why not let Russia remain? No one seems to have checked
wolf-pack stories in Russia for everyone is so sure they are
true. And perhaps they are. Besides, it is a distant country,
and the fancy must somewhere have play.
The book on wolves which the July, 1927, Mercury said I
was writing is still being written (1936), or, rather, the evidence
for it is still being gathered. We use here from that
accumulation sample case histories which give the trend of
the material.
Under a date line of Winnipeg, April 16, 1922, many or
most Canadian newspapers printed a story which I read in
the Ottawa Morning Journal about the body of a trapper,
Ben Cockrane, having been found torn to pieces north of
Fisher River on Lake Winnipeg the previous Thursday. “He
had been attacked by a pack of timber wolves. His bones and
pieces of his clothing and a rifle with a broken stock were
found nearby. Before being killed, Cockrane shot seven
wolves dead and clubbed four to death, their bodies lying
around his tattered remains being the only evidence of his
fight for life.”
That story had a personal interest. For I was born on Lake
Winnipeg and might, therefore, seem to have had as a child
a narrow escape from the ancestors of the pack which destroyed
Cockrane—we were there in the pioneer days back
in the late 70’s, long before railways, when there was only
an odd cabin along the shores of the lake and when presumably
the wolves were even more numerous than now,
and more predatory. Investigation would be simple, too, for
I could write to some of our old neighbors or their descendants.
But the case was being handled so widely and with so
much respect by the press that a formal approach seemed
indicated, one above the suspicion of bias. Accordingly, two
lines of inquiry were started, both of them official. Nelson,
at my suggestion, inquired on behalf of the logical department
of the United States Government. In Canada, Harkin
was then in charge of wild-life investigation for his government
and could use the machinery of the Dominion Parks
Branch. When I placed the newspaper report in their hands
I received friendly assurance that the case would be followed
up both in their own interest and because of their previous
association with me in similar studies.
Under date of May 22 Harkin wrote that an investigation
had been made and that “Mr. Cockrane has stated ‘that the
report of his death was grossly exaggerated.’” On May 31,
Nelson, after like findings, wrote:
“This amusing climax to the ferocious wolf tale is similar to
that of many other newspaper accounts of the killing of human
beings by wild animals, which the Biological Survey has run
down during the last thirty years or more. Such stories are almost
invariably pure fiction.”
A third inquiry, made by a friend in the Hudson’s Bay
Company’s office at Winnipeg, brought a statement that
when their representative interviewed Mr. Cockrane he
seemed annoyed and replied, I gather somewhat petulantly,
that as long as he could remember there had seldom been
so few wolves around as this year.
Sometimes when we trace the story of a pack devouring a
group of school children we find that it all started when a
small boy stepped on a dog’s tail and was bitten in the leg.
There does not appear to have been even that much local
base for the Cockrane fabrication.
The Ignace, Ontario, story (given above in its AmericanMercury form) has in my files considerable documentation.
On January 2, 1923, I wrote Dr. Nelson in part:
“I wonder if you missed the interesting wolf story that appeared
in the New York Times for December 28th. In case you
did, I am enclosing a copy.
“I am writing an article for publication in Collier’s Weekly
about fake wolf stories and especially about the great wolf-packs
that gallop through our books and newspapers. Just as this
article is being prepared for publication out comes another story.
I am so sure that this one also is a fake that I am not holding
up the publication of the article. However, I hope very much that
you will be able to put a tracer on it and find out whether there
is any truth behind this particular version.”
Dr. Nelson replied January 4:
“... I saw the New York Times article copied in a local
paper and at once considered it one of the typical wolf articles
which appear in the press, particularly every winter.
“In order, however, to get definite information on the subject,
I am writing to the postmaster of Port Arthur, Ontario, and also
at San Ignace, sending them copies of the article and asking them
what basis there is for a statement of this kind. I will let you
know the results when they are received....”
I had written similarly to A. Brabant, Fur Trade Commissioner,
Hudson’s Bay Company, Winnipeg, and to Harkin.
Brabant, who later investigated for me more fully, gave
preliminary reply January 6:
“I believe that the wolf story which was enclosed with your
letter of the 2nd inst., is merely romance....
“As you are well aware, there are few, if any, cases of wolves
attacking people....”
G. D. Russell, Postmaster of Port Arthur, Ontario, wrote
Dr. Nelson January 17, 1923, in part:
“There have been similar stories circulated during the past
years, but all have been found to be untrue, and while wolves are
a serious scourge to wild animal life in the bush, and a source
of annoyance to settlers in the back country, in so far as they
are not averse to raiding their domestic fowl, yet the genuine
evidence of men being killed by them has yet to be established.
“This recent story originated at Ignace, 200 miles west of Port
Arthur. My personal opinion (and the consensus of opinion) is,
that there is not the slightest foundation of truth in it.”
The Postmaster of Ignace, John Davies, wrote Dr. Nelson
January 18, 1923:
“Your letter to hand, RE: the killing of three men by wolves
north of Ignace. We in Ignace know nothing about this affair
excepting what we read in the papers. I don’t think there is a
word of truth in it. There are a lot of wolves which are doing
a lot of damage among the wild game but so far as tackling
human beings, I have never had any proof yet.”
The press discussion of the Ignace story was voluminous
throughout Canada, particularly in Ontario. On January 18,
1923, Harkin sent me a quotation from “one of our local
papers, under date the 17th instant”:
“... The scene of the tragedy was laid on a trail seventy
miles north of Ignace. The names of the victims of the wolves
were not given. Several old timers in Northern Ontario have
ridiculed the story and have claimed that wolves are not man-killers.
A Toronto man ... wrote to W. T. Thompson, dealer
in furs at Ignace, asking as to the facts of the story.
“Mr. Thompson is quoted as replying: ... ‘Wolves are very
numerous around here, but I have lived in this country for
twenty-five years and have yet to hear of anyone being killed
by wolves. During the past ten years, or over, I have been buying
raw furs from trappers and Indians and have never heard any
such tales that turn out true.’”
Reverberations of the Ignace yarn continued to reach me
for several months. For instance, there came in a letter from
an old friend, Inspector G. L. Jennings, of the Royal Northwest
Mounted Police (now styled Royal Canadian Mounted
Police), dated April 20, 1923. We shall use the main part of
it in another connection but print here extracts from a cutting
he sent taken from the Edmonton Journal of February
10:
“Recently I read a letter concerning the habits of wolves. I
had also read some time ago of a tragedy in the woods of our
north country in which several men were pulled down and
devoured by these animals,” says Dr. J. S. McCullough, writing
in the Toronto Globe.
“In the gold rush of 1897 or 1898, when so many men made
an attempt to get into the Klondike country via Edmonton,
Athabasca Landing, Great Slave Lake and the Mackenzie River,
I was one of a party which attempted a traverse from the
Mackenzie River to Fort Norman to the Stewart or McMillan
River over the divide. I was obliged to come back on account of
sickness when we had got out about 60 miles on the trail. After
dividing the supplies with my partner I made the trip back
alone and as it was necessary that the onward-going party should
have two tents I did not even have a tent to cover me on the
return trip, but built little shelters of spruce, rolled in my sleeping
bag with only boughs with a fire at my feet, and this slight
windbreak to protect me from the winds and the wolves. Wolves
there seemed to be in plenty, judging from the terrifying howls
at night, but they were seldom seen. In my weakened condition
from dysentery I made very slow time on my return trip to the
banks of the river, six miles below Fort Norman, where there
were several unoccupied, roughly-built log shacks. With 75 to
100 pounds on my sled I would drag along five or six miles, construct
a stage and place my pack in safety, returning over the
ground until I had all my stuff moved up. At this time of year
and in this latitude I saw little of the sun, and frequently I made
my move at night if the light was good and not much wind.
“I found the wolves very curious, following along on my snowshoe
track, crossing and recrossing it, appearing at one side and
ahead and then on the other side ahead or behind, always, however,
in silence. I had been given to understand by Billy Paton,
then of the Hyslop and Neaggel Trading Company, that the
wolves never attacked a man, and so I traveled all alone, and
very seldom with a weapon of any kind other than a light camp
axe, and, although I was very lonesome and very weak and very
down-hearted, I really never had any fear of the wolves. There
was one that I became pretty well acquainted with, a very large
and almost black fellow, who was afterward accidentally caught
in a bear trap which had been set by an inexperienced miner by
the name of Low Day. The trap was lost beneath the snow, and
although Day knew about where it was, we were all afraid to
hunt for it for fear of getting into it ourselves. The large, almost
black, wolf that followed my trail like a ghost in some mysterious
way sat down on his haunches right in the jaws of this
trap, where we found him dead and frozen stiff.
“I think that those of us who put in the balance of the winter
on the bank of the Mackenzie were all more relieved that the
trap was thus discovered than at catching the wolf. What I have
said here makes a very negative sort of wolf story, but the fact
that I was out night after night alone and that every time I went
back over my trail I saw fresh wolf tracks, and that through the
long Arctic nights one could almost always hear the howl or bark
of the wolf probably chasing hares, for the big game was driven
away by the 40-odd men who had gone over the country, leaving
hungry wolves and little else but hares and ptarmagan, would
seem to prove that if ever the wolf would attack a human being
the conditions were right for them to do so as I plodded my
slow course back alone over this trail.
“... Personally I do not believe that the wolves of Canada ever
attack a living human being. They would in time probably become
bold enough to pick the bones of anyone dying or being
frozen to death in the bush country. I have talked of wolves to
many bushmen and never yet have I come across anyone who
had bush experience but had an absolute contempt for the wolf
so far as being attacked by him or them went....
“I can quite believe that a person who had been fed-up on wolf
stories might take to a tree in fear when the wolves kept appearing
and disappearing as they will do on the trail of a woodsman
as he marches along at dusk, but I believe that it is only
the wolf’s natural curiosity that leads to his follow-up tactics.
The black tail or mule deer will often do the same thing if you
pretend not to have seen him....”
The Cockrane story, as said, never gave us investigators a
trace of foundation. One version of a basis for the Ignace
story was contained in a letter of January 12 from L. M.
Gleeson, of 416 Victoria Avenue, Fort William, Ontario,
who wrote me on the letterhead of the Fort William-Port
Arthur Rotary Club:
“Replying to your letter of January sixth, re wolf story from
Port Arthur. I would say that the story was just a rumor. It
originated, I believe, by a trainman running between here and
Ignace, Ont., and as the story was re-told it was enlarged upon.
I do know that the newspaper here tried for sometime to get
a confirmation of the story direct from Ignace, but they were
unable to do so. This story did not appear in our local paper
although it was telegraphed outside....”
A theory of the Ignace yarn, published long after, makes
it a fable devised for the good of a community. On January
16, 1933, the Portland Oregonian printed a letter from Ada
Alice Tuttle, summarizing investigations which she had
made or was familiar with, the occasion being that the “Ten
Years Ago” column had revived the story:
“The occurrence was investigated by several persons, Dr.
(William T.) Hornaday among them. The explanation reveals
the resourceful boss of a lumber camp, solving an acute liquor
problem. It seems that a number of his men were in the habit of
going to the nearest settlement to get drunk. So, remembering
the effect produced on the youthful mind by the adventures of
‘Little Red Riding Hood,’ he also invented a fairy tale, suiting
it to his audience by introducing plenty of action and lots of gore. ... They
swallowed the yarn, hook, line and sinker, and after
that stayed where they belonged, with the most admirable
docility.”
As Dr. Nelson pointed out, the newspapers run dispatches
on wolf-packs chiefly in winter. This, according to the
stories themselves, is determined by laws of Nature. The
rigors of the weather have banished or destroyed the wild
animals on which the wolves customarily prey; besides, there
is no doubt an increased metabolic rate, wolves, like people,
needing some of the caloric energy from the food they eat
for keeping themselves warm. In desperation the beasts
gather in larger and larger packs and finally in extreme
cases attack houses or even villages—the latter chiefly in
some distant foreign country. In America they seem to confine
themselves to attacks on people that are out in the
woods. Usually we have to depend on word pictures by the
survivors for information regarding these encounters, but
on December 9, 1923, the New York Times was able to
publish in its rotogravure section two photographs from
Sudbury, Ontario, giving the supporting testimony of a
camera. One of the pictures showed two men standing knee-deep
in snow as they defended themselves against a pack of
wolves. The caption was “A Tragedy Among the Snows of
the Far Northern Woods.” The summarized printed account
said that, ammunition gone, two huntsmen were set upon
by a pack of fifteen wolves. They fought them off, one
using for a club the barrel of his gun, the other an axe.
Before the battle came to a decision a third member of the
hunting party arrived and was able to turn the tide with
gunfire. The second picture has the description:
“The aftermath of a bloody battle in the wilds. Huntsmen
binding up their wounds after hand to hand battle with pack
of timber wolves from which they were saved by the timely
arrival of a third member of their party.”
When I sent these pictures to Harkin for investigation, if
he thought well of it, and in any case for comment, he
replied that he was fed up with tracing stories of wolf-packs.
It seemed to him a study of the picture indicated that
the wolves in the picture had all been dead for some time.
Apparently they had been allowed to freeze stiff in various
attitudes and had then been propped up in the soft snow to
give the semblance of an attacking wolf-pack.
Doubtless the three hunters were too excited during the
battle and forgot about taking pictures. So they had to re-enact
the adventure for the camera next day. The chief difficulty
about that explanation was that some of the “wolves”
looked a bit like dogs.
Sure enough, time proved that the doggy look of the
wolves had its reason. On April 12, 1927, the Utica Press
carried a letter from B. H. Divine in which he said, in part:
“The New York Times published a picture a while ago of two
men with clubbed guns fighting for their lives against a pack
of wolves. Following this up I received word from the Royal
Canadian Mounted Police that the wolves in the picture were
dogs very cleverly posed, and the whole thing was a fake.”
During the next years there were few American stories of
note although striking accounts of packs and their depredations
were printed from Europe—these we shall discuss farther
on. The American scene brightened with January, 1926,
when on the 17th the Chicago Tribune presented to its
readers the desperate situation then facing one of the territories
of the United States:
ALASKA TO WAR ON WOLF PACKS
WITH AIR BOMBS
Shrapnel from Planes May Save Game
Juneau, Alaska—(Special)—Dropping bombs from airplanes
upon packs of big timber wolves is a method for destroying these
game-killing brutes, now advanced and approved by Governor
George A. Parks. A trial of the idea is planned for next month,
generally known as the hunger-month of winter, when wild life
is at its lowest ebb and gnawing pangs grip wolves, lynx and
owls.
According to reports received at the governor’s office, female
caribou, deer, and domesticated reindeers have been repeatedly
attacked this winter by large bands of timber wolves. The destruction
among the female caribou is appalling.
The bull caribou in winter round-up together, peacefully content,
leaving the cows to protect themselves and yearling calves
as best they can. All are antlered, but they lack the weight of
caribou bulls, likewise the fighting strategy.
Air mail men operating in the Alaskan service have filed many
reports of instances where packs of wolves, hearing and seeing
the planes in the sky, gathered forces and raced the aviators,
leaping and barking at the birdlike machines after the manner
of dogs barking at pigeons. To the aviator it seemed that a large
rock dropped into the packs would easily kill or maim many.
The plan proposed is to drop bombs loaded with shrapnel and
dynamite into wolf-packs powerful enough to wreak terrific damage
even hundreds of feet away in all directions. Trappers and
hunters believe that the animals, seeing a bomb dropped, would
instantly run to examine it, thus bringing about their own destruction.
Timber wolves weighing 250 pounds, seven to eight feet in
length, have been killed by trappers this winter near Fairbanks.
The same breed of animal infests the territory from Ketchikan,
far north in the tundra, where herds of reindeer forage. The native
herders report many encounters with prowling brutes eager
to pull down young reindeer.
A powder manufacturing concern has offered bombs free for
the unique hunting expedition.
The Tribune account thus pictures not only a situation
physically serious but paints a discouraging view of the
moral deterioration of the Alaska bull caribou which were
no longer willing to place at the service of the smaller and
weaker members of the herd their superior antlers, greater
weight and their fighting strategy.
But it was encouraging to read that the very head of the
Alaska territorial administration, Governor George A. Parks,
was in charge of the relief operations. I happened to know
he was in Washington and wrote him there February 19.
His reply came dated February 23 from the office of the Secretary
of the Interior:
“Concerning the clipping from the Chicago Tribune, I am at
a loss to understand how it originated. I left Juneau, December
16, 1925, and have been in Washington since early in January. I
never have authorized any such statement. It may be a fact that
the bulls separate from the rest of the caribou herd during the
winter, but my personal observation has been to the contrary.
If any of the pilots in the Air Mail Service have filed reports as
alleged in the newspaper account, these reports never have come
to my attention. It would be most unusual to hear a wolf bark like
a dog. There may be wolves in Alaska that weigh 250 pounds,
but I do not know of any such records.[13] I believe that it is conceded
generally that a wolf-pack usually includes only the members
of the family—father, mother, and pups—and they separate
about the beginning of the next mating season. I have no personal
knowledge of any large bands of wolves, nor have I been able
to find any authentic cases where bands of wolves have molested
reindeer or caribou herds. Many times during my winter trips
through Alaska, I have been told about the wolf-packs, but so
far as I know the stories never have been founded on fact.
Geo. A. Parks
Governor of Alaska.”
Logically the Bureau of Biological Survey was concerned
with the situation and its Chief, Nelson, wrote me February
24:
“The other day I had a conference with Governor Parks on
various matters relating to Alaska and he showed me the copy
of the Chicago Tribune clipping of January 17, a copy of which
you sent me, containing the weird tale of the plan to bomb
wolves by the use of airplanes. Governor Parks was inclined to
be somewhat exercised over the connection of his name with this
absurd statement....
“Of course, the whole thing is an absurdity on the face of it ... there
is no such abundance of wolves in Alaska as indicated in
this article.... The claim that timber wolves weighing 250
pounds have been killed near Fairbanks the present winter is
another evidence of the absolute unreliability of the article.”
This is trying to be a chronological statement but we are
unable to resist the temptation to print from a Washington
despatch of the Associated Press as it appeared in the New
York Times of May 31, 1936:
“Plans for an airplane attack on savage packs of Alaskan
wolves were worked out today by three Federal agencies....
“Last Winter, Governor John W. Troy cabled for help....”
It may have seemed a bit far afield in 1926 to go all the
way to Alaska for stories of wolf-packs, so the Associated
Press in 1927, with a Chicago date line of January 24, had a
story which one paper used under “Hunters to Renew Search
for Wolves Near Chicago. First Venture Fails to Disclose
Marauding Pack Reported by Farmers.” However, there was
skepticism (that’s the difficulty of having the stories too near
home) and Leroy Davidson, former chief of the Cook
County Highway Police, was quoted:
“Wolves—bah! Last summer there was a camp of Campfire
Girls in the forest preserve. They had three dogs—the dogs were
a mixture of Airedale and police dog. When the girls broke camp
they left the dogs behind. I also had an Airedale. He ran away
and joined the other three. These four dogs are the ‘pack of
wolves’ that are causing all the commotion.”
That pronouncement threatened at first to be a wet blanket.
However, there is in my files a press cutting dated
February 4 with the heading: “Fliers Hunt Wolves on Edge
of Chicago. Posse Has Had No Luck.” So the story did keep
going awhile.
When it requires ten days on the edges of Chicago to
dispose of a wolf-pack, even with the assistance of the chief
of the Highway Police, no wonder stories from Alaska have
a considerable lease of life. Some of them promise to become,
and to remain, a part of the source material of Alaskan
natural history.
The year 1927 proved rich in American wolf tales, making
up for the comparatively lean years since 1923. My favorite
of that season, and of many years, I was able to trace through
the help of my old friend Lee Smits, free lance writer and
also columnist for the Detroit Times. It is not a story of a
wolf-pack, but we digress a moment to place chronologically
a striking episode of a lone Michigan wolf. We quote the
St. Ignace Enterprise of February 3, 1927:
LARGE TIMBER WOLF
Entered the Home of Robert Alexander
and Attacked Woman and Children
Mrs. Robert Alexander and children were made the victims of
a savage attack by a large timber wolf in their home in Brevort
township last Wednesday. The animal, made desperate evidently
by hunger forced its way through the doorway of the kitchen
and made a rush at the children who were playing on the floor.
Mrs. Alexander got between the wolf and the children and called
to her husband to get a gun, and she also was leaped upon by
the animal and borne to the floor. Before it could do serious harm
Alexander appeared with a gun and first kicking the wolf from
the prostrate form of his wife fired as the wolf made its escape
through the doorway and slightly injuring it. It was making
towards the woods when Mrs. Lottie Page, a neighbor, hearing
the shot came out of her home with a loaded shotgun in her
hand and seeing the wolf made a lucky shot killing the animal.
While wolves have been reported as being numerous in Brevort
and surrounding townships, and have done considerable damage,
this is the first instance that one has been known to have attacked
a human being. The Alexanders are of the opinion that the
attack was caused by starvation as the animal appeared to be
weak from exhaustion.
On seeing this gem, I wrote Smits, who replied April 29:
“State Conservation Officer George Gish, Jr., who patrols the
area in which the ‘attack’ occurred, called at the Alexander home
and was shown the dead wolf. It was a small mongrel of the collie
type, with a bob tail, a white blaze, yellow in color, weighing
not more than 40 pounds. There is an epidemic of ‘running fits’
or ‘fright-disease’ among dogs, and this dog may have rushed
into the cabin while delirious, or it may have merely been cold,
hungry and lonesome. It was a male dog. The rumor that the
animal was a timber wolf started when someone in the neighborhood
‘guessed maybe’ there was wolf blood in the dog. Not because
of its appearance, but because it came out of the woods and
acted strangely....
“... The story is from a paper at the county seat. It was carried
extensively over the wires....”
Although chiefly known to the literary world for his novel
Spring Flight, Smits is, among other things, one of
America’s connoisseurs of un-natural history. So he could
not resist going on:
“Not only can many bartenders and hotel clerks in the backwoods
give you good wolf yarns—attacks on mankind—but old
lumberjacks know, by direct hearsay, of some desperate encounters.
The editor of the daily paper at Sault Ste. Marie, Ont., ... has
for several years offered $100 for an authenticated report
of a wolf attacking a person in the Algoma district of Ontario.
No takers.
“The state prison at Marquette, Mich., fronts on Lake Superior
and, although on the outskirts of a small city, is at the edge of
a strip of wild country extending into rather large areas of swamp
and timber and offering cover for a fugitive for hundreds of miles.
Very few escapes are attempted, and the fear of wild animals is
unquestionably a deterrent. One gang got loose and were rounded
up because they made straight for roads and kept on them. They
spent one night in the brush, with a few hares, porcupines and
owls about them, and perhaps a fox or coyote, and said when
they were caught that they all were sorry they ran away when
darkness closed in on them. They had a terrible night. All city
gunmen.”
That there are at times very special motives behind wolf-pack
stories appears from a letter from B. H. Divine, published
in the Utica, New York, Press of April 12, 1927:
“To the Editor of The Press:
The following wolf story recently appeared in The Press:
‘Huntsville, Ont., March 31—While making his way to a lumber
camp near Algonquin Park, Elwood Bloss was pursued by a
pack of wolves. He fled onto the open ice, where the animals, 16
of them, surrounded him. Their howling attracted the attention
of a game warden, who arrived before they closed on their intended
victim. He shot seven before the pack fled.’
Upon writing to the authorities at Huntsville for the truth of
the matter, I received the following letter from T. Muyhum,
postmaster:
‘This story was first published here early in January last, but
since that time it has been pretty thoroughly exploded.
‘The young man (aged 22) started out to walk six or seven
miles to the railroad station early in the morning. The howling
of some wolves at a distance frightened him so badly that he
did not recover for some days. It was necessary to make some explanation
of his condition, and the truth sounded so inadequate
he built the story to suit his condition. It was soon into the papers,
and after being contradicted from the pack end he acknowledged
that much of it was not true.’”
For some reason there did not come to my attention until
1931 a support of wolf-packs by book reviewers and press
commentators who relied on a volume published in 1929,
The Last Stand of the Pack, by Arthur H. Carhart and Stanley
P. Young. At last, said the reviewers, a distinguished
biologist and student of wild life has spoken out, resentful
about the sniping at wolf-packs by amateur naturalists.
Young was chief biologist of the U. S. Biological Survey,
exclaimed the champions of the pack, in consonant triumph.
They were right, for I looked him up in American Men of
Science and found this substantial record:
“... U. S. Govt. hunter, bur. biol. surv., U. S. Dept. Agr., Ariz.,
17-19, in charge ground squirrel control work, 19, coyote control
crew, southeast N. Mex., 20, asst. leader predatory animal control,
20-21, leader, Colo-Kans. dist., 21-27, asst. head div. econ. investigations,
Washington, D. C., 27-28, prin. biologist in charge div.
predatory animal and rodent control, 28-....”
The reviewers did not notice, but I did, a sensational angle.
To have Young opposing Nelson was like Roosevelt falling
out with Smith—the chief of a division of the U. S. Biological
Survey opposing that retired chief of the Survey who
had brought him to Washington. It was a delicate situation
but I had to get Nelson’s view and wrote him discreetly
April 28, 1932. He replied May 14 from California:
“... It will surprise me very much if he has recorded a pack
of any considerable size beyond that which you and I believe to
be normal (mother with litter of pups). I will look up the matter
soon after I return and talk to him about it. Will then write
you....”
An invalid, and busy though officially retired, Nelson did
not communicate until March 22, 1933. There was to be no
Smith-Roosevelt situation, it now appeared, for the retired
Chief said:
“Under date of March 14, 1933, Stanley P. Young of the Biological
Survey writes....
“‘With regard to your question on wolves, I heartily agree
with you that the great packs of wolves such as have been often
described in books and newspapers exist only in the minds of
writers. In my experience the typical wolf-pack consists of the
two parents and their young of the year. One is apt to see this
so-called pack in the late fall and up until the early spring. Also
it is possible in the formation of this so-called pack for two
families of wolves to intermingle for a short time in the fall of
the year, particularly if one family group is in close proximity
to another, and a kill is in progress. My experience, even under
these conditions, however, is to the effect that wolves of several
families never unite in a long and friendly association....
“‘It is therefore possible from the foregoing that newspaper
writers and authors have in mind the family groups of wolves
rather than the packs of adults. However, these writers usually
give the impression that these packs are made up of adult wolves.
The greatest number of wolves in one litter that I have ever seen
totalled eight. This pack was made up of the eight young, which
were apparently whelped in early March, and the old female and
old male.’”
Nelson felt Young was a bit too generous “in explaining
what the writers have in mind in their tales of big packs.
Really they are drawing from an inexhaustible store of
ignorance on the subject. Probably less than 1 per cent of
them ever saw a wolf in the wilds.”
The year 1933 closed on a note ominous for New York
State. For the Herald-Tribune of December 30 reported:
“Lithgow Osborne, State Commissioner of Conservation, has
assigned Ray Burmaster, game protector of the Saranac Lake
district, to exterminate the wolves which have been seen in the
northern counties in recent weeks. Ten dozen snares and traps
have been set in the wolf-infested areas and seventy-five skilled
hunters and trappers will be employed. Wolves recently attacked
two farm hands near Fort Covington, in Franklin County....
The pack now at large numbers from twelve to fifty.”
The New York Times, evidently not jealous, supported
its rival the Herald-Tribune by saying in an editorial of
January 5 that: “... one pack hunting in Franklin County
at this time is estimated at from twelve to fifty in number....”
They added that: “An application has been made
to the Biological Survey at Washington for the services of
an expert wolf trapper to rid New York of the unwelcome
visitors.”
I wrote the Conservation Department of New York at
Albany January 5, and Lithgow Osborne, Commissioner,
replied January 12:
“... we do not have any definite information to indicate that
the wolves which have recently appeared in the vicinity of Owls
Head in the Adirondacks are running in packs. We are sending
one of our field investigators, Mr. Darrow, into the region which
the wolves apparently inhabit, in an effort to determine just what
the situation is. I shall be pleased to request a report from him as
to whether or not the wolves are actually hunting in packs, and
to see that the information is forwarded to you sometime early
in the spring.”
The Commissioner’s follow-up slipped and I did not remind
him for two years. On July 13, 1936, came a letter from
John T. Gibbs, Deputy Commissioner. He mentions several
reports on the Adirondack wolves “all of which resulted in
our deciding that there were no packs of timber wolves in
the Adirondacks.”
One of the reports was from E. A. Goldman of the U. S.
Biological Survey. He had been in the region of the packs
and “we crossed a fresh track of one of these canine beasts
in a remote section of the forest. Owing to the softness and
depth of snow it had been making slow progress. The track,
about one day old, appeared like that of a rather small dog.”
Two animals from the supposed wolf-pack had been captured,
but “general appearances indicated, however, that
both are dogs.”
The skin and skull from another animal killed was sent
to the American Museum of Natural History of New York.
On February 15, 1934, H. E. Anthony, curator, reported that
in his judgment the relics were those of a dog.
By 1935 the news magazine Time had already secured a
wide public for its news radio broadcast. They had enough
nobility or were secure enough to print in their “Letters”
of January 21, 1935, an indignant protest from Manitoba
against what the correspondent felt was their nature-faking.
Axel Nielsen wrote them from Cranberry Portage, Manitoba:
“Your radio representation of the wolf story (Dec. 21, 1934),
was most unconvincing. Don’t let yourself be taken in by such
stories....
“For 15 years I have traded and prospected in the North, over
a vast territory, a belt 1,200 miles long by 500 wide, the top of
all the prairie Provinces and beyond. I have met wolves, traveled
with them, trailed them. They have trailed me too; they’re a
curious lot. But my own sleigh dogs were ten times more dangerous....
Your terrified passengers were probably stretching
the imagination valiantly, thanks to the nursery version of wolves
in general.... In all my experience, all my questioning of
Indians, whose language I speak fluently, I have never yet discovered
a single wolf half as dangerous as the ordinary pasture
bull, an irritable sow, or a gander.”
THE WOLF PACK IN THE OLD WORLD
The American Mercury, July, 1927, statement on the wolf-pack
closed:
“The case seems to be definitely settled against the wolf-pack
in North America. But there still remains Russia. Well, why not
let Russia remain? No one seems to have checked wolf-pack
stories in Russia for everyone is so sure they are true. And perhaps
they are. Besides, it is a distant country, and the fancy must
somewhere have play.”
For many years I sought and found reliable information
on conditions in what is now the U.S.S.R. from a learned
and far-traveled officer of the Russian Navy, Commander
N. A. Transehe, who was doing scientific work in New
York. One of our conversations dealt with packs of wolves.
Transehe had journeyed through recognized wolf districts
of Russia and Siberia so extensively that few could have had
more experience. He never saw more than single wolves or
a pair (doubtless male and female), except when it seemed
clear that the group was one or both parents with a litter.
I suggested that doubtless the wolf-pack, then, existed in
Russia only as folklore, but this he considered did not follow
at all. “I have lived in New York several years,” he said.
“I have never been to Wall Street but I know there is a
Wall Street. I have lived in the United States without seeing
the Rocky Mountains but I know there are Rocky Mountains.
It is that way with packs of wolves in Russia. They
are of common knowledge.”
This was the considered view of a Russian whose judgment
I had often found good. Also there were two of the
foremost authorities on wild animals in the United States,
who had expressed to me the feeling that Eurasian wolves
might be quite different from ours and that we had better
not get too dogmatic about their not running in packs or in
general about their being just behavior replicas of American
wolves. These authorities were the above-cited Nelson, in
several letters and conversations, and C. Hart Merriam in a
letter of December 9, 1924.
In 1926, with the hilarious Lake Winnipeg (Ben Cockrane)
and Ignace yarns fresh in mind, I found myself an
after-dinner speaker at a New York banquet of the Western
Universities Club where Kent Cooper, then recently elected
General Manager of the Associated Press, presided. The opportunity
was too good, and I dealt with press faking, spinning
yarn after yarn and alleging, in some cases not correctly,
that these had been carried by the Associated Press.
On July 8, 1926, I received a letter from Jackson S. Elliott,
Assistant General Manager, saying that the Associated Press
was making “use of the information you gave to us about
the wolves not running in packs in order to have our own
service as near accurate as possible.”
Three things seemed to me: that the AP carried fewer
American wolf stories during the next several years, that
most American wolf stories in the press during that time
were not of AP origin, but that stories of wolf-packs from
abroad failed to decrease in number.
Magazines were active in European tales. Through an
article, “Russia of the Hour,” by Junius B. Wood, the
National Geographic Magazine, for November, 1926, p. 521,
said:
“It is only a step from Moscow ... into the wide open spaces.
Wolves and bears still roam in the Moscow district, and when
the dull winter dusk comes at 2 o’clock in the afternoon and
the country is under its white mantle of snow, hunger drives
them to prey on mankind.
“They boldly attack villages and, this year, even assailed a
railroad train of cattle. No peasant ventures alone far outside
his village, and one group of 20 men, fancying safety in numbers,
was attacked by a wolf-pack. Several were killed and all seriously
torn before the pack was driven off.”
The author proved to be a correspondent of the Chicago
Daily News, with broad experience of travel, including Russia.
I wrote him July 14, 1927, with interest in his picture of
Russia under the Soviets, asking several questions, mainly
ones that would enable me to check on the reports further:
On what railroad and near or between what towns was
the cattle train attacked, whence did the information come,
when did the attack take place? Could the author furnish
corresponding information regarding the twenty men attacked?
What further information could he give regarding
wolves in Russia, as to their traveling or working in packs?
What sources for still more knowledge could he suggest?
Wood wrote from Paris, France, August 31:
“Your letter of July 14, in which a certain unidentified group
designated as ‘we’ requests further information concerning my
reference to Russian wolves in an article in the National Geographic
Magazine has been forwarded to me here. From time to
time this coming winter when I return to the U.S.S.R. I will
be pleased to send you what information I receive on this subject
as wolves are as active a source of news in that country as bootleggers
are in the U. S. A.
“This information was taken from Soviet newspapers. The
attack on the cattle train standing on a siding was later corroborated
from other sources. The attack on the villagers went into
details to the extent of giving the names of those killed. Both
occurred in the winter of 1926-7. As I do not have my papers
here and do not remember the names of villages, railroad, casualties
and other details requested in questions 1, 2 and 3, I must
postpone answering further until I return to Moscow and have
opportunity to look them up.
“Your statement ‘You know, of course, that of all wolf-pack
stories published by the American newspapers, more than 75
per cent are without any foundation whatever, and that most of
the rest are based on some misapprehension’ indicates a clairvoyance
worthy of your fellow explorer ‘Doc’ Cook. It is the
first suggestion which has come to me that I ‘know’, or even
admit such a theory. It is far from proven.... (I) have serious
doubts of your impartiality on the gregariousness of wolves.
Though entirely personal, my humble opinion would accept the
version of unscientific but not blind natives, including rural correspondents,
who are living with wolves in preference to scientists’
dogmas which appeal to publishers and lyceum managers....”
The letter then goes on to valuable and no doubt accurately
quoted statements by Russians on wolves, ending
with: “Packs are reported as varying from 5 to more than
100 which, while leaving the figures open to doubt, cannot
be entirely an optical illusion.”
The promised letter of information from Moscow did not
come, but I secured Moscow and general U.S.S.R. information
from other sources. Waldemar Jochelson, distinguished
Russian traveler and anthropologist, was then in New York
and wrote me twice concerning the Wood article, July 27
and August 11, 1927. The letters do not say it outright, but
there is to be inferred from them a view that wolf-packs do
exist, or at least may exist. In this Jochelson resembles most
Russians whom I know. But, again like most, he holds this
belief, or this willingness to believe, in spite of, rather than
because of, his own experience. He says in the August 11
letter:
“As to my own observations in Siberia before the railroad was
built and in places far away from the railroad after its construction
I may say that I never saw a single wolf in my numerous
voyages except puppies taken from wolf’s den.
“I was told by my reindeer drivers of instances when single
wolves attacking herds of reindeer seized calves in spite of the
presence of the herdsmen. I remember one case when a reindeer
of my team came running and fell exhausted at the entrance of
my tent and the team driver told me that the reindeer was pursued
by a wolf.
“Siberian hunters told me the following on the habits of the
Siberian wolf. He does not like the woods, preferring the tundra
and other open places, where he can see and smell his prey from
a distance. Grown up wolves do not like company. Wolves have
separate dens and she-wolves abandon their puppies when they
become able to hunt for themselves.”
The outstanding foreign wolf tale of 1927, not so much in
itself as in what it led to, was printed as an Associated Press
release by the New York Times, February 9:
CAUCASUS WOLVES BOMBED FROM AIRPLANE;
HUNGRY PACKS INVADE TOWNS, KILLING PEASANTS
GENEVA, Feb. 8 (AP).—Wolves in the Caucasus have become
so numerous that the military authorities there sent an airplane
to the infested districts, where poison gas bombs were dropped
on packs, killing 200 of the invaders, say reports received by the
League of Nations.
Wolves are becoming a menace to the lives of peasants in remote
regions of Russia, Poland and some other countries of East
Central Europe, the reports say. Ferocious from hunger, these
beasts, which have multiplied surprisingly, are reported as frequently
making attacks on villages, and in some cases have killed
and devoured helpless peasants.
Austria reports that one farmer kept twelve wolves at bay with
an axe, wounding them all with powerful swinging blows, and
that he was finally rescued by villagers, who saved his life by
quick bandaging of bleeding arms and legs.
In the district of Vilna, Poland, packs of wolves, maddened
by cold and hunger, descended on the town of Ostrovsk and
boldly attacked the inhabitants, who, during several hours, were
obliged to put up an organized defense with rifle and shotgun
before the savage enemy retired. Poland is reported to have
mobilized several regiments to carry on an offensive against
wolves.
From Russia come even more terrifying stories. In the rural
region wolves by hundreds attack villages and even boldly enter
the smaller cities in broad daylight. At Verchofourye five peasants
were slain by the beasts before the packs were driven off.
At Orenburg three packs entered the town from different
points, throwing the population into a panic and forcing all to
barricade themselves in their houses, from which they launched
a steady fire, finally killing all the wolves, which tenaciously
refused to abandon their attack.
Perhaps through too much Edgar Wallace and E. Phillips
Oppenheim I got on this story a slant which appears from
a letter written by N. M. Stiles, Foreign News Editor of the
Associated Press, to their Geneva correspondent, Joseph E.
Sharkey, on February 24:
“Please recall your Wolf story which you sent us by mail. We
used it on February 8, but before it got to the wires we sent out
a note to editors suggesting its elimination for two reasons, the
first being that the incidents described were so extraordinary,
the second being that the statement that wolves travel in packs
has been disputed. However, although the story did not get on
the wires, two of the New York papers nevertheless printed it—the
New York Times putting it in a box on the front page.
“Now comes a letter from Vilhjalmur Stefansson, in which he
asks the following somewhat startling and curious question:
‘Do you suppose the wolf dispatch you carried about two
weeks ago from Geneva could possibly have been some sort
of a cipher message on behalf of almost any sort of secret
organization? If so, you are the people to do detective work
on its origin. I am putting out two or three lines to trace it
from the pseudo-natural history point of view.’
“As you recall we cabled you for confirmation of the story,
and you replied that the reports were received unofficially leanations
(League of Nations) circles also printed widely Swiss
newspapers.’ Now when you come to read this story with the
thought in mind that the word ‘wolves’ might be a code word
to identify some sort of an organization, as for instance an
anti-Bolsheviki outfit, the dispatch does read most interestingly.
One can imagine that the organization was putting these messages
over on the Swiss newspapers.”
Meantime I tried to find out directly how the League was
connected and wrote to the League of Nations Non-Partisan
Association of New York City. Their librarian, A. G. F.
Aylmer, replied February 24 that they could not understand
how the wolf stories should interest the League, and while,
like me, they had seen the press despatch, they had no direct
information of any similar kind from Geneva. Their office
would let me know if they found later that there had been
some League connection.
The Stiles letter brought a reply from Sharkey, dated
March 12. It puts the case reasonably and shows, particularly
in the last of our quoted paragraphs, how normal it is in
Europe to read, pass on, and believe wolf-pack stories.
“Answering your letter of February 24 concerning the wolf
mail story let me say that this was founded on stories and despatches
appearing in Swiss newspapers and on confirmatory talks
with secretaries of the League of Nations....
“The League interest in the wolf reports is chiefly economic.
The reason was explained to me at the time by ... member of
the League information section....
“He told me about recent cases of wolf-packs attacking peasants
in the outlying districts. I have never before heard disputed
the statement that Russian wolves ‘carry on’ in packs. When I
was in Siberia in the winter of 1918-19 a detachment of the
British Hampshire regiment which ‘en-sleighed’ from Omsk to
Ekaterinburg was attacked by a pack of wolves. The soldiers
killed most of them. Participants told me the story personally
and I wrote it at the time. The whole history of Russia shows
that wolves, desperate with hunger, will attack in packs. The
word pack means what it says.
“Since mailing you my story there has appeared a despatch
from Constantinople declaring that wolves had attacked people
in the outskirts. There is a general idea that the lack of arms in
Russia (the Soviet government not favoring extensive arsenals
in the outlying districts) has led to a big increase in wolves
while the present severe winter has brought the beasts out into
the open to secure food. I am sorry I have thrown away all my
clippings. Certainly Mr. Stefansson’s theory is startling and interesting
and I shall follow any new wolf despatch from a new
angle, letting you know, of course, the result.
“The wolf narratives have created no stir in Europe whatsoever
because they are regarded as entirely probable, given the
circumstances outlined above.”
In due course a letter came from the Information Department
of the League of Nations, dated Geneva, March 14, and
signed by Arthur Sweetser. This letter vouches for the
generally high character of the American press representatives
at Geneva, the particularly high character of Joseph E.
Sharkey, and the authenticity of the news conveyed by
Sharkey so far as concerns its having been received by the
League of Nations organization and passed on by them.
The general tenor of Mr. Sweetser’s long and careful statement
is that, without being exactly able to prove the truth
of the stories, he really knows them to be correct, and that
therefore the League is neither a victim of propaganda nor
indulging in any when it passes on information of this kind.
One section of his letter reads:
“... it is a fact that one of our officials has seen 6, 8, or 10
(he does not remember the exact number) despatches from
Eastern European countries regarding the increasing depredations
and boldness of wolves.... The official in question is a native
of that part of Europe and his information, and the experience
of his friends as to the habits of wolves, differs from that of Mr.
Stefansson.”
On June 1, Sharkey wrote me from Geneva:
“... there may be an inherent difference in the wolves found
in North America and those found in Russia, including, of
course, Siberia. I personally spent three months in Siberia during
the winter of 1918-1919, and persons who had long lived there
frequently spoke to me about the depredations of wolves which
seemed to run in packs....
“... I want to bring to your attention the testimony of a
young Frenchman who with others was conducting an aeroplane
trip over Ukraine during the latter part of the war.... He
said: ‘I think I can throw some light on that question, for when
I and my colleagues were flying over Southern Ukraine we
distinctly saw a pack of wolves marching slowly and somewhat
solemnly through an opening in the woods. The band seemed
to have a distinct formation with one wolf striding some feet
ahead of the main pack as if he were their leader. Stragglers
were seen in the rear, but the whole band seemed to have a
distinct and almost military formation under a distinct leader.’
“I have talked again with the Polish friend whose father did
a good deal of hunting of wolves, and he repeated that there is
no doubt but that in Poland, where the wolves run over from
Russia, the animals operate in packs or groups.”
The Associated Press received as late as March 23 pack
despatches from Geneva, “where interest in news of wolf
activity is chiefly economic.” One of the despatches closed
with these three paragraphs:
“There is a general belief here that the lack of arms in the
Russian country districts has led to a big increase in the number
of wolves, while the severe winter has brought the beasts into
the open to secure food.
“Despite the assertions of many naturalists that wolves do not
hunt in packs those who have personal knowledge of wolf hunting,
particularly in Poland, assert that wolves, desperate with
hunger, will attack in packs.
“In the winter of 1918-19 a detachment of the British Hampshire
regiment in Siberia which went by sleigh from Omsk to
Ekaterinburg reported an attack by a pack of wolves. The soldiers
killed most of the animals by rifle fire.”
These despatches, though I saw them through the kindness
of the Associated Press, were not sent out to the newspapers—for
the reasons given in the already-quoted letter
from their Foreign News Editor. On June 22, Stiles wrote
further:
“I have just read your article on wolves in the American
Mercury, and am reminded that I intended to send you a mail
story on the subject that we received some time ago from our
then correspondent in Moscow, Mr. James A. Mills. We did not
make use of it, as it was for the most part a denial of the wolf
story that came from Geneva to which you called our attention
and which we had already endeavored to ‘kill.’”
The Mills contribution is valuable as a statement of the
time from Moscow and is, of course, wholly authentic to the
extent that it is a report of what was believed there then
about wolves. We accordingly use more than three-quarters
of it:
“Moscow, March 17.—Soviet Government officials were
amazed at reports reaching the League of Nations recently that
Russia was overrun with wolves to such an extent that in the
Caucasus region the military authorities had to dispatch airplanes
with poison-gas bombs to kill the invaders. The wolves had become
so numerous and ferocious, the League reports said, that
they devoured human beings and terrified whole cities and
towns.
“‘A wolf story is always as good as a fish story,’ said a prominent
Soviet official to the correspondent. ‘The more it is exaggerated,
the better it sounds. But such stories ought to be left
to those whom the late President Roosevelt called “Nature
fakers.” It is in poor taste for a dignified, serious organization
like the League of Nations to issue them. The story about an
airplane being sent in pursuit of packs of these wolves is pure
fiction. Russia has its share of wolves, but they are no more
numerous nor savage than those of any other country.’
“That Russian wolves are no more abundant or ferocious than
their brother-wolves in other countries, is however, not strictly
accurate; for statistics show that not only are wolves on the
increase in Russia, but their depredations are much more extensive
and costly than formerly. The animals are also considerably
larger, stronger and fiercer than the average wolf. The increase
in their number is attributed to the peasants’ lack of
rifles and shot with which to hunt them. It is only within the
last year that the Government, yielding to complaints of the
peasants that wolves were menacing their sheep and cattle, organized
special detachments of professional hunters to exterminate
the wolves, giving a premium for each animal killed.[14]
“The loss in sheep, cattle and horses caused by wolves during
the last year is estimated at $6,500,000. A full-grown Russian
wolf can easily kill a horse, cow, or even a bull. But he rarely,
according to Russian authorities on natural history, shows sufficient
courage to attack a man. Indeed, the wolf usually runs in
terror at the sight of a human being. Even when travelling in
large packs, these Russian experts say, wolves avoid meeting a
man in daylight; they become dangerous only at night, when
they may collectively attack a person along a lonely, dark road
in the country.
“Throughout the day they usually sleep, wandering and hunting
in search of prey only in the dark. At such times, say the
Russian authorities, the most formidable weapon against the
animals is not a loaded gun, but a simple flare of artificial light,
like a burning match, a bonfire or an illuminated candle, wolves
having mortal fear of anything resembling fire.
“Wolves always live in families—the father, mother, two
young wolves born the previous year and two baby wolves born
in February or March. Throughout the Summer and Autumn
they never leave the neighborhood where their young were born.
It is only during the mating season in December and January
that the male wolves, seeking their female kin, form packs and
roam for scores of miles at night.”
This statement would have been more convincing with
the last paragraph omitted. For perhaps the Russians might
err on packs when they were so wrong, or at least so far
from what naturalists think they know, about mating habits
and size of litters among wolves. The usual view is that
instead of being whelped in pairs, as these Moscow informants
had it, wolves are born in litters ranging up to twelve,
and that they do not accompany the mother beyond six or
eight months. It is a fresh contribution, too, that wolf-packs
consist of males that are searching for females.
For the time being the packs had it—Sharkey’s suggestion
(and Nelson’s and Merriam’s) that wolves might be different
in Europe seemed to be carrying the day.
But there was the matter of wolves attempting to devour
the Hampshire regiment of British troops on its sleigh journey
from Omsk to Ekaterinburg in 1918-19. Sir Sidney
Harmer of the Natural History Museum, South Kensington,
was a student of animal habits and of animal lore. He should
be able to get in touch with members of the Hampshire
regiment, and I wrote him June 23. The Museum’s Keeper
of Zoölogy, W. G. Calman, replied on the Museum’s behalf
July 21 that the Hampshire story was fading “as wolf stories
generally do when they are more definitely enquired into.”
He forwarded a letter dated July 19 from H. M. Howgrave-Graham,
who is Secretary of the Metropolitan Police of
London and was (says Who’s Who) “Captain in the 1/9
Batln. Hampshire Regiment in India and Siberia, 1914-19.”
“I was in Colonel Johnson’s Battalion (the Ninth Battalion of
the Hampshire Regiment) and it happens that I was in charge
of the only party which made any considerable sledge journeys
during the winter 1918-19.
“My party tried to get to Orenburg from Omsk but didn’t get
so far. We went by train to Troitsk and from there we made two
sledge journeys, one to Verkhne Uralsk and back and one to
Orsk and back. I remember being told that we might see wolves
and had hopes of doing so as we travelled a good deal at night.
But we were disappointed and never saw or heard any signs of
wolves at all....”
Junius B. Wood said in his above-quoted letter to me:
“Your statement ‘You know, of course, that of all wolf-pack
stories published by the American newspapers, more than 75 per
cent are without any foundation whatever, and that most of the
rest are based on some misapprehension’ indicates a clairvoyance
worthy of your fellow explorer ‘Doc’ Cook. It is the first suggestion
which has come to me that I ‘know,’ or even admit such a
theory ... unless you can show that you have tabulated and
checked the individual inaccuracies of ‘all’ the newspaper stories
which you so sweepingly include, I am extremely sceptical of
your ‘75 per cent’ and have serious doubts of your impartiality
on the gregariousness of wolves.”
It had never been my intention to claim that three-quarters
of all cases had already been studied and found without any
vestige of truth. What I meant was that several students
whom I know, among them the Chief of the United States
Biological Survey, had been investigating for years the cases
which came to their attention and that three-quarters of
these had proved without foundation—while most of the
rest, and perhaps all, were based on misquotations, misunderstandings,
and the like.
Particularly with regard to a distant and vast realm like
the U.S.S.R. it is hard to study all the cases reported. With
increasing frequency through my investigations I began to
run upon the name of Sergius Buturlin as a lifelong student
of Russian and Siberian wild life and as the foremost authority,
among other things, on wolves. Accordingly, I wrote
him July 14, 1927, requesting as much general information
and as definite information as he felt like giving. He replied
August 18:
“I began hunting when about 8 years old, now—I am sorry to
say—some 46 years ago. And though my chief interest was always
with birds, and my first ornithological paper was published (in
Okhotnichia Gazeta or Hunter’s Journal, Moscow) in 1888, I
was, and am still, very fond indeed of big game shooting (bears,
moose, wolves).
“I hunted much in the basin of middle Volga (governments of
Simbirsk—now Ulianovsk—Penza, Kazan, Nijny, Nijny-Novgorod)
in governments of Tula and Orel, in Livonia and Esthonia,
in governments of St. Petersburg—now Leningrad—and Novgorod,
in Kirghiz country (between Irtysh and Ob), Kulunda
steppe, gov’ts. of Tomsk and Irkutsk, and in the north: Arkhangelsk
and Olonetz gov’ts., Kolguev, Novaia Zemlia, Yakutsk,
Verkhoiansk, middle and lower Kolyma, some parts of Chukchee-land
and Kamchatka.
“As from 1888 on I was always an active contributor to almost
all our hunters’ journals, Russian and German (we had Baltische
Waidmann’s Blätter), and from 1898 always took part, as now,
in the editorship of our best hunter’s periodicals, I had a vast
amount of correspondence with our most experienced shooting
men.
“I can fairly say that we have now too much wolves in our
country, but I remember years—for instance, about 1900—when
in my native Simbirsk gov. and Penza gov. they were as plentiful
as now.
“And never in my life have I seen more than 14 wolves in one
pack, and this only twice. And never have I heard a reliable
account of such a case. And I have known many old and experienced
professional trappers and hunters.
“Usual number is about 5-8.
“But I have seen—it was about half-past five in the morning on
the 13th Oct. 1893, near my grandmother’s estate Lava in the
middle part of Simbirsk gov., Sura basin,—when a pack of 5
attacked a herd of about 10,000 sheep, frightened about a thousand
of them in a narrow ravine and in a few minutes slayed 153
sheep—without even taking away a single sheep, as I drove them
away.
“I suppose if I didn’t happen to ride near by I would be informed
afterward by shepherds that they were attacked by 50
wolves. It was of course too dark to see, but though there was no
snow, the ground was soft from rains, and I could count all their
footprints in the morning in the bush and woodland near this
ravine.
“I am quite sure that wolves (at least in Russia and Siberia)
hunt only in family packs, that is, papa, mamma, young ones of
the year and often some ones of the previous brood. And this
amounts to 5-8, more rarely 9-10, and quite exceptionally 14
specimens.”
Privately we had disposed of the Russian packs of the
winter 1927 but in the newspapers they continued to do well.
There appeared in Miami, Florida, (and no doubt elsewhere),
a despatch which we copy from the News of June
12:
“MOSCOW, June 11—Ten families were rushed to the Pasteur
institute at Moscow from Kalujsky, a small village of the Kuban
district, after a large pack of mad wolves had swept down the
village street, invading gardens and even entering several homes,
biting the residents.”
By now the Associated Press was keen on wolves—indeed
had been for six months when Stiles wrote on September 30
that there was in his office a Polish representative who believed
stoutly in wolf-packs and that they had received (and,
I gather, killed) a press despatch from Warsaw:
“Polish military patrol Russian border attacked by pack wolves
dispersed them with gunfire.”
I had long been thinking to write my classmate John B.
Stetson who was Minister to Poland. This gave occasion,
and he replied June 8, 1928:
“A long time ago I had your letter regarding the possible
attacks of wolves....
“While there is much talk about the danger of wolves attacking
human beings and while people relate incidents which occurred
to them when they have seen wolves which they thought
were going to attack them, etc., it is extremely difficult to find
specific instances when attacks have been made by wolves....
“I asked the Chief of the Frontier Guards to make an investigation
of the various border posts to see if any attacks had been
noted along the 1500 kilometer front between Russia and Poland.
This region is wild and not densely settled. I enclose herewith
the letter which I have received from him.”
The letter from General Minkiewicz had specific information
on two cases of wolves, each time three in a group, that
had been fired on by frontier guards.
As to whether wolves attack in large packs, the General
says:
“Accounts of wolves attacking men sometimes appearing in the
press have their origin in the phantasy of correspondents seeking
sensational news.
“In a few cases, however, we have noted a very aggressive attitude
displayed by wolves and, if they did not dare to attack me,
it was only due to the fact that there were but few of them....”
The general commanding the frontier guard, then, had
apparently never heard that (around September, 1927) “Polish
military patrol Russian border attacked by pack wolves
dispersed them with gunfire.”
Lee Smits had suggested my writing David C. Mills of the
National Association of Fur Industries as likely to be informed
on wolf-packs. Mills wrote from New York, December
9, 1927. A summary of his three-page letter is:
Vladimir Eitington (of Eitington-Schild Co., 226 West
30th Street, New York City) was once followed by wolves
in Siberia until he camped and built a fire. He thought there
might have been 15 or 25, “but he says that in the dark and
under such circumstances, he could not make a rational
estimate.”
Many animals have the following habit. Mills cites from
his own experience wolves (two), coyotes (several), and
bears.
Writer’s opinion, and that of his friend, is that wolves
never kill people. Specially cited here is John B. Burnham,
noted American authority on wild animals, former secretary
of the American Game Protective Association.
Mills thinks that “common knowledge” of wolves and
suchlike is usually wrong. Then he has his own summary:
“The information from Russian sources in re. the wolf myth
is—
“1st There has never been a scientific investigation of the
question.
“2nd That wolves, under ordinary conditions, do not attack
humans.
“3rd That mad wolves sometimes enter villages and snap right
and left at anything or anyone. I presume this means rabies,
as that disease is also found in America among coyotes.
“4th That they have no knowledge of any authenticated case of
wolves in packs attacking travelers in sleighs, etc., but do
not know that it has never happened.”
In 1928, perhaps for variety, the newspaper wolf-packs
transferred their chief European activities to districts other
than hackneyed Poland and Russia. The American papers
informed us soon after the New Year (we quote the New
York World of January 6) that:
“... eleven peasant girls of the Czechoslovakian town of Maramaros
Sziget were devoured by wolves when returning from a
neighboring village through the forest.”
The Consul General of Czechoslovakia gave preliminary
reply to my inquiry on January 10, warning that stories of
wolves “especially stories from Vienna are always greatly
exaggerated.” On April 2 he wrote that “we have here the
reply of the Administration of the Sub-Carpathian Ruthenia
stating that the report of killing of eleven peasant girls by
wolves in Maramaros Sziget is not true.” Further on the
letter says that some wolves were seen near Maramaros Sziget
in January “and this was the possible foundation for the wild
report of Neue Freie Presse.”
November 7 the Evening Standard of London, England,
printed a Moscow despatch of even date:
“Wolves are becoming a menace to life in the country districts
of North Russia and Siberia....
“... A pack of several hundred attacked a priest and his wife
while they were driving from one village to another 100 miles
south of Moscow.
“While his wife held the reins, the priest beat off the wolves
with a whip. Suddenly a wolf bit one of the horse’s legs. It
lurched forward, throwing the priest from the wagon. He was
killed by the wolves. The horse carried the woman to safety.
“Similar attacks on persons are reported daily from all parts of
the country.—International News Service.”
On this the Chairman of the Amtorg Trading Corporation,
Saul G. Bron, wrote me November 25:
“These are termed in the Soviet Union as the ‘big Russian cranberry
tree’ tales. Nevertheless, there is no doubt that malicious
white-Russian propaganda agencies ... are working overtime
and that the comparative scarcity of reliable information about
the U.S.S.R. in this country makes a fertile field for the circulation
of stories about uprisings, wolves roaming the countryside,
etc.”
October 25, C. K. Ogden (whom H. G. Wells has since
discussed in the Fifth Book of The Shape of Things to
Come) wrote me from the Royal Societies Club, London.
He told that the De Reszke cigarette had small prize cards
in their packages and that the one on The Wolf said “dogs
and wolves hunt in packs.” He wrote them and they replied:
“We are sorry that we cannot give you any zoological authority
to maintain the view that wolves hunt in packs as stated on the
back of picture No. 26 of our Zoological Studies.... The error
will be corrected should we have a reprint of the series.”
Through laxity, or real failure of the sources, my wolf
record is blank for Europe and Asia during 1930 and 1931—there
is no account of tenderly-nurtured wolf children from
India, of babies devoured in Siberia, of forays of Rumanian
wolves into Czechoslovakia. But in 1932 the times were more
abundant and my records are bulky.
On January 10, 1932, Duncan Campbell Scott, president
of the Canadian Authors’ Association, descended to his more
factual role of president of the Royal Society and wrote from
Ottawa with concern for my wolf studies. He sent a press
cutting headed “From Our Own Correspondent, Vienna,
Sunday”:
“While an express train from Bucharest was snowbound near
Zloty and awaiting help, a pack of hungry wolves bore down
upon it.
“Having no firearms, the train staff emptied a luggage van and
threw into it raw meat from the restaurant car.
“Twenty or more wolves jumped into the van and began to
fight one another for the meat. The doors were promptly locked
and later the train proceeded on its journey to Kischinev, Bessarabia.
On arrival 18 wolves were found alive, the rest having been
torn to pieces.”
In view of the style of this despatch I have looked up
Karel Capek in Who’s Who and Britannica but cannot determine
from the brief sketches whether he was in Vienna
during January, 1932.
How wolf stories rotate appeared two years later when
C. K. Ogden sent me what is essentially the same tale—though
with a new city of origin, a new date line, a few
new frills. The cutting is unfortunately from an unnamed
paper of London, England—I dare not guess which paper,
though I think I recognize the style. It was from Budapest,
December 19, 1933. Like the one of two years earlier it was
“From Our Own Correspondent.” It ran:
“An unpleasant adventure which overtook the direct train from
Bucarest to Budapest is reported from Bucarest.
“During the night the train was held up by snowdrifts and
obliged to stand nine hours in an uninhabited part of Roumania.
To the terror of the passengers a pack of wolves surrounded the
train, and the situation was only saved by the wit of a conductor.
“An order was given that the luggage van should be emptied,
and some raw meat from the kitchen was then placed in the van
and the doors thrown open. When all the wolves were safely
inside the van the doors were shut, and the train continued its
journey with these unusual passengers.
At the station of Chrisina, in Roumania, the wolves were transferred
to cages which had been prepared for them.”
It is usually difficult to trace stories from the Balkans,
perhaps because their Ministers and Consuls there get tired
of answering questions about all the strange things we print
from their part of the world. For instance, I still covet the
real truth on what appeared, as Special Correspondence, in
the New York Times, February 28, 1932, from Bucharest:
“Two peasants on the way to market in Oradea Mare were
attacked on the highroad today by a pack of starving wolves.
They were unarmed and, after a brief attempt to beat off the
animals with sticks, were pulled down, killed and partly devoured.”
I queried the Roumanian Legation on this but never had
a reply.
I have had better luck with the northern countries, perhaps
because there I know the ropes. The Director of the
University Museum, Philadelphia, wrote March 21 on behalf
of himself and one of his vice-presidents, passing on to me
heartrending news:
WOLVES KILL GIRL IN FINLAND;
INVADE VILLAGES FOR FOOD
Wireless to The New York Times.
“HELSINGFORS, March 4.—Villagers in Eastern Finland
were terrorized this week by an invasion of hungry wolves,
roaming southward from the frozen plains of Lapland.
“The beasts entered villages and even the outlying districts of
towns in search of food. The young daughter of a farmer in
middle Finland was attacked and killed by wolves while she was
walking on a highway near her home. Her parents found only
bones and fragments of clothing after the tragedy....”
I wrote Helsingfors, sending a copy of the Times despatch.
The Intendent of the Zoological Museum replied March
20th:
“... it is not true that a young daughter of a farmer was
attacked and killed. A similar notice was found in our press, so
that the telegram to New York is therefore explicable. By an
official investigation, the whole thing turned out to be a manifestation
of too vivid imagination—somebody had found a bloody
rag on the road, and thus the story was immediately given. In the
same way it is a real nonsense that the wolves had penetrated
into villages and towns. The whole thing was about a couple of
animals which killed a number of dogs before they were driven
away and killed.”
The cruel ingenuity of man towards wolves is a defensive
reaction to the cruel rapacity of wolves toward man. In fact,
the wide dissemination of stories about packs is a necessity
in justifying the extensiveness of the war we wage and the
character of the weapons and tactics we use. We would not
be half so successful in protecting the chickens of the farmer
and the sheep of the rancher if we did not constantly circulate
reports of how wolves will attack anything from a child
playing on a cabin floor in Michigan to a regiment of British
troops in Siberia.
Some of the methods used against wolves are commonplace,
not worth describing, though we might name a few
of them—trapping, shooting, the use of poisoned bait, the
finding of dens and smoking out of the pups to be clubbed
to death. One method is so peculiar that we describe it.
Under date of March 12, 1927, the Associated Press received,
but did not issue to the newspapers, information upon
the extent and manner of wolf hunting in Poland.
“... for centuries wolf hunts have been carried out by Poles
(1) by the aristocrats as a sport, (2) by peasants as a means of
livelihood. The same method, which is gentle, as you will see, has
been employed by nobility and peasant.
“A live pig is attached by a leather rope at the rear of sleigh
or sled in which six or seven men take their places, all heavily
armed. The sleigh is drawn by two or three horses. Two men
devote themselves exclusively to protecting the horses from the
onslaught of the wolves which, led from their lairs by the screams
of the suffering and dying hog, rush in a pack after the swiftly
moving sleigh. Two other men empty their rifles at wolves from
either side and two others do their execution from the rear.
“... (Our informant) said his father has often hunted wolves,
which attack in packs, after this fashion.”
I might have traced this account through my aforementioned
classmate the Minister to Poland, and would have
done so but for chancing upon remarks of Sir Albert Gray
before the Royal Geographical Society of London as they
are reported in that society’s Journal for June, 1921, p. 445.
They are to the effect that people continue holding strange,
romantic, beliefs no matter how often these are exposed. He
has in mind chiefly the idea that wolves run in packs and
quotes the (for the time and place) annihilation of the idea
by Baddeley in his Russia in the Eighties, Sport and Politics,
(London, 1921). I was on the track of wolf-packs then and
followed Sir Albert’s clue. I found the author demolishing
the pack to his own satisfaction and that he also pays his
respects to various beliefs regarding the methods of hunting
wolves.
John F. Baddeley spent in Russia, of which a large section
of Poland was then a part, most of the decade following
1879 and much of those years in hunting and in the company
of sportsmen and naturalists. After denying that wolves
ever go in packs and after denying also that wolves are
numerous in Russia, he says, beginning on p. 149:
“The idea that wolves are very numerous in Russia has gained
substance, also, from the very natural tendency of certain sportsmen
to exaggerate their performances; and more especially is this
the case in regard to that form of sport in which wolves and
sucking-pigs are supposed to play the chief parts. According to
published accounts—I have one or two before me but will not
pillory the writers—you have only to take a sucking-pig (in good
voice) and drive along the highroad in a sledge any winter’s
night, trailing behind you a bundle of straw at the end of a string
to represent piggy—who meantime must be made to squeal his
loudest—to enjoy excellent sport with the numerous wolves that
will assuredly come to the lure the first time of asking. Here
again I am regretfully forced to say that I never knew a man of
proved veracity who claimed to have bagged even one wolf by
this method, while one honest friend assured me that he had tried
it no less than seventeen times in places where wolves were
known to exist, but had only once had a shot at what he thought
might be one.”
It may be, as claimed by this author, that wolves do not
swarm in from Polish forests at the squeals of a pig, but the
belief that they do is useful. Faraway, in Michigan for instance,
stories detailing the alleged Polish ingenuities will
tend to lead American woodsmen to cleverness of wolf-killing
that, in the long run, saves the local farmers a good
many chickens and lambs.
A reporter friend tells that the wolf-pack is a standard
joke among the foreign correspondents in Europe, certainly
in Vienna, and he has passed on to me a crystallization of
their attitude, as expressed by the correspondent for a London
paper:
The yarn is that the Orient Express was held up by a
pack of wolves. They began at the front end, eating the engineer
and fireman, and proceeded towards the rear, devouring
everyone as they went until, in the last car, they came upon a
correspondent whom they spared on his promise that he
would give them adequate publicity.
CRUMBS FOR PACK BELIEVERS
The evidence has been, then, that wolf-packs which
come up to motion picture and folklore standards do not
exist. But there still may be a foundation of reality upon
which the imaginative and inventive have built their fabrications.
Students who scout the pack as ordinarily defined and
pictured have nevertheless agreed on certain things which,
by multiplication, magnification and misinterpretation,
could start the pack idea going, or at any rate might keep
it going.
Obviously wolf pups will remain with their mother until
weaned. Doubtless the family breaks up before the young
are quite full grown, or when they are between five and
eight months old. There may be as many as twelve in a
litter, fourteen by some views. When you meet stories of
packs with five to fifteen in them you can thus have a true
report of a family hunting, traveling or living together. If
the story describes a “gigantic leader of the pack” you may
be sure that a family is involved. With the even-sized pups
taken for normal wolves, mama looks colossal. If there are
two gigantic leaders, then papa must be traveling along.
A foremost authority for America, Nelson, and a foremost
one for Eurasia, Buturlin, differ on one point, though only
in degree. Nelson is somewhere between thinking it rare
and thinking it improbable that last year’s pups will be
found still traveling with their mother after this year’s become
large enough to hunt; Buturlin thinks it rare but sees
no improbability. Accordingly, when Nelson credits a report
of say twenty wolves he is inclined to think that two families
have come together accidentally for a few moments, or are
only following each other accidentally instead of really
traveling together. Buturlin feels these are probably one
mother’s litters of two years and that they are in semi-permanent
company.[15]
With such family groups for nuclei, the traveler’s tale, the
peasant’s yarn which the reporter believes, become easy. Just
multiply by ten and you have packs of 50, 100, 200. Zero is
nothing. So what is a zero more or less in a good yarn?
There are methods other than simple multiplication which
can lead reasonably to packs of great size.
In the Arctic and sub-Arctic I have stood at vantage points
from which I could see in one, two, or several directions
from me scattered wolves which, counted together, would
make a “pack.” These are no more really a pack of wolves
than the scattered and unconnected pickpockets of a city
are a band of thieves. But assume the story is thrice repeated.
First version: I saw 100 wolves from one place. Second
version: Jones saw 100 wolves in one place. Third version:
Brown says Jones saw a pack of 100 wolves.
It might happen that two wolf families scent a caribou
or a band. Running up the wind they might so nearly come
together, without really joining, that a careless observer seeing
the two packs running in the same direction would take
them to be one pack—this all the more because groups that
are indubitably a mother with pups will sometimes string
out half a mile as they lope in pursuit of caribou. But two
families strung out, say a mile from the first to the last of
them, would not make a pack in the sense of a band working
systematically and semi-permanently together.
With considerations such as these in mind, we examine
seemingly reliable testimony for considerable numbers of
wolves having been observed together.
“Considerable” needs defining. The wolf-killing service of
the U. S. Biological Survey were polled by Nelson and voted
for two, three, and at highest five wolves being seen together,
these always mother or parents with pups. Many have testified
for seven in a family, however, among them the zoologist,
Dr. R. M. Anderson, Chief Biologist, Ottawa, who has
in Canada an official position similar to Nelson’s in the
United States. A few apparently good witnesses have testified
to nine. We are, then, chiefly concerned in this section
with numbers larger than nine and with their interpretation—were
they really together and then in what sense?
How permanently were they together? Were they family
groups?
My voluminous correspondence on packs was, as said,
begun in 1922 when I realized that my own belief in wolf-packs,
begun in The Friendly Arctic (see that book’s index)
was untenable. We have already used that part of the correspondence
which attempted to trace packs reported between
1922 and 1936, finding all that could be traced wanting.
We now canvass the rest of the evidence, using it in the
main chronologically.
The Encyclopedia Britannica, Fourteenth Edition, says in
its article on wolves that: “Except during summer when the
young families of cubs are being separately provided for by
their parents they assemble in troops or packs.”
That edition is dated 1929. Seven years before, on March
27, 1922, Anderson wrote to Nelson that during several years
spent in Arctic and sub-Arctic Canada and Alaska:
“... I never saw more than seven wolves in any band nor did
I hear of any larger bands than seven. A reliable Eskimo in my
employ told me that he was once followed by nine wolves on a
river near Herschel Island, and in the Joint Report, Survey International
Boundary, 141st Meridian, 1918, there is a report of nine
wolves seen in a band on the boundary.
“In that region the wolves are more often seen in bunches of
two or three, or singly, and the bunches of five or more are probably
an old female with her cubs of the year. Several that we
killed out of such a band at Langton Bay were all immature....
“I have heard occasional vague rumors of larger bands of
wolves in more southerly parts of Canada, but have never been
able to verify any such reports....”
In passing on to me, November 25, 1922, the information
given by Anderson, Nelson added:
“... I am satisfied that the stories of great packs of wolves
banded together to pursue caribou or any other game are based
on the fertile imagination of the writers and not on observations
in the field. It is common knowledge that the wolves pair more
or less permanently and are in no sense gregarious animals. At
the end of each breeding season and until well into the following
winter, my field experience and the information which has come
to the Biological Survey from its large force of hunters destroying
predatory animals in the western states, coincide in enumerating
packs of wolves not exceeding the ordinary normal number of
the two parents and the litter of the season which may vary from
three or four animals up to ten or twelve. Such bands of parents
and their young of the year hunt together until well into the
following winter but with the approach of spring they separate
to mate.... There is a bare possibility that in pursuing bands of
reindeer or caribou, several of these family packs of wolves might
accidentally come together in pursuit but such union would be
purely fortuitous and of very temporary endurance.
“My observations and personal information obtained at first
hand extends from the mountains bordering the valley of Mexico,
north to the Arctic circle in Alaska and also the observations of
our large corps of hunters numbering several hundred men, who,
during the progress of their campaign against predatory animals
in the western states have killed between four and five thousand
of these animals within the last six years.”
Nelson wrote me January 4, 1923, after a fresh study of
some Russian evidence, that clearly they have there the same
situation as we have here, “the wolves running in family
parties exactly as they do in North America, running in
great bands only in literature and folklore.”
On January 18 Harkin sent me a long quotation from a
story he had found in “one of our local papers, under date
the 17th instant.” It is a long statement, generally claiming
that wolves are not dangerous. A section bearing on our
present theme is under the subhead “Whole Pack Fled.” In
northern Ontario the sledge was crossing a lake, on a winter
evening, toward an island:
“We were just making the point of this island, and what should
we meet coming from the other side but a pack of wolves. We
just met there. The leader, a big, grizzled, long-legged old chap,
looked me over from a distance of about twenty feet; the rest of
the pack ranged behind and alongside of him, their tails straight
out for just about as long as it takes to stiffen them out with fear.
Then they broke. They just flattened out on the ice and flew—twenty-one
of them.”
We have used in another connection parts of a letter from
Inspector Jennings of the R.C.M.P., Edmonton, April 20,
1923, one of the most informative of the whole wolf correspondence:
“... it appears timber wolves are becoming more numerous in
the McKenzie Delta, but do not appear to be running in packs.
At Baillie Island where a number were killed in the winter of
1921-22 they appear to be running in packs of from four to seven.
We have also paid bounties at Tree River Detachment for wolves
killed in the Coronation Gulf. C. Klinkenberg, whom you remember,
told me in 1921, when I was North, of a fight he had
with a she wolf and five yearling pups. He was attacked by all
of them, and only by the fortunate appearance of his son with his
rifle was his life saved.... The general impression is that such
bands, or what may be called a band, is generally a family, and
that it is only occasionally, when hunting for food, that two or
more families might come together and constitute a real pack.
“In regard to the McKenzie District, an old prospector who has
travelled from the headwaters of the Thelon River to the British
Columbia boundary in the West states that while east of the
McKenzie River wolves may be plentiful when Caribou are numerous,
he has never seen them in what may be called a pack,
although at times in the open several wolves may be seen together,
but evidently working independently. Below Simpson and also
on the Liard River in the Foot Hills, he has seen as many as
twenty under one leader, but generally the pack is from five to
nine. The band of twenty was following a moose track. At another
time he states that when his party had killed a moose,
shortly after, a large grey wolf was seen on the opposite side of
the river. This wolf called a few times and was soon joined by
others to the number of ten....
“One of my officers in February, 1916, while traveling on the
McKenzie, about 30 miles below Simpson, came upon a band of
seven, at a place where a moose had been killed the previous
day.”
December 19, 1924, Nelson reaffirmed his lack of evidence
for believing that two or more families ever made up a
“temporary pack.” He also defined the terms under which,
for sake of argument, he might concede theoretically, in the
absence of evidence, that unions might take place.
“I am still skeptical about the formation of wolf-packs which
are made up of two or more families hunting in companionship.
I have no knowledge of any such combination, and knowing the
habits and characteristics of wolves doubt this occurring except
under what might be termed fortuitous circumstances. Two or
more family parties of wolves might incidentally come together
in the pursuit of the same game animal and join in the kill; but
if they did so I should expect a fierce battle to ensue between the
different parties of wolves, strangers to one another, just as would
happen in the case of strange dogs. Furthermore, I believe that
should two or more family parties of wolves thus come together
in the immediate pursuit of game, they would promptly spread
into their original units as soon as the kill was made or the chase
ended. Wolves have much the same nature as dogs, and the hostility
that strange dogs show one to another is a good indication
of what might be expected on the part of wolves....”
C. Hart Merriam wrote January 12, 1925, quoting his own
Mammals of the Adirondacks (New York, 1882):
“Comparatively few wolves are now to be found in the Adirondacks,
though twelve years ago they were quite abundant, and
used to hunt in packs of half a dozen or more.... The amount
of noise that a single wolf is capable of producing is simply
astonishing, and many amusing episodes of camp lore owe their
origin to this fact. More than one ‘lone traveler’ has hastily taken
to a tree, and remained in the inhospitable shelter of its scrawny
branches for an entire night, believing himself surrounded by a
pack of at least fifty fierce and hungry wolves, when, in reality,
there was but one, and (as its tracks afterwards proved) it was
on the farther side of a lake, a couple of miles away.”
Merriam further quotes Theodore Roosevelt’s Hunting
Trips of a Ranchman (New York, 1885):
“According to my experience, the wolf is rather solitary. A
single one or a pair will be found by themselves, or possibly with
one or more well-grown young ones, and will then hunt over a
large tract where no other wolves will be found; and as they
wander very far, and as their melancholy howlings have a most
ventriloquial effect, they are often thought to be much more
plentiful than they are.”
In its care to avoid nature faking the Associated Press
refused to circulate a story which they received from
Winnipeg and which Jackson S. Elliott, Assistant General
Manager, sent along for my wolf files July 8, 1926. That
account, however, runs well within family limits and so has
the probabilities for it. The applicable section runs that “the
hunter noticed a string of seven grey wolves crossing the
prairie. He waited until they approached and was successful
in bringing down five of them.”
The story seemed probably correct and gave a lead to further
information, so I wrote A. Brabant, Fur Trade Commissioner
of the Hudson’s Bay Company, Winnipeg, and
received through him a valuable letter from their A. C.
Clark, Norway House, Manitoba, August 3:
“Carl Sherman, the trapper who killed the wolves referred to,
is at present in this locality, and I have been able to get the details
of the story referred to.
“Sherman is trapping on the Hayes River, about 150 miles
north of Oxford House Post. He was travelling north one day
early in November ... and saw about 14 or 15 wolves making
for the point on which he stood. When they got to within 75
yards of him, he fired and brought down the leader. By the time
they got out of sight, he had killed five.... They were all full
grown, and all males. The wolves were not dangerous, but made
for safety, as soon as they got over the surprise of the first shot.
The wind was in the wrong direction for the wolves to get the
scent of Sherman.
“I can vouch for the above story being correct....”
This, then, is a remarkable story. The reader will find
several things in which it contradicts, or seems to contradict,
Nelson, Buturlin, and Anderson in so far as he was quoted
(above) by Nelson. It fits badly with the rest of our evidence
but is nevertheless impressively vouched for.
Information similarly difficult came in an undated letter
July, 1927, from Fred B. Kniffen of the Department of
Geography, University of California, Berkeley:
“... I have seen two wolf-packs.
“I had occasion to spend the winter of 1923-24 prospecting in
the upper Tanana region of Alaska. I hunted considerably as caribou
meat furnished an appreciable part of my diet and almost all
of that of my dogs. One afternoon I was seated on a little hill
about a quarter of a mile from a small lake. Through the natural
pass below me the caribou had been passing at the rate of several
hundred a day. As I watched, a file of wolves emerged from some
brush on the opposite side of the lake, skirted the shore and went
off in the direction the caribou were going. They seemed to be
running roughly in a column of twos and I counted about
twenty-eight in the pack.
“One night I was awakened by the howls of my dogs responding
to those of some wolves. I stood in the doorway of my cabin
and a little later could distinguish the forms of five wolves against
the snow of the river, perhaps seventy-five yards away. The dogs
were now growling, apparently in fear. One shot dispersed the
wolves....
“These events all occurred in late winter. It is quite possible that
an old she wolf and her pups may have accounted for a large part
of this but the large pack could hardly be explained away in this
fashion.”
Kniffen himself suggests a family explanation for his second
pack. On July 14 I suggested in a letter to him that
possibly the first set were not a pack, either,—in the sense
of having banded together for cooperative hunting. I said
that: “The wolves you saw following each other, though
there were twenty-eight, were (then) no more necessarily a
pack than eleven college men walking towards an athletic
field are necessarily the college team.”
The well-known and highly-regarded student of Canadian
wild life, Tony Lascelles, wrote for the Winnipeg Free Press
of April 25, 1936, an article, “The Mammals of Manitoba.”
A paragraph in it can be read as supporting the traditional
wolf-pack—I did not so read it but thought others might.
But Lascelles writes from Mistamick Lodge, Dauphin, Manitoba,
May 15, 1936, with reference to his use of the key word,
that “the pack is a family group and the maximum pack is
a maximum family.”
With this we close the section of our discussion which is
written for those who like to believe that even the seemingly
most absurd folklore tale has developed from a nucleus of
fact.
WOLVES AND BABES
The misanthropy of wolves, dramatic in their pursuit of
wedding parties and in the siege of stalled trains, is particularly
horrible toward little children. They eat them all up,
rather jocularly in Red Riding Hood, grimly in our newspapers.
See, for instance, the tragic story “Copyright, 1928,
by the New York Times Company. By Wireless to The New
York Times:
“RIGA, Jan. 1.—A woman of the Unciany district of Lithuania,
riding with a child in a one-horse sleigh and pursued by a
pack of wolves, made a desperate effort to escape, but after a
short, sharp race the horse collapsed.
“The wolves tore the child from its mother’s arms, devoured it,
and then fell on the mother. Some peasants, hearing her cries,
hurried to the scene and rescued her, torn but still alive.
“As a result of the severe weather the depredations by wolves
in many parts of Russia are unusually alarming. The Soviet
authorities are carrying out an organized campaign against the
danger by offering rewards for wolves’ heads. In some districts
detachments of the Red Army are used.
“Packs of wolves have appeared in many parts usually immune,
especially in the Crimea.”
Reporters naturally have time for cabling such stories but
ministers at Washington and consuls-general in New York,
though frequently kind and helpful, are at times so buried
in humdrum that you cannot get them interested. I failed in
tracing this despatch from Riga. Therefore we can but deal
in likelihoods and refer to the Michigan story of February 3,
1927, reported ante—it was nearer home and so we were able
to enlist the help of local investigators.
We are reluctant to pursue further this gruesome child-eating.
The case against the wolf in this respect is indeed
black enough, what with the inclusion of many babes among
the people devoured already in this chapter by the ravenous
hordes. We turn with relief to a brighter side of the case.
In warm contrast are the maternally kind and otherwise
friendly wolves that have nursed and cared for children,
sometimes even twins, as in the case of Romulus and Remus.
In our present century there is never a decade, there is seldom
a year, when newspapers do not bring us well-attested
cases.
Through the Associated Press the New York Times
reported October 22, 1926 (from London, October 21):
“Two little ‘wolf girls’ were found recently living in a wolf’s
den near an isolated village in Bengal, British India. The story
is told by The Westminster Gazette, which received it from India,
vouched for by the Rev. Jal Singh of Midnapur, Bengal, and
Bishop Pakenham Walsh of Bishops College, Calcutta.
“Bishop Walsh relates that about the end of August, while
visiting the Rev. Jal Singh’s orphanage at Midnapur, Mr. Singh
recounted how he discovered the ‘wolf girls.’
“In a distant part of his district not long before, the villagers
pointed out to him a path they avoided because it was haunted by
demons. Investigation revealed a wolf den in which there were
several wolf cubs and two girls, about two and eight years of age,
both exceedingly fierce, running on all fours, uttering guttural
barks and living like wolves.
“The supposition was that they were abandoned as babies by
their mother or mothers and were found and adopted by the she
wolf. With much difficulty, the children were rescued, but the
younger died soon afterward.
“The elder child survived and is now at the orphanage. She
was gradually weaned from her savage ways, but she fought
fiercely against wearing clothes, and tore them off even after they
were sewn on her. For a time she refused to be washed and ate
with her mouth in a dish. Eventually she was taught to use her
hands and say a few words.
“She still is weak mentally and neither cries nor laughs, but is
gentle with animals, preferring the company of dogs to children.”
Sir Sidney Harmer, British student of wolves, wrote November
15, 1926, that the Westminster Gazette had told him
they knew the bishop of the story existed and believed the
wolf children also were real. Sir Sidney closed:
“I have myself no information on the subject, and I do not
know of anyone else who could help you. We are inclined to be
a little sceptical.”
I never did get farther with the investigation of this
particular case.
Reports that were traced, though not by me, appeared
several times the next year. The first, “Copyright, 1927, by
The New York Times Company—Special Cable to the New
York Times, Allahabad, British India, April 5,” said that:
“Herdsmen near Miawana, seventy-five miles from here, found
a small Indian boy supposed to be about 10 years of age, in a
wolf’s den. From marks in the den it was obvious that the boy
had been living there. He was unable to talk or to walk properly,
but went on all fours, lapped water and ate grass.
“The boy was brought here, put in a special lockup and supplied
with food and medicine. At night he barked, bit himself
and other people and had to be tied down. He is very thin and
emaciated, but his limbs are otherwise well formed. He has a
terrible scar on one side of his face, as if he had been mauled by
some animal.
“He has been taken to Bareilly for treatment at a mental
hospital.”
The Times furnished a supplementary note:
“This is the third case of Rudyard Kipling’s ‘Jungle Book’
hero, Mowgli, in real life which has been discovered in India
within the last ten months. Last September Bishop Walsh wrote
to the Indian Social Reformer of Bombay of the case of two little
girls who had been found by the Rev. J. Singh in a wolf’s den
near Bengal. They revealed the same characteristics as the boy
described in the Allahabad dispatch. One of them soon pined
away and died, but the other rapidly became ‘humanized’ in
Singh’s orphanage at Midnapur. It was supposed that the girls,
as is sometimes the case in India, had been abandoned in the
jungle by their parents on account of their sex and had been
mothered by a she wolf which had just been deprived of her
young.
“The same explanation would not account for the presence of
the boy in a wolf’s den near Miawana.”
Further news, similarly special and copyrighted, came by
wireless from London and was published April 27:
“Further information is now available about the so-called ‘wolf-child’
whose discovery near Miawana, British India, seventy-five
miles from Allahabad, provoked so much discussion. Some travelers
tell of similar discoveries extending back many years, but
medical authorities are inclined to dismiss them as fables.
“The boy found in Miawana is judged to be between 7 and 12
years old and in general appearance is said to be little different
from an ordinary child, but in his actions betrays signs that are
declared to point to his bringing up with wolves. He can stand up
and walk, but sometimes prefers to crawl, sitting on his haunches
with legs curled up and propelling himself forward with the
palms of hands....
“He is said to display certain instincts even lower than those
of his alleged foster parents....”
On July 10, a long, undated communication marked “London,”
said that:
“News of the discovery of another alleged wolf-child in India
has started a brisk controversy here over the authenticity of such
children. No previous wolf-child has occasioned so much stir
in scientific quarters as has the boy discovered by Indian herdsmen
a few weeks ago in a wolves’ cave near Miawana, seventy-five
miles from Allahabad.
“Some of the best known medical men in London have called
the story incredible. Old Indian army officers have replied by
asserting that they have actually seen wolf-children....”
whereupon the Times devotes more than a column to a
statement generally in support of the India despatches.
Among those in favor is:
“Rudyard Kipling, whose Mowgli of the ‘Jungle Book’ is the
best known wolf-child in fiction, has for once withdrawn his veto
on newspaper interviews, and is quoted as saying that wolf-children
‘are by no means impossible.’ The author goes on to say:
“‘There have been other instances of them. They say that the
Miawana boy crawls on the hands and knees: I think it much
more likely that it would be the knees and elbows. That was the
way of the other children who, like Mowgli, were adopted by
wolves and knew all the mysteries of the jungle. That way leaves
their hands free to seize their prey and to defend themselves.’”
This long article, dealing with many cases of wolf-children,
says that:
“... the one commonly known as the Secundra wolf-boy, is
the best authenticated case within the memory of living man.
This boy was captured in 1867 by a shooting expedition in the
unfrequented jungles of Bulandshahr. The hunters surprised a
stray wolf, which they followed to a small mound of earth with a
flat-topped rock sticking out of the mound. A small, strange-looking
animal was asleep in the sun on the rock. To the amazement
of the hunting party, it proved to be a boy, who leaped from
the rock as soon as he saw the hunters and, running on all fours,
disappeared into a cave along with the startled wolf.
“The hunters were either unable or afraid to go further; but,
feeling that something ought to be done, they returned to Bulandshahr
and consulted the Magistrate. They were advised to go
back to the cave and smoke out the wolf and its weird companion.
This they did. The wolf was shot as soon as it rushed out
and its companion was pounced upon and captured after a severe
struggle, during which several members of the party were bitten.
Two wolf cubs were also killed and the party returned to the
Magistrate to claim a reward for the dead wolf and the dead cubs,
and to exhibit the human being they had captured.
“The wolf bounty was paid and the wolf-boy was sent to the
Secundra Orphanage. He was thought to be about 7 or 8 years
old. For a long time he tore off the clothes that were supplied him
and persisted in eating his food from the ground. As the years
went by he became more docile and eventually was baptized,
taking the name of Sanicher, which is Hindustani for Saturday,
the day on which he was captured. His head was small, his forehead
low and narrow; his eyes were large and gray and restless.
He squinted incessantly and when walking lifted his feet high
like a man walking through wet grass, his entire body moving
in a series of jerks as he stepped along.”
Interest, sympathy, resentment were among the feelings
commonly expressed by those who wrote “Letters to the
Editor” during the outstanding wolf-child year of 1927. An
undated cutting from the New York Times, probably around
July 15 or 20, has a letter from Jacqueline Nollet:
“Have men for ‘humanity’s sake’ the right to take this Miawana
boy away from his mother-wolf and from his brotherly playmates,
from the jungle’s new and enthralling life, and to condemn him
instead to an existence devoid of companionship and a life of
utter misery...?
“Since the wolf-man is no longer free to pursue his own mode
of living and is considered as a near-animal, could not the Society
for the Prevention of Cruelty to Animals interfere and have a law
voted to the effect that a child saved from starvation, loved and
protected by the wolves against ferocious beasts, might be left to
live with his wolf family? And if the boy must be taken away
from the wild, could not man take a lesson and be as merciful
as a wolf and spare the life of the foster-mother and her cubs?
“Let us hope never to see repeated the act of the magistrate
of Bulandshahr who planned and rewarded the murder of the
wolf family of the Sanicher boy....”
The scientists were more hard-boiled. For instance, Herman
B. Sheffield, M.D., of New York City, wrote July 10,
evidently fresh from reading the long historical summary in
the Times of that date:
“Judging by the article on the ‘New Wolf Child Found in
India,’ I surmise that there are still a large number of civilized
people, including scientists, who seriously believe that ‘wolf-children’
exist in reality instead of in fiction. As a matter of fact,
such ‘wolf-children’ are frequently met in daily practice and are
nothing but microcephalic idiots.
“These children are born with small, often dome-shaped, heads
in consequence of undeveloped, small brains. Owing to their
extreme restlessness and awkward power of locomotion, their
habit to hop from place to place often resembles that of a rabbit,
goat or monkey.”
As the Times reported, there was keen interest in London.
The Over-Seas League was naturally concerned and published
in their journal Over Seas a statement by “A Member”
which says that:
“Valentine Ball (previously quoted) mentions that he asked an
eminent surgeon of his day what he thought of all these stories,
and the reply was, ‘I don’t believe any of them.’ The medical
profession of to-day seems to share this lack of conviction....
“No one, apparently, has ever found a child living in an animal’s
lair and left it there, returning from time to time to observe
how it was progressing and to find out how it was fed. There is
no trustworthy evidence to show that the children so far reported
as wolf-children have ever survived for more than a few hours
or days away from human care before they were discovered and
restored to such care. There is no recorded case which could not
be explained on the theory that the child had wandered from
home or been abandoned within a day or two of its being rescued,
and it is a well-known fact that Indian mothers will sometimes
‘lose’ in the jungle mentally defective children, which goes far to
account for the imbecility of all so-called wolf-children....
“All the stories of alleged wolf-children rest on native evidence,
and native evidence is by no means always to be relied upon as
faithful records of fact. The world of reality has its limits. The
world of imagination, especially of Eastern imagination, is boundless.”
Somewhere in the reports on most children nurtured by
wolves there is comment that, even after they had been
taught by their human captors to eat meat, they continued
fond of roots, and even of grass. Is it possible, then, that the
wolves which bring up children are of a kindlier disposition
than ordinary wolves for the reason that they are
vegetarians?
WOLVES FOR POSTERITY
As said at the beginning of this chapter on wolves, we
write for every shade of belief. This last section is for a group
first in our thoughts, because largest—the lovers of romance,
the enemies of the cant of science, the vast multitude of free
believers in the freedom to believe.
True, the attacks on the wolf-pack are numerous. But what
do they amount to? They are not campaigns by great armies,
they are at most guerrilla warfare. More accurately, they are
sniping.
For example, the chief of a biological survey writes letters
to a friend of his, poohpoohing wolf-pack stories, and the
friend perhaps shows them around a bit. Not half of the few
who see the letters will be affected—everybody knows what
scientists are, a self-elected Brain Trust dictating to all of us
as to what we may and may not believe. If the letter is shown
in any place like a smoking room, it is talked down by
several who know people who know other people who have
been treed, pursued, or at the very least scared half to death
by immense packs of wolves.
Or a pack story in the newspapers gets a large head on
the front page; the denial comes a week later in small type
on an inside page where no one reads it. Again the pack
triumphs.
The disgruntled may have for a time the active support
of a news-gathering organization, as above mentioned for
the Associated Press, but the most they can do is to caution
their own direct employees to be careful. They may not dictate
to their affiliates, as, for instance, the Associated Press
trying to dictate to the Canadian Press or to Reuter’s. Besides,
they could not hold their own as purveyors of readable news
if they left to rivals the wolf-children of India, the sieges of
trains by wolf-packs in the Balkans, or that increase of
wolves in the U.S.S.R. which (everybody at that time
agreed) resulted from the substitution of communism for
capitalism.
You may manage, perhaps, to get printed a diatribe against
packs in a highbrow journal, as I once did in the American
Mercury. But you cannot make new disbelievers in wolf-packs
by addressing the readers of such a magazine, for the
badge of their sophistication is that they are disbelievers
already in whatever the rest of the world believes. If you ever
made nearly everybody sceptical on wolf-packs the Mercury
clientele would start believing in them—which is, of course,
a digression.
We shall close this chapter with a triumphant, because
sufficient, proof that wolf-packs are a reality. To accomplish
this we use the democratic method, adjudication by majority
vote.
We shall have support for wolf-packs from that most
popular appeal to the people, our greatest of weeklies, the
Saturday Evening Post, with its millions of sold copies and
no doubt several readers per copy. We shall have on our
side, too, the most orthodox and the broadest appeal to the
scientists, which is through the American Association for the
Advancement of Science and through their kind of affiliate
Science Service. They do not have so large a membership as
that of the Post, but it is effective since it overlaps but slightly
the circle of the Post’s readers. The members of the Association
include most professors and other teachers of science
in our various schools and colleges, most scientists in the
employ of commercial companies (at least those in the
higher brackets), and most of those employed by the national,
state, and other governments. Their official journal,
Science, goes to every library of consequence in the United
States, and widely through other countries. Science is read
for excerpts and for ideas on behalf of newspapers and magazines.
Then a great many of the papers subscribe to Science
Service, and even use it.
If we can show that the Post and Science (including
Science Service) are on the side of the wolf-pack, we have
it winning hands down.
On January 9, 1932, C. B. Ruggles had in the Post an
article, “Neighboring With Wolves.” We are told, or given
to understand, in this and other of his Post contributions,
that Ruggles yields to few in the extensiveness and intensiveness
of his northern lore. He has not merely been in Alaska;
he has actually lived there. He must have been way up north,
for he tells about the sun that “it would, for one hour and
fifteen minutes, skirt the earth’s rim before sinking below
the horizon for another twenty-odd hours of opaque-lidded
slumber.” We have been told a little earlier about a Light of
Delusion—“The Eskimos call this kind of light Woosha
Kua”—which plays strange tricks with your eyesight. Still,
apparently, it was not, in the Ruggles judgment, due to the
Woosha Kua that he saw wolves pursuing caribou in great
detail and that “There were twenty-seven wolves in the
pack.”
About this time I happened to give a talk before a small
group at the University Museum, Philadelphia. I must have
said something about wolf-packs and the Director, Dr.
Horace H. F. Jayne, must have given my address to Max C.
Goodman, of 3143 West Diamond Street, Philadelphia, who
in turn must have written to C. B. Ruggles, at Freedom,
Oklahoma, telling that Ruggles and I seemed in disagreement
on wolf-packs. These things are inference, for there
is a gap in my records. I have, however, a copy of a letter
from Ruggles, dated January 19, 1932, sent me by Goodman,
which runs in part:
“Nature causes wolves to gather in monstrous packs in all parts
of the wilderness the last part of December or the first part of
January. Eskimos call these large wolf-gatherings, ‘KA-MA-CHUA’
(Mate choosing season) for this is about four or five
weeks prior to wolf mating time and the Eskimos as well as the
Northern trapper believe nature has brought these gatherings
about for the young and unmated wolves to choose their mates,
believed for life.
“I am writing you the above for the sole purpose of you taking
it up with the greatest and most noted naturalist that you might
find. If you should find that Mr. V. Steffenson’s statement is
false, kindly investigate other positive statements that he has
made regarding the Arctic....
“I hope to hear from you again and in regard to the results of
your investigation of my statement as well as the investigation
of the statement of V. Steffenson.”
Goodman was to submit the Ruggles statement and mine
about wolves to “the greatest and most noted naturalist that
you might find.” So I wrote Goodman on January 25 a letter
in about 90 per cent disagreement with Ruggles and taking
substantially that position contrary to his which is stated
in the first section of the present chapter. Goodman submitted
this letter and the Ruggles one, which we quoted
just above, to the often-mentioned Chief of the U. S. Biological
Survey, Dr. E. W. Nelson. Nelson wrote Goodman
from the Hotel Johnson, Visalia, California, February 10.
Again we quote in part:
“Your letter came to me just as I was preparing to leave Washington
for California—hence, the delay in my reply.
“I have been interested by the letters from Ruggles and Stefansson
and am in complete accord with the statements in Stefansson’s
letter. Mr. Ruggles appears to be imbued with the old folklore
idea about huge packs of wolves roaming wild regions of the
North.
“In common with most people, as a young man, I had the same
ideas derived from the commonly published misstatements on the
subject. Then for more than twenty years as a field naturalist,
much of the time in wolf country and later for more than that
length of time administrating the field work of other naturalists
and hunters in wolf country, I came to a definite knowledge that
the typical wolf-pack consists of the two old wolves and their
young of the previous spring. These ‘packs’ may number from
three to more than a dozen animals, according to the number of
survivors of the litter of young. Sometimes a wolf may have a
dozen young. There is no doubt that, by chance, two or perhaps
more litters might come together, but such association would be
extremely brief. I have never known or had definite information
of such an instance and it is given as a mere possibility.
“For many years, the Biological Survey in Washington investigated
every published account of devastations and of the killing
of people by wolf-packs in the United States and Canada by
writing to the postmaster or others living near the scene of the
alleged work of wolf-packs and without a single exception, they
proved to be purely imaginary.
“Under my direction, one of the best field naturalists in the
Government Service spent more than a year in the Tanana River
country of Alaska in the very district where Alaska papers published
accounts of great wolf-packs destroying caribou and although
he traversed that country in various directions in winter,
he saw only occasional wolf tracks in the snow and never a sign
of the alleged packs....
“My information is from my own observations and from hundreds
of other reliable men in the field in wolf country.”
Once more there is, superficially, a defeat of the wolf-pack.
Really the pack won, for the Post is read by several
million people of the type who believe what they see in
that sort of publication, while the quadrangular Goodman-Nelson-Ruggles-Stefansson
correspondence could have had
an effect upon only one of the four. Ruggles knew already
there were packs, so we could not convince him there
weren’t. Nelson and I knew there weren’t any, so Ruggles
could not convince us there were. Goodman remained the
only one who may have been affected, and he may have
swung either way. I believe Dr. Jayne saw the correspondence,
but from his record I think he was likely enough
prejudiced already against the pack. Perhaps a dozen or two
of Goodman’s friends saw the correspondence, and perhaps
some of them were influenced. If so, they may have gone
in either direction. Therefore, the balloting, Post readers
against some of the letter readers, must have gone something
like a million to one in favor of the pack.
The authenticity of the wolf-pack might have been secure
for years on the strength of just the one Ruggles article in
the Saturday Evening Post. But they have carried more articles
by Ruggles, and may have carried further eyewitness
testimony. Then certainly there are many journals, only a
little down from the Post in their sway of the public mind
which have borne witness. Packs are going strong in the
movies and, as shown heretofore, they appear frequently in
the daily press. The general verdict is, therefore, clear.
But we said above that we would range scientists with the
true believers. This we do by referring to the previously
described journal Science, from which we quote in part an
item that appeared in the issue of February 28, 1936:
“Wolf fighters, skilled in warfare against these voracious pack-hunting
beasts, are asked for in an emergency wire from Governor
John W. Troy, of Alaska, recently received at the Department
of the Interior.... Vicious gangs of wolves have been
raiding the reindeer herds owned by natives of northern Alaska....
Native hunters have proved unable to cope with the animals,
but it is believed that about four hunter leaders, each with a few
assistants, could in a swift campaign break up the marauding
bands.”
Thus we have the official journal of a foremost scientific
body vouching for wolves as pack-hunters, as being in gangs
and in bands.
But a testimony from Canada is in a way more striking
than any can be from the United States, for wolves are by
common consent more numerous and widespread there. As
in the United States, the Canadian Government takes special
cognizance of them, for they prey on flock and fowl. There
is, then, Bulletin No. 13, New Series, Dominion of Canada,
Department of Agriculture, “The Habits and Economic
Importance of Wolves in Canada,” by Norman Criddle. On
p. 6 we read:
“Parent wolves live in pairs during the summer months, but
as the young develop they form with them small bands, which
meeting with other families in their wanderings, acquire the proportions
of packs. These packs break up again in February....”
We close our case by repeating and insisting that attacks
on wolf-packs are not serious—they are no more than sporadic
sniping.
The Saturday Evening Post, Science Service, and the Department
of Agriculture of the Dominion of Canada, powerful
and worthy of all respect and confidence, are in this
relation spokesmen too for a popular and a scientific multitude.
The wolf-pack, then, is secure even as things stand. But
conditions are bound to trend steadily in their favor. As
living beasts, wolves are getting fewer with the colonization
of the wilderness, but wolf-pack stories do not thereby get
fewer—witness how they come again and again from districts
where wolves no longer exist. The fewer the living
wolves the less the chance of their being so studied that
evidence against the pack habit can be gathered. Finally
there will be no wolves left, except in zoos. The belief in
packs will have survived the means of refuting it. It will
have become a truth.
CHAPTER VI.
Beyond the Frontier
THE FOLLOWING CHAPTER WAS ORIGINALLY A SERIOUS COMPLAINT
against the schoolbooks of Canada, but, in the light
of more mature thinking along the lines of standardization,
it appears to us now that the points we have made against
the textbooks are really points in their favor. We have established
(Chapter I.) that the standardization of error would
simplify our thinking, thus making life easier and, to that
extent, better. We must commend Canada for her pioneer
work in our theory, especially when, as we readily perceive,
it is done at the expense of her own development, therefore
in a spirit of true self-sacrifice.
The lower schoolbooks we shall quote in this statement,
for contrast with university teaching, are: Ontario Public
School Geography, authorized for use in the public schools
of Ontario; The Teacher’s Manual, authorized for use of
teachers in Ontario; Public School Geography, authorized
for use in the public schools of Alberta; Manual of Geography,
I, authorized for use of teachers and high school
students of Alberta; Dent’s Canadian Geography Readers,
Book II, optional or supplementary reading in several provinces;
The Canadian School Geography, authorized for use
in the public schools of British Columbia, Manitoba, Nova
Scotia, Quebec and Saskatchewan; Canadian Readers, authorized
for use in the public schools of Manitoba, Saskatchewan,
Alberta and British Columbia. Most of these books are
dated 1928 or 1929. All of them were bought from displays
for the present school season.
The observed temperatures about to be quoted in this
article for contrast with the textbooks are, unless otherwise
stated, taken from the records of the Dominion Meteorological
Service. Some of the other facts used are from
Government reports; most of the rest are from my own
observation through ten winters and thirteen summers spent
in the Arctic, during which I traveled there afoot about
20,000 miles—a good opportunity to see conditions as they
are.
Studying the books purchased, I found that practically
all of the geographies were still holding to the ancient Greek
philosophical view that the farther north you go the colder
it is, no matter what the time of year. One book expresses it,
“The temperature steadily decreases from the Equator to the
Poles,” and the others have the same idea worded differently.
The climate of the North is “especially unfavorable for both
plants and animals.” In the Arctic “terrible blizzards often
rage for days together.”
Postponing our discussion of the more important season
of summer, what are the facts about the Canadian winter?
One is that children in certain wheat-raising sections of
Alberta, who probably shudder with sympathy for the poor
Eskimos, are themselves living in a region that has minimum
winter periods colder than any Eskimo is known to have
lived through. Few Eskimos have ever seen sixty below zero.
The probable lowest temperature for the North Pole itself
is twenty degrees warmer, say fifty-eight or sixty below. The
lowest temperature recorded on the north coast of Canada is
fifty-two below. But we have the following minima from
the southern third of Canada: Quebec, sixty-three below;
Ontario, sixty below; Manitoba, sixty-three below; Saskatchewan,
seventy below; Alberta, seventy-eight below.
There is probably, then, no Eskimo living who has felt a
temperature as low as thousands of our children face going
to school in prosperous communities of southern Canada. If
there are Eskimos who have felt cold equal to that of some
of our farming communities, they belong to tribes that winter
inland, well to the south of the coast dwellers.
As to blizzards and snowfall: excluding the Atlantic and
Pacific coasts, the line of heaviest snowfall in Canada is
approximately at the Canada-United States border. Storms
are, on the average, fewer and milder in the Arctic than in
any other equally large area on earth, as the great explorer,
Nansen, pointed out more than thirty years ago. It is for
these reasons among others that trans-Arctic flying is steadily
pushing to the front as the practical solution of commerce
by air between the Old World and the New.
However, from the strictly economic point of view, it
makes little difference what we teach in the schools about
the winter temperatures of Canada. Mining, for instance,
can be carried forward in any climate, for among the successful
coal mines are those of Alabama, 1,000 miles south of
Winnipeg, and those of Spitsbergen, 2,000 miles north of
Winnipeg. In factory work the expenditure for fuel varies
and is an important charge against operation, but still there
are great industrial centers developing all the way from
Birmingham to Montreal.
Blizzards are perhaps unpleasant. I have met in the Arctic
numbers of Royal Canadian Mounted Police who had been
stationed at Regina, in southern Saskatchewan, not so far
from the United States border, and I don’t remember finding
one who did not think Regina blizzards as bad as any
they had seen on the north coast of Canada. Yet Regina is
considered one of the fine Canadian cities and its chief handicap
of late years has been not the cold nor blizzards of
winter—it has been the dryness of the hot summers. July
temperatures are frequently higher in that part of Saskatchewan
than in the Miami part of Florida.
Cold may distress you, but Montreal is larger than New
Orleans. Of the two Red River valleys, the one in Louisiana
is warmer, but the one in Manitoba is better for wheat. Winnipeg,
which handles more wheat than any city in the world,
has an average temperature for the year that is just at the
freezing point—thirty-two F.
Winter temperatures, then, have little effect upon the prosperity
of lands or the growth of cities, nor do blizzards
signify. It is the summer temperatures that matter, and the
length of the summer, for upon them depend the economic
vegetations that give food to the people and feed to grazing
animals.
The greatest economic damage to Canada that is wrought
by the public schools is, therefore, in describing incorrectly
its northern summers. For the schools teach as a principle
that the farther north you go the colder the summers become.
They do further harm by misrepresenting not only
the summer temperatures of Arctic and sub-Arctic Canada
but also the length of the growing season.
As to the heat and length of the northern summer, and
some of their direct results, the textbooks approved by various
provinces teach the following things among others: “In
northern Canada and northern Alaska ... during the short
summer the very slanting sunlight is unable to raise the
temperature much above the freezing point,” says a geography
approved by several provinces. “There is no warm season
(in the Arctic),” is how we are told the same thing in
a manual of geography authorized by a department of education
for the guidance of teachers, and printed not by a
commercial house, but by a King’s Printer. Every province
has some officially approved textbook that states or implies
that hot weather—eighty to ninety degrees in the shade—does
not occur in the Arctic at all, and that it occurs rarely
even in those parts of the Northwest Territories that lie
between the Arctic Circle and Edmonton—which is just
south of 54° and corresponds to Leeds in England, Copenhagen
in Denmark, and Moscow in Russia.
This would be sad if true. But the summer temperatures
in the Mackenzie district of the Northwest Territories hard
up against the Arctic Circle really go to ninety-six degrees,
while the highest for Prince Edward Island, in southeastern
Canada, is only ninety-two. The highest temperature recorded
since 1900 in Winnipeg is one hundred degrees and
the same temperature has been recorded in Alaska by the
United States Weather Bureau at Fort Yukon, north of the
Arctic Circle. Temperatures ranging from eighty to ninety
degrees are common both in the Canadian and Alaskan
Arctic.
Some of the lower school geographies give the real facts
of Arctic summer temperatures, but do not correlate them
so as to enable an ordinary student to realize that what the
textbook says elsewhere about the summer never being warm
must be incorrect. The texts state, for instance, that in midsummer
the sun delivers about half as much heat per hour
in the Arctic as it does at the equator. Elsewhere they mention
that the Arctic day is twenty-four hours long and the
equatorial day only twelve hours long. What they do not
draw attention to, thus failing to enlighten the careless
reader, is that there is no difference between the result of
half the heat-delivery for double the time and double the
heat-delivery for half the time.
It is just because half the heat for double the time is as
good as double the heat for half the time that you expect,
and do get, tropical heat in those north polar lowlands (and
they are extensive) where sea breezes do not seriously
interfere.
Having described the climate in such unfriendly terms,
perhaps it is consistency that impels the Canadian textbooks
to make the vegetation correspond with it. “Much of this
vast area,” says one, “is a treeless wilderness of rock and
swamp, covered with mosses and lichens which provide food
for the caribou and musk ox.” “In the extreme north,” says
another, “(there is) a cold desert where, however, vegetation
is not entirely wanting; for in the marshes in summer the
ground becomes covered with reindeer moss on which the
caribou and musk oxen feed.” “Why cannot trees grow
there?” asks a third, to which the general textbook reply is
that the winters are too cold for them. A reading selection
continues the work of the geographies with, “In that land
there is little but ice and snow.”
But what are the facts? One is that inside the Arctic
Circle mosses and lichens are not so prevalent as they are
inside the textbook covers. By tonnage they comprise less
than ten per cent of the vegetation. The other ninety per
cent is represented by flowering plants. In all my Arctic
experience I have never found a region where mosses and
lichens prevailed over the flowering plants. I had to visit a
section near Churchill, Manitoba, 600 miles south of the
Arctic Circle, to see that sort of country.
What about trees? A hundred miles north of the Arctic
Circle in Canada the Forestry Branch of the Department of
the Interior has reported trees seventy feet high, straight,
and fourteen inches through. Similar trees go at least twice
that height beyond the Circle in Siberia. Moreover, the textbooks
imply in most cases, and specify in one, that winter
cold limits the growth of trees; but the coldest known spot
north of the equator—Verkhoyansk, in the Yakutsk Province
of Siberia—has a dense forest of both evergreen and
deciduous trees, although the recorded temperatures go
down to ninety-three degrees below zero.[16] The Prairie Provinces
which have approved this book are themselves in part
treeless. Would they appreciate the intimation that this is
because of the cold? And if so, how can they reconcile the
teaching of their schools with the fact that the largest treeless
sections of the Prairie Provinces themselves are in their
southern parts, the largest forests in the northern?
The Canadian textbook allegation that in the Arctic “there
is little but ice and snow” conveys to the child among other
things the idea that there is a heavy snowfall. Instead, the
snowfall, as previously mentioned, is heavier in the most
southerly hundred miles of Canada than in the most northerly
hundred. Or again, the pupil may think the statement
means that in July and August there is more snow or ice
on the ground in the North. But the fact is that British
Columbia has ten times as much snow in July (permanent
snow) as the whole of the much larger section of our continent
designated the Northwest Territories. The part of
Alaska which lies in the temperate zone has a hundred times
as much permanent snow as there is in the Arctic section
of Alaska. In the south Alaska mountains the snow line
comes down to sea level; in the north Alaska mountains it
is 4,000 to 6,000 feet above the sea.
Lest the child may think that the desolation and worthlessness
are largely confined to the Arctic Circle proper, a
fifth-year Canadian reader instructs him in part as follows:
“Long before the treeless wastes are reached, the forest ceases
to be forest except by courtesy.... On the shores of Great
Bear Lake—which is, of course, in the Temperate Zone—four
centuries are necessary for the growth of a trunk not so
thick as a man’s wrist.... Still farther north the trees become
mere stunted stems set with blighted buds that have never
been able to develop themselves into branches; until, finally,
the last vestiges of arboreal growth take refuge under a thick
carpet of lichens and mosses, the characteristic vegetation
of the Barren Grounds.”
The textbook editor borrows this heartening description,
and much other cheerful information about Canadian resources
and climate, from a book entitled, humorously
enough, Greater Canada. If a country thus described be indeed
a “Greater Canada,” then we wonder what those may
believe who are really pessimistic.
Against this “Greater Canada” view let us set the facts,
uncontested by those who have lived on Great Bear Lake
and have traversed the forest north of it to where it meets
the Arctic prairie. Instead of being no bigger around than
your wrist, the larger trees on Bear Lake are a foot and a
half through, and a hundred feet high. There is no such
gradual diminution in size as the author makes out. We have
already mentioned, for instance, the Forestry Service report
which describes trees seventy feet high a hundred miles
north of Great Bear Lake and within five miles of the beginning
of the Arctic prairie. Again there is Big Stick Island,
northeast of Great Bear Lake, a clump really beyond the tree
line. It is only a few acres, and yet the trees are a foot
through, tall and straight.
I have come in from the Arctic prairie to the northernmost
forest at various points on the thousand-mile front
ranging from the Colville to the Coppermine, and I have
never seen the peculiar trees of Greater Canada with
“blighted buds that have never been able to develop themselves
into branches.” Once, for instance, when I discovered
trees just a few miles inland from Franklin Bay in a section
where I did not expect them, I entered in my diary the
unusually (for me) poetic description that I had seen “a
little band of Christmas trees climbing the hillside.” They
were of such proportions as to branch and stem that they
would have been saleable at Yuletide in any of our cities.
We have commented before on the textbook idea that
the chief vegetation of the Arctic, or even of the “Barren
Grounds,” is mosses and lichens. Here we comment rather
on the name itself—Barren Grounds. According to a bulletin
of the Department of the Interior, the epithet “Barren
Grounds” was originally applied to the prairie districts between
Winnipeg and Calgary. When growing knowledge
showed how absurd the name was for that section, it was
not abolished as it should have been, but was, so to speak,
lifted up and transported from the southern prairies across
the northern forest to the northern prairies and there set
down to do its part in holding back the development of the
North as it already had held back for awhile the development
of the West.
I was born and brought up in that West which was originally
called “Barren Grounds,” and have often said that had
I been transferred in my boyhood by magic from the prairies,
across which I used to ride as a cowboy, to the prairies of
Banks Island, 200 miles north of the north coast of Canada,
I should have known on waking up that I was not in my
home district, but I could not have decided offhand that I
was not somewhere in northern North Dakota or southern
Saskatchewan. Dropping on my knees and playing Sherlock
Holmes, I could have decided by careful study of the vegetation
and soil that I was in a strange place, but looking off to
the sky line I should have felt at home. There would have
been the same rolling prairie, with perhaps somewhat less
grass but with a great many more flowers. Had it been
winter there would have been snow on the ground in both
places, but less in Banks Island than in Saskatchewan.
With such experience of the trees, grasses and flowers of
southern and of northern Canada, it is easier for me to read
the lower school textbooks as works of humor than of sober
instruction. But children take them seriously, and it is difficult
to look upon the results as merely funny.
The ground frost of northern Canada is made a handicap
in the textbooks. But in real life as often as not it is useful.
“Fields of ice and snow and a permanently frozen subsoil
effectively limit man’s movements in the Arctic ... regions,”
says one of them, and that is a just sample of what most of
them say or imply.
The first advantage of frozen subsoil is that there can be
no dry season. The growers of cereals and vegetables now
count on that in Alaska. So do the reindeer ranchers. For if
the season has less rain than usual it means only that the
ground will thaw deeper than usual, and the roots of the
plants will reach farther down for their water. The only
thing the rancher has to guard against is the trampling out
of the forage vegetation by the animals, just as he would if
he were an Australian sheep farmer. So far as dry seasons
are concerned, he can graze the same numbers on a given
ranch for any period of years, a thing the Australian cannot
do, for his feed varies with the rains.
A second advantage, less important, but spectacular and
about to come much into public view, bears upon flying. For
where there is a frozen subsoil there is no underground
drainage, and rain and thaw waters stay where they fall.
This creates innumerable lakes all over the country, providing
flyers with natural landing fields for pontoons in summer
and skis in winter. That is one reason why accidents
are fewer in the Arctic than in temperate or tropic flying.
If you are a mile high and you develop engine trouble, you
can always glide to a safe landing where the subsoil is
frozen.
Those who have kept track of the advance of the Hudson
Bay Railway from The Pas to Churchill, even if it be only
through press despatches, are familiar with a third advantage,
for the ground frost has simplified and made cheaper
and easier the building of that important pioneer line. In so
far as the cost of construction is derived from taxes, the
people of the whole of Canada have benefited in purse from
the very condition which they formerly thought would increase
the building costs.
Coming back again to Arctic vegetation in the textbooks,
we find a reader approved for school use in four provinces
saying: “There are no trees in this cold land, but there is a
kind of hard brown moss that grows under the snow.” There
are known to be more than 300 species of Arctic moss. These
the textbook ignores along with more than 700 kinds of
flowering plants. And why does this one moss that is known
to the textbook compiler do its growing under the snow?
Isn’t it poor judgment for even a moss to wait idle during
the hot summer and to begin to grow in the fall when snow
comes? Or—and I gather this from the complete selection—perhaps
the author believes that a snow covering is permanent
in the Arctic. The fact is, of course, that Arctic land is
permanently snow-covered only on or near mountains. Most
Arctic lands are low and, like the Prairie Provinces, they
have snow in winter and none in summer. In Peary Land,
the most northerly land on earth, there are bees and butterflies
in the rolling meadows of flowers and grass.
The textbook statement that musk oxen feed on moss is
perhaps a minor error from the point of view of this article,
but it shows how widespread are the inaccuracies. All those
who have studied this animal report that it lives mainly on
grasses, sedges, and browse.
Up to this point, the geographies have, in the main, agreed
to disagree with the scientists. On the question of animal
life they begin to disagree with each other. Some of them,
having talked so convincingly of sparse vegetation, continue
this idea. For, since many of the Arctic animals are herbivorous,
if the text admitted that there are large numbers of
them, the children might well begin to puzzle as to what
they lived on. Therefore we find one author saying that the
Eskimos live almost wholly on animals and that their “available
food supply is scanty.” A school reader has it that “there
are very few (musk oxen) left. They keep them in a park
with a high wire fence about it.”
Others, however, report large herds of caribou and musk
oxen, and some go so far as to mention polar bears, wolves,
foxes, hares, seals and fish. But we gather from the texts
that these animals lead a precarious existence.
As a fact, few known waters are richer in fish, whales and
seals than those of the Arctic. The caribou of Arctic and
sub-Arctic Canada number several hundred for each single
Eskimo, and yet travelers who have described bands of thousands,
and even herds of a hundred thousand moving together,
have never reported any noticeable depletion in the
vegetation.
In the case of musk oxen, there are probably 4,000 wild
for every forty that are in fenced parks. These wild musk
oxen are in no danger of extinction at present, for most of
them are on islands that are uninhabited, many of them
never even visited by Eskimos.
Having invented a fictitious country and named it Eskimoland,
the textbooks find it necessary to invent a fictitious
people, and the Eskimos are misrepresented even more than
the territories they inhabit. They are supposed to be all alike,
though some of them live farther away from others than
Canada is from Mexico, and have less contact. Their climate
has only one description in most textbooks, although they
really live in several different climates. The materials of the
description of land and people, so far as they are not invented
have, however, been gathered from many Eskimo countries,
many Eskimo climates, and many Eskimo peoples. The
result is a patchwork portrait which resembles no Eskimo
who ever lived. Then they make this patchwork man live in
a patchwork country. One is as real as the other.
The schoolbook accounts of the Eskimo presumably arouse
in the child both pity and amusement. Here are some of the
quotations:
“The Eskimo has an environment which forces him into constant
conflict with Nature. He is in continual danger of freezing
and starving to death.”
“The Eskimo suffers from intestinal diseases, malnutrition and
scurvy, and his resistance to disease is greatly lowered.
“The ravenous eating of tallow candles and soap by Eskimo
children is well attested.”
“When the Eskimo boy is thirsty, he drinks oil.”
Against this picture stands in my mind my own experience
of living more than ten years as an Eskimo among Eskimos.
To me it seems that as a race they have more leisure than
city dwellers, for instance. Some of the geographies mention
their ivory carving and ornamental ceremonial dress, but
they leave it a mystery how a people under terrific strain for
a livelihood find time for such things. My observation has
been that in many communities the needed work to provide
food, shelter and clothing requires from the Eskimo less
than half of our standard eight-hour day. Four hours of
work and eight of sleep give him twelve hours of leisure.
Accordingly, a man will spend a week carving an ivory
handle which he could have made plain in half a day. A
woman who could sew a warm coat in two days will spend
two months making one not so warm (but in her opinion
prettier) by cutting up whole skins and piecing them together
in complicated designs. Entire communities spend
weeks singing and dancing and listening to story-tellers
spinning out long tales of adventure with spirits and with
men. The winters, so frightful in the textbooks, are their
holiday season, spent in carrying out elaborate festivities.
Most of the textbooks say or imply that most or all Eskimos
live in snow or ice houses in winter. This is geographical
hodgepodge. No Eskimos live in ice houses, or at least
I never heard of it. Some live in snow houses, but more than
half the Eskimos in the world have never seen them. In the
textbooks all snow houses are called “igloos,” but the word
iglu simply means house in general, or dwelling. It is misleading
to imply that snow houses are known to all Eskimos
and used by most of them. In many districts the snow house,
being unknown, is not even represented by any word in the
vocabulary. Many Eskimos live in houses built of earth and
wood, or with bone rafters and walls of stone and earth.
There are several other types of dwelling.
The case is worse about the use of oil. According to the
above textbook quotation and many similar, they drink it.
Before my recent study of Canadian lower school texts, I
had heard that they did this for two other reasons—one that
they liked it, and the other to keep warm. It remained for
a Toronto textbook to advance the new explanation that they
do it to quench thirst. But to have this true, the laws of both
physiology and chemistry would have to be changed. Physiology
teaches that thirst is quenched only by water, and
chemistry that there is in oil no water which the human
stomach is capable of extracting.
The Eskimo stomach is similar to your stomach. If you
think he drinks oil for any reason, I would suggest that you
take about a water tumbler of whatever oil you prefer. If
you have a strong will you may be able to get it down, but
the chances are three in four that you will not be able to
keep it down. If you are the one in four who can keep it
down, you will very soon wish that you weren’t.
The truth is that Eskimos use oil with their food, as we
do salad oil or gravy. They eat it but they don’t drink it, and,
therefore, instead of being weird monstrosities, they are just
like us in this respect, as they are in most fundamental human
things.
One textbook says that a cold climate produces people who
are stunted in mind and body. For body the Eskimo might
be described as of average stature rather than small. Mentally
their teachers usually report them to be near the European
average.
That brings us to the question of the spread of European
education in the Far North. A school reader says: “There
are no books in that land and (the Eskimos) could not read
them if there were.” If this were true, it would bear out the
allegation that the Eskimos are stupid, for the Danes began
trying to teach them reading and writing about two centuries
ago. They found them apt pupils, the knowledge
gained by one or a few spreading by native instruction from
house to house and village to village. The work since then
has been shared by two governments, the Danish and that
of the United States—Canada has, as yet, taken no direct
educational action. Effective cultural work has been done
by the churches, among them the Anglicans, Lutherans,
Moravians, Presbyterians, Quakers, and Roman Catholics.
It would be strange if the efforts of all these bodies, some
going back two hundred years, left it still a justifiable criticism
of Eskimos that they cannot read or write. As a matter
of fact, more than half the total Eskimo population of Greenland,
Labrador, Canada and Alaska can read and write some
language, generally their own. They publish some of their
own books and have (in Greenland) a magazine that has
appeared regularly since 1867. Editors, proof-readers, type-setters,
engravers, printers, subscription solicitors and the
rest have all been Eskimo through all that time. No other
language has been employed in connection with the journal.
It is as Eskimo as the Spectator is English.
Which, by the way, is more interesting, the fiction that
“the Eskimo” does not know what a book is, or the fact that
one of the older journals in the western hemisphere is in
Eskimo?
That Eskimo children eat soap is ridiculous on the face of
it. I have never seen Eskimos eat candles, nor heard of a
case. But if they did eat tallow candles it would be no
stranger than the eating of tallow in any other form. Tallow
is only suet, and many a well-ordered meal in our country
still includes suet pudding.
As for the “deficiency diseases and scurvy,” the Eskimos
are, as far as we know, free from them so long as they live
on their own accustomed diets. Once they begin to live on
white men’s groceries and neglect to secure fresh meat,
these diseases grow. Dr. William A. Thomas, of Chicago,
found in Labrador, for instance, that the Eskimos who suffered
most were those nearest the trading stations and most
supplied with white men’s food. In the sections beyond the
reach of the traders, or little affected by them, the deficiency
troubles vanished.
As to commercial dealings with the outside world, we are
instructed by the geographies in contrary ways. On page 12
of one of them, the printed matter says: “The Eskimos have
almost no trade with other people. They must depend on
their own country to supply their wants.” But on page 123
of this same book, there is a photograph of six power
schooners—not whaleboats—with the caption “Eskimo
Whaleboats, Fort McPherson!”
It is, as a matter of fact, one of the important industries
of Edmonton to supply Eskimos with power schooners. I
have seen a photograph from the Arctic, sent me by an officer
of the Royal Canadian Mounted Police, showing $100,000
worth of these in a single view. The same engines that produce
electric light for these Eskimos on shipboard in summer
are used by them sometimes to light their houses in winter.
Some have separate Delco electric lighting systems for their
homes.
But the teachers of Edmonton, the city which furnishes
most of these supplies, use now, or did use recently, textbooks
which state or imply that the Eskimos have no boats
except skin canoes, and no light except seal-oil lamps. Nor
can you defend the books by suggesting that they are talking
of fifty or a hundred years ago. The context shows that these
allegations are supposed to fit the present.
To balance all these unfavorable truths about the northern
half of Canada, I have been able to discover in the school
texts one—and only one—favorable mistake. A geography
says, “Mosquitoes are found all over the North American
continent except in the extreme north.” Anyone who has
been there will tell you that the contrary is the fact. Until
you approach the Arctic you do not know how bad mosquitoes
can be.
A thing which the incorrect schoolbooks are doing is to
dampen that current enthusiasm about the Far North of
Canada which is due to the beginning of actual mining in
the Middle North, where Flin Flon and Sherritt Gordon are
already words to conjure with.
For these mines are in the sub-Arctic, which, according to
the textbooks, is almost as bad as the Arctic itself, a land
barren because of the cold. Mining is expensive where food
is not produced locally and where no one lives except the
miners and their dependents. There is, in consequence, a
fundamental need to colonize even the richest mineral districts
with a food-producing population. Sunlight and rainfall
are, therefore, the most important resources of any district,
and the younger generation of Canadians should be
permitted to grow up with a true understanding of how
heat and water are distributed, and how these are used by
nature for the production of those plants upon which all
animal life, including the human, must in the last resort
depend.
Canada is two things, a people and a country. We need
truthful histories for a reasonable judgment of our past; we
need accurate geographies for planning the future. The
schoolboys and the schoolgirls of today, most of them without
university training, will step into control of this land
tomorrow. Their chief equipment for that task is their education.
What the university courses teach in advanced geography
and climatology is not propaganda but truth. Why
not give the pupils of the common schools the advantage of
the same correct description of the climate and its results,
so that they, too, will know how to prepare for the great
spread of settlements northward that must continue till inhabited
Canada becomes as broad as it is long, a nation drawing
power from all its territories, even the farthest islands
in the northern sea?
CHAPTER VII.
Olof Krarer
IN THE SCHOOLS OF MANY LANDS, INCLUDING THOSE WHICH
speak English, the Eskimos are studied during the early
grades. In my youth I learned many strange things concerning
them. We spoke of Eskimos and of Eskimoland as if the
people were all alike and lived in one place.
The Eskimos are a godsend to the schools. From their
simplicity you can get a parallel to the simplicity of our
own remote ancestors and also a contrast to the multiplicities
of civilization. It is easy to teach and to learn that, while
in our land it is sometimes hot and sometimes cold, there is
a district south of us where it is always hot and another
north of us, Eskimoland, where it is always cold. This impresses
upon the child-mind that there is a balance and symmetry
in nature, which has been a favorite doctrine since
Greek times.
Heat is life-giving (the school instruction went on); the
hot lands are luxuriant and beautiful. Cold is deadening; the
cold lands of the Eskimos are sterile, bleak, forbidding.
Things develop to large size in heat; cold has a stunting
influence. Therefore, trees become smaller and smaller as
you go north until you come to the last cringing shrubs.
Beyond them, in a treeless waste, are the Eskimos, a little
people, themselves stunted by the cold. In their bitter struggle
to eke out the scantiest of livings they cower, wrapped
in furs, inside huts of snow which give them bare shelter
from the furious Arctic blizzards. To keep warm they eat
the most warming food, which is fat; so they live on
blubber. They grease their bodies with oil as a further protection
from the cold, and they drink oil. Though we need
varied meals, a balanced ration, the Eskimos are strangely
able to live on animal tissues alone and they eat their meat
raw, usually warm from a recently slaughtered beast or else
frozen.
But, marvelous to relate, in spite of all these things, the
Eskimos are a jolly, happy little people. They serve thus a
double moral purpose. The gruesome view of their land and
of their life makes us better contented with ours; we see
from their happiness under conditions of misery that really
it isn’t so bad, in comparison, to be poor and jobless down
here. We should all, therefore, be contented and happy.
In view of the large place held by Eskimos in our scheme
of child training, the misfortune is serious that our educators,
particularly the writers of our schoolbooks, have been
forced to get their Eskimo material at second hand from
the writings and lectures of explorers. The situation was
made worse in that a good many explorers lacked the imagination
and the literary gifts necessary for making possible
the desired insight into the heart and soul of these present-day
survivors of Stone Age man.
It is a major good fortune that American educators have
had opportunity for close relation with at least one Eskimo,
Olof Krarer.
******
The autumn 1912 I came south after four consecutive
years in the Arctic, making several reports, one of them
that among some hundreds of Eskimos who were not known
to have been in touch with Europeans I had seen ten or
more who were as light in complexion and eye color as if
they were anything from one-quarter to three-quarters
European. A reporter changed my statement to convey the
impression that I had found near Coronation Gulf several
hundred Eskimos all of whom were blond. This reporter
has since claimed, probably with more right than anybody
else, that he made me famous. Certainly there was a big
newspaper hubbub.
In a barrage of letters to the press there came one from
Ithaca, New York. The writer was a professor of Cornell.
He tried to bring into an acrimonious discussion a quiet,
urbane tone. It was not fair, he contended, to denounce
Stefansson as a charlatan for having claimed to discover a
new race of blond people in the Far North, for these people
indubitably exist. But neither was it fair to praise his “discovery”
vociferously, as some were doing, for blond Eskimos
were so well known that they were, for instance, a matter
of his own experience and that of his family. For he and his
wife had had the pleasure some years ago to entertain in
their home one of them who had come to Ithaca as a lecturer.
She was a woman named Olof Krarer, small of stature
like the rest of her people, with light hair and with blue
eyes of quite the Scandinavian type. She had made a favorable
impression.[17]
The letter from Cornell stirred childhood recollections. I
had heard my mother and the neighbors talk of a strange
and pathetic girl who came with them on the emigrant
ship from Iceland in 1876. She must have been nearing
twenty but she was small for a child of ten, a dwarf. She
was vivacious, ambitious, and talked of the opportunities for
distinction and advancement which awaited her in the New
World. Her fellow-immigrants did not know whether to
laugh or weep. She was clever, but her physical handicap
seemed more than her gifts could surmount.
The party of colonists landed in Nova Scotia. After a year
in that province many of them traveled west through the
Great Lakes and by way of the Red River of the North to
Lake Winnipeg, where my parents settled and where I was
born.
In 1880 our family moved to Dakota Territory and so did
Olof’s, but she had gone off on her own and was probably
in Winnipeg. Some years later we heard in North Dakota
that she was in a circus exhibiting herself as an Eskimo.
The Icelanders (who until recently were proud of being
about the least adulterated Nordics in Europe) were at first
scandalized and inclined to attempt stopping the imposture.
On second thought most if not all of them felt that little
harm could be done to their nationality by the fraud compared
to the tragedy it would be for this handicapped
woman to be exposed and deprived of the one thing which
gave her a livelihood and a tolerable life. We know now
that she even won respect and affection—witness the above
Cornell testimony and much shall be hereinafter cited.
There was presently in the Icelandic community in North
Dakota a connected story of Olof Krarer. I do not know
whether it was brought or whether it just grew. No doubt
it was partly imagination; equally without doubt it was
partly true.
Our North Dakota version of the story ran that Olof had
been waitress in a hotel. Seeing how small she was, the
guests asked about her and were told, sometimes by herself
and sometimes by the hotel people, that she was an Icelander.
The comeback was usually: “How interesting! We never saw
an Eskimo before.” Olof would then explain that Icelanders
were not Eskimos and that their blood was chiefly Norwegian
with a little mixture of Irish.[18] The interest waned.
There were plenty of Norwegians around; the Irish were
no rarity. That sort of dwarf was hardly a seven days’
wonder.
But there were new guests in the hotel daily, new questions
about Olof, and new accents for the tiresome: “How
interesting! We never saw an Eskimo before.” She became
bored, annoyed, outraged. Finally she stopped explaining
that Icelanders were not Eskimos and simply flounced off.
The interpretation of that was, poor thing, she was ashamed
of being an Eskimo. Her silence now gave consent.
One day a local clergyman appeared. He said that the
young people of his church had a mid-week meeting and
they would be so interested if Olof would come down and
talk to them informally about the Eskimos. They would be
glad to pay her five dollars.
I go back to what my mother said of the pathetic ambition
and anticipations of the dwarf. I imagine how, perhaps at
first through embarrassment Olof did not correct the
minister. When his invitation came to the five-dollar offer
she was already realizing that her chance had come. She
agreed to give the talk.
Combining testimony of the Cornell professor with that
of my mother, I imagine further that Olof went to the town
library next day, or to some bookish friend, and read up on
the Eskimos. Then, to the best of her ability, she improvised
a story of an Eskimo childhood and gave it at the mid-week
church meeting. It was accepted and she was on that road
which took her to the lyceum platform and the circus. As
we shall see, it took her to other places, to fame and to a
lasting influence upon American education and thought.
My memories, temporarily revived in 1912 by the Cornell
professor’s letter, had receded vaguely into the background
when, in 1922, I had a secretary, Miss Dorothy Daggett.
She came from a week-end one Monday morning and asked
whether a young man whom she had met at the house party
might come and consult me about an extraordinary yarn
which he had picked up in Florida and which he had already
sold tentatively to a magazine. She had urged him
not to print without consulting me, for the story was about
an Eskimo and seemed to her spurious. She did not think
that a young man ought to risk publishing that sort of thing
at the beginning of a literary career.
In due course John Schoolcraft arrived and told the following
story which I quote from notes made at the time:
THE STORY OF OLAF CRERAR
as told by
John Schoolcraft
The Eskimo woman, Olaf Crerar, says she was born on the
north coast of Greenland in a village of thirty or forty houses,
with an average of four people in each house. A family of eight
children in that country is equivalent to one of twenty in this.
The average family has two or three.
One day two big white men came into their village, the first
big men they had ever seen and the first whites. The North
Greenland Eskimos are blond themselves, but owing to the smoke
in their houses they didn’t know it. The two big men were Icelanders.
After living in the village about a year, they persuaded
Olaf’s father to go on a long journey with them. He had no idea
where he was going but he consented, and, as is always the case
on long hunting trips, he took his family with him. They started
across the ice and it took them something like three months to
make the journey from northern Greenland to northern Iceland.
When they came to the Gulf Stream it was partly open. There
they went from one ice floe to another, like Eliza crossing the
Ohio. They finally got to Iceland.
Olaf was about sixteen when she left Greenland (or perhaps
she was twenty). She stayed in Iceland something like four and
a half years. At the end of that time, all of her family were dead
except herself and her father. They died from the change in
climate. There was a missionary there who took a great interest
in her and baptized her into the (Lutheran) church. Her Eskimo
name was Ahbo. The missionary, in giving her a Christian name,
wanted to get one as close to the Eskimo as possible, so he called
her Olaf. I don’t know where she got her last name, which sounds
like Crerar.
Olaf suffered so from the Icelandic climate that the missionary
decided to send her and her father with some friends of his to
Canada, thinking its climate would probably be better for them
both than the Icelandic. He started them off on a boat with a
company of Icelanders, and there may have been some Swedes
and Norwegians. They landed at Quebec.
Olaf was knocked around from pillar to post in the United
States and Canada for awhile, with this funny little father of
hers. At that time she was 40 inches high, 45 inches around the
waist, and weighed 136 pounds. Her father was smaller than she.
She told that she had been a nursemaid and implied that she
had worked in hotels. On one occasion she was taken sick in a
hotel in St. Paul and a doctor visited her who had been in Greenland
and who knew a few words of her language.
Then Mr. Slayton of the Slayton Lyceum Bureau ran across
her and thought she would be a good lecturer, so he took her
into his home and together they worked up a lecture. She went
around the country for something like twenty-five years (she is
sixty-two now) lecturing. For the last few years of this time she
was not only a lecturer but a sort of collector for Mr. Slayton. He
would give these (lyceum) courses and she would be the last one
on the course and would collect the money from those who had
sponsored the course. The understanding was that at his death
she was to have a home in his house as long as she lived. She did
live with Mrs. Slayton for a number of years.
While in Florida she met the people named Stone who took
her back to Michigan with them—Mr. I. K. Stone, Maple Street,
Battle Creek, Michigan. She is living there now and has been
with them two or three years. She is always telling them how in
Greenland people always tell the truth. It is a great shock to her,
she says, to come into a civilization where they don’t tell the truth.
So in the household, when they aren’t kidding each other, they
have the saying, “This is Greenland.”
Olaf says that the people up in northern Greenland where she
was born continue to grow until they are thirty-five. When mature
they are very small, like herself, and they mature slowly.
They don’t marry until they are twenty-five, and children don’t
walk until they are three. She says that the mothers do not nurse
their children at all. As soon as a baby is born they give him a
piece of whale meat and tell him to carry on. Many life processes
there seem greatly slowed down.
However, a person of sixty is very old. They die off rapidly
from what Olaf thought was something like tuberculosis. It was
a wasting disease and usually ended with hemorrhage. She
thought it was brought on by the change in going from the
heated hut into the cold air outside.
North Greenland children are born either in the light time or
in the dark time (the well-known six-month day and six-month
night). When a child is born, the mother picks out a certain
kind of bone. Since they live on polar bears, walrus and seals
more than anything, it might be a bone from one of these animals.
She has a little bag on the wall and drops into it a certain
distinctive kind of bone for each child, and as each light time or
dark time comes around she drops another bone of this same sort
into the bag. In that way she can keep track of the children’s
ages. The children are forbidden to touch that bag, and if they
do the punishment is severe.
Olaf said these people believed in one big good spirit and one
big bad spirit, and there are also little good spirits and little bad
spirits. The big good one sent the little good ones around, and
similarly with the bad spirit. When a person dies he becomes a
good or bad spirit according to the way he has lived. Asked what
was their standard of good and bad, she replied that if during this
sickness, which evidently came on them all, the man or woman
was patient and unselfish, then he turned into a good spirit.
Those who were cross and complaining turned into bad spirits.
If a woman is sick she is put into one corner of the hut and
no one pays any attention to her. If she is given anything, it is
given furtively. In the case of a man he is taken off and put in a
hut by himself. The reason is that sickness is brought about by
one of the bad spirits, and if you favor the sick person you bring
the bad spirit’s attention to yourself.
The language is extremely simple, with a great many words
which by different intonations mean different things. They count
up to ten and have one word which means ten and some more,
which may be eleven or eleven million. The hardest thing for
her to do in Iceland and in this country was to learn to think.
The Eskimos talk a little about the fire and a little about the
polar bear and walrus, but have no abstract ideas. The vocabulary
is very small. There is absolutely no vegetation in North
Greenland, with the exception of some seaweed. The reindeer
there, which are very poor and which the people do not use for
food purposes at all, live on fish.
These Eskimos have no steel, and when a man goes on a long
trip where he can’t carry a fire, he makes a fire by striking a stone
against a walrus tusk. He may work hours and hours to get a
spark.
When a young man wants to marry, he picks out the girl he is
interested in and stops hunting. He goes to the house of this girl
and gets his food there for some time. If the girl’s parents continue
to make him welcome, he knows he is acceptable. Then he has
to get the girl out of that house into some other house in the
village (it doesn’t matter which one) without being seen. His
success constitutes the wedding ceremony. If he fails, he is punished
by death. Failures occur and the death penalty is actually
inflicted.
The facts on Olof put Schoolcraft in a position from
which he could find no escape. His literary conscience would
not permit him to use the story in its original form, after
he had found that it was a hoax; his humanitarian instincts
would not allow him to expose the old lady, who was, after
all, harmless in his view compared to the hordes of charlatans
who get by. As long as her friends believed in her
she would have a home, and these were probably her last
few as well as her declining years. Schoolcraft, who needed
both money and kudos, gritted his teeth and canceled his
bargain with the editor.
You have guessed it. The young and high-minded author
received his reward. Dorothy Daggett is now Mrs. John
Schoolcraft.
No more than Schoolcraft could we publish, until Olof
Krarer’s death. But the responsibilities we feel towards that
small minority who seek the facts, dictated eventual publication
and therefore the immediate gathering of testimonies,
documents, and explanatory theories.
The first step was to enlist the help of Miss Thorstina
Jackson, a graduate student at Columbia University, whose
father, Thorleifur Joakimsson Jackson, had been historian
of the Icelandic colonization in North America—chiefly
Minnesota, North Dakota, Manitoba, Saskatchewan and
Alberta, but also Nova Scotia and Utah. Many of his studies
had been published, but there were others in manuscript.
On canvass, these sources did not yield much directly, but
Miss Jackson (now Mrs. Emile Waters) knew just how to
follow up the investigation.
From the various replies to her letters it was possible to
establish Olof’s baptismal name, the names of her parents,
her birthplace and date of birth. For a time we were following
the wrong track on these points, for the first answer
to our queries stated that Olof was the daughter of Jonatan
Halldorsson. Jackson’s pioneer sketches did not list Olof as
a child of this family and a later correspondent, G. J. Hallsson,
of Hallson, North Dakota, in a letter dated May 26,
1926, gave the right clue:
“... I feel certain I know the person you refer to. It must be
Olof Solfadottir, from Langamiri in Hunavatnsysla. This girl
was a dwarf in stature....”
At this time Miss Jackson made a trip to Iceland. While
there she went to the Government library in Reykjavik and
obtained from the Kirkjubok (Book of Church Records) a
copy of Olof’s birth certificate. We quote a translation of the
Icelandic document which she forwarded:
BIRTH CERTIFICATE
Ólöf Sölvadóttir
Born 15 February 1858 baptized 17th of the same month.
Parents: Sölvi Sölvason and Solveig Stefánsdóttir, man and wife
of Outer Langamyri.
The above is correct according to the register of Audkul Parish.
Certified
The National Archives, Reykjavik, 13 July, 1926.
(Signed) Hannes Thorsteinsson.
The following year the identification was further confirmed
and documented by B. L. Baldwinson, of 729 Sherbrook
Street, Winnipeg, Manitoba, as will appear.
All the accounts of Olof’s early years in Canada, before
she assumed the character of Miss Krarer the Eskimo, swayer
of American educational destinies, are vague and the details
vary, but the general outlines are similar. As a continuation
of the above Hallsson letter, we quote a version, differing
somewhat from my memory of my mother’s:
“... She (Olof) had been living with her father in Winnipeg
and left him in 1880 to live with an English couple. They were
then resident in Winnipeg but I have no doubt they were really
traveling players who had some connection with a large company
of actors. I believe that shortly thereafter they left Winnipeg for
the United States, for (soon) after she got south across the line
she was recognized as the same girl, although she had then already
assumed her Eskimo character. Why she did this, I am
unable to explain. I knew her very well and lived in the same
neighborhood. For that reason I would consider it remarkable if
she did anything seriously reprehensible so long as her conduct
was fully governed by her own desires. She seemed to have a good
and firm character and was intelligent above the average.
“According to my understanding, it seems clear that the
woman who adopted her came to be largely in control of whatever
she did.”
The most complete and thoroughly documented information
came from Baldwinson, who enclosed with his letter
on November 16, 1927, a statement which we quote in full.
“Olof Solvadottir
“Born at Ytri Longumyri in Blondudal in Hunavatnssyslu in
Iceland about the year 1860 or 1861.
“Her father Solvi Sölvason, farmer.
“Her mother Solveig Stefansdottir: his wife.
“Solvi lost his wife in Iceland and remarried there; his second
wife was Soffia Eyjolfsdottir, a widow. They emigrated from Iceland
to Canada in the year 1876 and settled a short distance north
of the town of Gimli in Manitoba and remained there for about
3 years until they moved to Winnipeg in or about the year 1879,
where they resided for a period of 2 years. They then moved to
Hallson in N. Dakota, built a house and resided there for several
years, until they moved to Seattle in the state of Washington.
There they built a house in Ballard and remained there until
their death.
“Olof Solvadottir is a dwarf. She left her family while they
lived in the Gimli district and went to Winnipeg to secure work.
There she joined up with an American traveling tent show and
has since been lost to all her relatives though she is known to be
alive and well and in the care of wealthy benefactors in the United
States. Her nearest relatives are:
(Here followed names and addresses of three brothers and a
sister, in the U.S.A. and Canada, and of a relative in Iceland.)
“This information is given by Magnus Bjornson, 11 McDonald
St., Winnipeg, who is a foster brother to Olof since she lost her
mother in Iceland, and also by her brother at Westbourne as to
names and addresses of her brothers and sisters. The two photos
herewith enclosed are taken from photos the property of Magnus
Bjornson.”
The accompanying letter from Baldwinson said in part:
“... Magnus Bjornson, Olof’s foster brother ... ran into Olof
in a circus a few years after she had begun to exhibit herself. She
then pretended not to recognize him, which he said suited him
well enough, for he did not want to be the cause of her getting
into trouble about her (pretended) nationality.”
An earlier letter from Baldwinson contained an explanatory
note on some photographs which were enclosed.
“I have also secured two pictures of her, one by herself, the
other with the man that she is said to have been married to—both
of them are wearing wedding rings.”
This photograph shows the figures of equal stature. The
body proportions are those of dwarfs.
Following these inquiries my activities in the Olof Krarer
case were long suspended. And then, in Utica, New York
(1932), I met Miss Frances A. Finch who, as a child, had
known Olof Krarer in Florida. She told me something of
her childhood recollections of this interesting character,
and later confirmed them by a letter which I quote in part,
dated from Skaneateles, New York, November 27, 1932:
“As you requested, I have gone into the question at home, but
I think that the enclosed material (photographs) is all I have that
would be of interest to you....
“Print No. 1 is the one I mentioned as having been taken during
the winter of 1917-1918. I was ten years old at the time. Miss
Krarer and I are standing on the same step. I presume I was of
average height, for now, at the age of twenty-five, I am about five
feet two and a half inches tall. (The picture shows the girl of ten
considerably taller than the old “Eskimo.”)
“Miss Krarer was about fifty-eight years old when these pictures
were taken, and print No. 2 shows Miss Olaf with a bouquet presented
her at that year’s celebration of her birthday....
“... The woman with whom Miss Krarer lived was Mrs.
(H. P.?) Slayton.... Although Mrs. Slayton was considered the
owner of the Seven Gables Apartments, rumor had it that Olaf
Krarer had a substantial interest. I’ve been unable to verify the
location of the Seven Gables Apartments, pictured in print No. 3,
except that it stands at a corner of Williams Park in St. Petersburg,
Florida.”[19]
In November, 1934, my friend, Miss Gretchen Switzer, of
Columbia University, told me that she was about to visit
St. Petersburg. For reasons two or three paragraphs ahead,
she was interested in the case of Olof Krarer. She followed
up the information given by Miss Finch. In St. Petersburg
she was able to verify the name and address of Mrs. Slayton
(Mrs. W. P. Slayton) and the location of the Seven Gables
Apartments. She also talked with the clerk of the Princess
Martha Hotel, H. B. Boardman (now of The New Hotel
Delaware, Ocean City, New Jersey) who said that Olof was
known there only as Olof the Eskimo. To the best of his
knowledge she had gone to Battle Creek and at that time
(1934) was in Chicago.[20]
Some years ago I became interested in the similarity between
the Krarer tradition and the views about Eskimos
held in Teachers College, Columbia University. I asked Miss
Switzer, then a member of the New College staff of Teachers
College, where she had obtained her ideas and it seemed she
could trace a number of them to having studied in the lower
grades a book published by Rand McNally and Company,
Eskimo Stories (copyright 1902). A check showed that the
author, Mary Estella E. Smith, of the Jenner School, Chicago,
had for the last paragraph of its introduction, dated
June 14, 1902:
“The author acknowledges her appreciation of the valuable
suggestions made by Miss Olof Krarer, who read the book in
manuscript, and whose interesting autobiography appears at the
close of the volume under the title, ‘The Story of a Real Eskimo.’”
A little earlier in the introduction Miss Smith says that
“... various books have been consulted and drawn upon for
basic material, but special acknowledgment is due ‘My Arctic
Journal,’ by Josephine D. Peary, and ‘The Children of the Cold,’
by Frederick Schwatka.”
Clearly Miss Smith did get a considerable part of her
material from the dry-as-dust fact school, and perhaps three-quarters
of her book would be in humdrum correspondence
with things as they physically are. But some of the more
entertaining portions, likeliest to cling to the mind of a
learner, are seemingly based on the “valuable suggestions
made by Miss Olof Krarer.” Though perhaps small in quantity,
beside the contributions by Mrs. Peary and Lieutenant
Schwatka, the Krarer section of the schoolbook was bound
to impress itself, for the author says to the teacher at the
head of the Krarer autobiography, The Story of a Real
Eskimo, that “this story should be read to the children before
they begin reading the book.”
We quote portions of The Story of a Real Eskimo:
“I was born on the east coast of Greenland, the least known to
civilization, about one thousand miles north and a little west of
Iceland. I am the youngest of eight children. As nearly as I can
remember,[21] my father’s house was on a low plain near the seashore....
“Our house was built of snow....
“... Outside of the door was a long, narrow passageway, just
high enough for one of us little Eskimo people to stand up
straight in. That would be about high enough for a child eight
years old in this country; and it was only wide enough for one
person to go through at a time. If one wanted to go out and
another wanted to come in at the same time one would have to
back out of the passageway and let the other go first....
“Our fireplace was in the center of the house. The bottom was
a large flat stone with other stones piled about the edge to keep
the fire from getting into the room. When we wanted to build a
fire we would put some dried meat and bones on the stone; then
a little dry moss was put in, and then my father would take a
flint and a whale’s tooth and strike fire upon the moss. Sometimes
it took a long time to make it burn. After the fire started
he would put some blubber upon it....
“... Our food is eaten raw and frozen. We have only the salt
ocean water, and if we had soft, fresh water we would not dare
to use it, for it would be like poison to our flesh with the thermometer
80° or 90° below zero. So, when we eat, we take a piece
of raw meat in one hand and a chunk of blubber in the other,
and take a bite of each until it is eaten. Then we carefully rub
the grease and fat all over our hands and face, and feel fine
afterwards. My people have long hair, made dark by the smoke
and grease.
“There was no chance to play and romp inside the snow house.
We just had to sit still with our arms folded. It was in this way
that my arms came to have such a different shape from people’s
arms in this country. Where their muscle is large and strong, I
have but very little; and instead of that, I have a large bunch of
muscle on the upper side of my arms, and they are crooked so
that I can never straighten them.
“Sometimes we used to get very tired in the dark snow house
and then we would try a little amusement. Two of us would sit
down on the fur carpet, and looking into each other’s faces, guess
who was the best looking. We had to guess at it, for we had no
looking-glass in which to see our faces.
“The one whose face shone the most with the grease was called
the prettiest. If at any time we grew tired of it all, and ventured
to jump about and to play, we were in danger of being punished.
When a child was naughty, mother would place a bone on the
fire, leaving it there until it was hot enough for the grease to boil
out. Then she would slap it on the child. She was not particular
where she burned her child, except that she was careful not to
touch the face....
“But it was not always so that we had to stay in the snow house.
Once in a while father would come in and say it was not so
cold as usual, and then we would have a chance to look around
outside the snow house. We never took long walks. There were
some steep, jagged rocks in sight of our village, and during the
long daytime enough of the snow would melt off to leave the
rocks bare in a few places....
“Now, in order that you may understand our way of living
better, I will explain that we have six months night in Greenland,
and during that time nothing is seen of the sun.... Before and
after the night-time there was about a month of twilight....
“In the long day we had the hardest time, for then the sun
shone out so brightly that we would be made snow-blind if we
ventured far from home. The day was four months long, and if
we did not have food enough stored away in an ice cave to last
us through, we would be in great danger of starving.
“... My father’s name was Krauker, my name was Oluar.
On arriving in Iceland I was baptized Olof Krarer.
“One thing had a great deal of interest for us all. When the sun
shone out at the beginning of the daytime, it marked the first of
the year, as New Year’s day marks the beginning of the year in
this country. Then our parents would take out the sacks, each
one of the family having one of their own. In each sack was a
piece of bone for every first time that person had seen the sun.
When ten bones were gathered, they would tie them into a bundle,
for they had not words to count more than ten. In such a
land was I born, in such a home was I brought up. In such
pleasures I rejoiced until there were about fifteen bones in my
sack.
“Then something happened which changed my whole life. Six
tall men came to our village. They proved to be Iceland whalers
who had been shipwrecked in a storm and who finally reached
Greenland. When they returned to Iceland my father’s family
went with them....
“Eskimos have no idea of a book.... They think, in their
ignorance, they are the only people, and are consequently contented
and happy.
“June 16, 1902. “Olof Krarer.”
By her own account Miss Krarer had been born an Eskimo
in Greenland; those who claim to be her relatives state she
was born an Icelander in Iceland. Both countries, and the
sea between them, are hazy to the average reader and so a
few remarks may be worth while.
Iceland is the largest country now inhabited by Europeans
which had no aborigines when discovered. It is, too, the
largest in the northern hemisphere of those islands which do
not show, archeologically or historically, any evidence of
pre-white human occupation.
The Irish discovered Iceland around or before A. D. 795;
the Norsemen first visited the country around 850 and say
they found ahead of them no people except the Irish. These
things, so far as we know, are undisputed.
The part of Greenland, where Olof claimed to have been
born around 1860, “a thousand miles north and a little west
of Iceland,” can never have been inhabited during the last
several thousand years, since that distance takes you far into
the interior, up on the inland ice where, so far as we understand
it, neither humans nor the animals upon which hunters
depend can have lived since prior to that Ice Age which,
millenniums back, gave the land its present cap of snow.
Be liberal with Olof and place her family on the seacoast
of Greenland north and a little east from central Iceland.
We then have a district that is believed by anthropologists
and explorers not to have been inhabited by Eskimos at or
anywhere near the time when Olof was born. If you wanted
to be extremely generous, you might connect her story up
with the few Eskimos seen by Clavering, near what is now
Shannon Island, in 1823. Shannon is, true enough, some 500
miles south of Olof’s claimed birthplace, but then it is also
500 miles north of where her alleged family claim she was
born. That is kind of fifty-fifty.
The Clavering people were, by his account and that of
Sabine, apparently just ordinary Eskimos, looking more or
less as if they were Chinese. Olof tells that her Eskimo
relatives were blond, but then she mentions that they did
not know they were blond, they were so blackened with the
smoke from their lamps. Most travelers have explained that
Eskimos trim their lamps so carefully that they rarely smoke—but,
if we start out to be generous, why haggle over a few
smudges of lampblack?
Except Olof’s there is no account of Icelanders going to
eastern or northeastern Greenland near the time she says,
nor ever any time for many decades before and after. So far
as known, Europeans never visited northeastern Greenland
(1000 miles north of Iceland) until after Miss Krarer became
a prominent lecturer. Those Europeans were Danes,
not Icelanders.
Olof seems to be the only person who has claimed that the
sea was ever so frozen, or so filled with ice, between Greenland
and Iceland that people could walk across in the manner
described by her, or in any manner.
I know of one Eskimo having been in Virginia; I cannot
find testimony, except Miss Krarer’s, that any Eskimo ever
was in Iceland. Just possibly at some time during the Middle
Ages some Icelander may have brought an Eskimo from
Greenland, but, if so, there is no account of it. There is
one account of a medieval Icelander who did see Eskimos
on the southern east coast of Greenland, but the narrative
explicitly states that when he sailed from there he left the
Eskimos behind.
Iceland is among the countries which do not feel, or at
least did not until very recently, any such need for Eskimos
in their system of education as we feel in ours. You can see
through authorities such as Professor Ellsworth Huntington
of Yale, in his The Character of Races, that they are comparatively
a learned people, so you would expect book
knowledge of the Eskimos which Olof might have picked
up. But other writers, for instance, Bayard Taylor in his
Egypt and Iceland in the Year 1874, have pointed out that
the Icelandic learning, next after dealing with their own
antiquities, is heavily preoccupied with Greece, Rome, and
the Mediterranean countries generally. The Icelanders tend
to be classicists in their schooling and reading.
It was, therefore, in one way unfortunate that Olof, when
she came to formulate the accounts of her Greenland childhood,
had little groundwork derivable from her Icelandic
education or from the knowledge of her friends and family.
But in another way it was fortunate that she had to pick up
her ideas in America. For this made it simple to fit herself
to traditional beliefs, avoiding conflict with her hearers. So
in Miss Krarer’s account, as in the view previously common,
the Eskimos are (for instance) a small people, they grease
themselves with oil, they all live in snow houses, and they
suffer long periods of uninterrupted darkness followed by
long periods of uninterrupted light.
The Krarer version of Arctic lore does introduce a few
novelties, as, for instance, where she says that:
“... we have six months night in Greenland.... Before and
after the night-time there was about a month of twilight.... The
day was four months long.”
That replaced the six-month day and six-month night.
After all, she had to contribute something novel or there
could have been little advantage in getting knowledge for
American textbooks and supplementary readers straight
from a real Eskimo.
There is an almost tragic contrast between the Krarer
division of daylight and darkness and the one which has
recently forced its way into American school teaching, disturbing
its symmetry. Like Miss Krarer’s, this view attacks
the even division between light and dark but (and here is
the tragedy) where Miss Krarer arrived at a darkness period
much longer than the daylight, the astronomers who are
bothering the schools claim a daylight period much longer
than the darkness. Their ratio is practically the same as hers,
only reversed.
What a triumph it would have been for the little Eskimo
had she only reversed the naming of her four-month and
eight-month periods! The astronomers, right enough, are
talking for the mathematical North Pole and Miss Krarer
for a point only a thousand miles north of Iceland; but
that discrepancy would not have been so hard to explain
away. After all, Miss Krarer was born at a time when many
geographers still believed Greenland extended to and beyond
the North Pole, and she might so easily have been mistaken
as to whether she was born one thousand or sixteen hundred
miles north of Iceland.
As mentioned, it was the opinion among the Icelanders
in North Dakota that Olof Solvadottir, the normally blond
and blue-eyed Nordic dwarf, born in Iceland, had been induced
by “the English couple” who adopted her to take the
character of the Eskimo Olof Krarer, born in northeastern
Greenland. The first the Icelanders knew of her changed
status was when they discovered her as a freak in a circus.
According to my mother’s version of how Olof came to assume
the Eskimo character, she went straight from waiting
on table in a hotel to lecturing on a lyceum circuit—there
was no mention of an intervening circus career. But there
was a circus period, that seems clear. Perhaps the sequence
was small-time lecturing, circus, big-time lecturing.
At any rate, there is no reason to doubt the testimony
which connects Olof with a foremost bureau of lyceum’s
heyday.
Some of the leaders in the modern celebrity business are
old stagers from the lyceum and Chautauqua days. Among
these are O. B. Stephenson, head of the long successful
Emerson Lyceum Bureau, Orchestra Building, South Michigan
Avenue, Chicago, and the veteran field worker and at
present independent bureau manager, William H. Stout,
Bluff Road 37, Greenwood, Indiana. From them and others
we piece together the following:
At the crest of the lyceum and Chautauqua business one
of the most successful organizations was the Slayton Lyceum
Bureau, dating back also well among the pioneers. They
ranked almost if not quite with such great institutions as
the Redpath Bureau and produced some very successful
managers who later branched out for themselves, as for instance,
Charles L. Wagner, who was secretary for the Slaytons,
a dominant figure with them at that time, and who is
now a New York leader in concert management, with offices
at 511 Fifth Avenue. It seems clear that the Slaytons had
nothing to do with Olof’s change of state but received her
as a full-fledged Eskimo from those earlier patrons who may
have been influential in changing her, or who at any rate
may have been with her at the time she changed and thus
familiar with the stages of the transformation.
The story of Miss Krarer’s entry into and success in the
big-time lyceum field is succinctly given by W. P. Slayton,
son of the founder of the bureau, who writes from the
Hotel Lorraine, Chicago, June 30, 1936:
“As I recall, my Father, Henry L. Slayton, made a trip to Minnesota
to meet Miss Krarer with a view of making a contract for
her appearance under the management of the Slayton Lyceum
Bureau. At that time she was lecturing on Greenland with bookings
arranged by a personal manager. This was back in the
Eighties, I believe.
“She was glad to come under our management and we booked
her for the next thirty years or until her eyesight failed and she
had to give up platform work. She filled over 2500 lecture engagements
for us, of which over eighty were delivered in Philadelphia
alone.
“The last two years of her life were spent at the Old Peoples
Baptist Home in Maywood, Ill. She must have been over seventy
years old. Her height forty inches. A very interesting personality
on the platform and she had a host of friends all over the
country.”
From the time, then, when Henry L. Slayton discovered
her, Miss Krarer was one of their chief and successful attractions.
She was on the road pretty well constantly, lectured
in schools, universities, churches, auditoriums, and
under summer Chautauqua tents. Wherever she went she
appears to have made a favorable impression personally and
to have conveyed vividly her picture of that northeastern
Greenland where she said she had been born an Eskimo.
We have further proof of Miss Krarer’s success on the
lyceum and Chautauqua platforms from S. Russell Bridges,
one of the leaders in the lyceum field and now head of the
Alkahest Lyceum Bureau of Atlanta, Georgia. He writes
under date of July 31, 1936:
“Yes, I remember the little Eskimo lady, Miss Krarer, whom
we had on one of our Chautauqua circuits, as I recall, in the
summer of 1911. Then the following winter she came down and
filled a few lyceum engagements. She was an excellent attraction
who always made good with her audiences, and besides, she was a
good box office feature.
“... I recall trying to meet her when she first came down from
Chicago to begin her tour for us but I missed her at the station
and followed her on to the hotel where they had refused to give
her a room until I arrived and identified her....
“Another incident I recall is that she and William Jennings
Bryan appeared on our Chautauqua at Newnan, Georgia, the
same date, he in the morning and she in the afternoon, but they
were both leaving at the same time and when the train pulled
in at the depot, I took her baggage and went ahead and Mr. Bryan
was following but when I got on the platform of the train, she
was trying to reach the step but could not quite make it. Finally
Bryan picked her up and put her up on the platform as you
would a child.”
The way in which Olof Krarer was presented to the
public, the character of her service, and the impression she
made upon her audiences, we try to show more concretely
by quotations from a statement about her made by the
Slayton Lyceum Bureau (then of Steinway Hall, Chicago).
The document we have was likely printed in 1902 or 1903,
according to an informant who was in touch with Miss
Krarer then. It is, therefore, of about the period when The
Little Eskimo was collaborating with Chicago educators
and publishers along those lines which, through Eskimo
Stories and otherwise, have had so profound an influence
upon American schools. The statement runs:
“MISS OLOF KRARER has become one of the best known
lecturers that ever appeared on the lyceum platform. She does
not appear as a freak or a curiosity, but on her merits. The Bureau
always guarantees that she will give entire satisfaction to any
audience, however critical. Large sums of money have been made
from her lectures by churches, charity organizations and lyceums.
Many a church debt has been raised and a weak lecture course
freed from debt by the receipts from one of her lectures.
“For several years after the arrival of Miss Krarer in the United
States it was very difficult for her to live through the summer
months; she has, on the other hand, taken long rides during our
coldest days in winter, with only her ordinary apparel, without
the slightest discomfort, while those accompanying her were
nearly frozen to death.
“The simple story of her life, as she tells it, is more interesting
than a fairy tale. At the close of her lecture anyone in the audience
is at liberty to ask her any proper questions concerning her
life and native country. Some of the ablest legal talent in this
country have taken advantage of this privilege, but Miss Krarer
is always equal to every occasion and emergency. The Bureau,
in her behalf, takes this occasion to thank the many hundreds of
people and the press of the country for the uniform kindness and
attention received at their hands. During the past Miss Krarer has
delivered more lectures than her strength would really permit,
and for that reason it will be necessary in the future to limit the
number of her engagements, but first applications will receive
most favorable dates.”
That the general claims of managers were no empty sales
talk is borne out by the specific statement that Miss Krarer
had already (as of about 1902) lectured 85 times in Philadelphia,
16 times in New York, 14 times in Chicago, 6 times
in Baltimore, 5 times in Jersey City, Cleveland, and Aurora
(Ill.), and 3 times in Albany, N. Y., Syracuse, N. Y., Detroit,
Mt. Pleasant, Ia., St. Louis, Cortland, N. Y., Toledo, O.,
Orange, N. J., Newark, N. J., and Dayton, O.
Before the close of her career she lectured several more
years; a corrected tally would give her more appearances in
these cities than here listed.
The direct statement of the Slaytons is well supported by
representative newspapers from the Atlantic coast to beyond
the Mississippi. We quote them as they are quoted in the
(1902?) booking circular of “Miss Olof Krarer, Esquimau”:
“Newark (N.J.) Evening News: An appreciative audience
greeted Miss Olof Krarer, the Esquimau lecturer, at the Irvington
rink last night. She is a pleasant-faced little woman, only three
feet five inches in height and weighing 120 pounds, who left
Greenland with a party of Icelanders and was educated by missionaries
in Iceland. She told many interesting things about East
Greenland, of which so little is known. In her native land, she
said, ... There is only one social distinction—the man who owns
a flint for making fire is looked upon as a big gun, but he is
bound by custom to loan it freely and without remuneration.
Water—that is, fresh water—is unknown.... The women of her
country, she said, lived a life of pathetic idleness and helplessness,
with no housework, no washing, no fancy work, no amusement
and no cooking. All meat is eaten raw, and this is the sole
food. The main occupation of the men was hunting ... this being
done mainly in the twilight period, lasting four months of the
year. The remainder of the year is made up of four months of
perpetual night, lighted by stars and moon, and four months of
daylight. The latter is the hardest time for the Esquimaux, as
large numbers of them are afflicted with snow-blindness, caused
by the dazzling effect of the sun on the ice and snow.
“The only record of time kept by these primitive people is by
means of a bone bag—one bone dropped into a fur bag on the
day on which the sun is first seen each year.... Miss Krarer
says her people ... are becoming more stunted in growth and
shorter-lived every generation....”
“Holyoke (Mass.) Paper: Last night a large audience assembled
in the city hall and listened to Miss Olof Krarer’s talk
on ‘Greenland, or Life in the Frozen North.’ Since her visit to
this city two years ago Miss Krarer has increased her knowledge
of English and entertained her audience finely. The lecture was
the same as that given by her when she lectured under the
auspices of the Scientific Association. Last evening, at the close of
her lecture, Miss Krarer appeared in northern costume, a genuine
polar bear skin from its natural state, which she had taken great
pains to secure.... Miss Krarer still finds this climate trying,
and during the summer months seeks the coolest spot she can
find.... Tomorrow she speaks in Westfield, next in Warren.
Almost every night she is engaged and business increases every
season.”
“West Chester (Pa.) Republic: Olof Krarer fairly captivated
her audiences at the Normal yesterday afternoon and last evening.
The story of the life of the inhabitants of Greenland became
doubly entertaining when related in the quaint broken English of
this bright and witty little native of that frozen land. The Normal
School course of lectures thus inaugurated promises to be exceedingly
popular and will no doubt have a large patronage.”
“Manchester (Iowa) Union: The lecture on Greenland by Miss
Olof Krarer at the city hall last evening in aid of the Orphans’
Home was one of the most interesting and instructive lectures
ever heard in this city.”
“Vicksburg (Miss.) Daily Commercial Herald: Miss Olof
Krarer’s pictures of life from a Greenlander’s standpoint afforded
a very large audience at the opera house, last night, a unique
experience, of which not the least entertaining feature was the
personality of the speaker. She is scarcely taller than a ten-year-old
girl, a neat, trim, plump little woman, with very bright eyes
and a countenance that has nothing unfamiliar in its appearance,
such a one as might be seen anywhere in the United States and in
no respect Mongolian or Indian.... Hers is a plain, unvarnished
story, that of a sensible, educated woman, depicting the terrible
conditions of life around the North Pole. It was deeply interesting,
however, and the audience frequently applauded her. She
sang ... an Esquimaux love-song, which would no doubt impress
a damsel of the frozen coast as something too altogether lovely.
The lecture was given under the auspices of the Circle of the
Silver Cross, King’s Daughters, and was a financial success.”
“Brooklyn (N.Y.) Daily Eagle: The hall of the Young Men’s
Christian Association was well filled last evening by an audience
gathered to hear the lecture of Miss Olof Krarer, an Esquimau
lady from the eastern shores of Greenland, her subject being
‘Greenland, or Life in the Frozen North.’ Miss Krarer is the
only Esquimau lady in the United States and her lecture was
unusually interesting....”
“Detroit (Mich.) Free Press: The speaker’s platform at
Y.M.C.A. hall last evening presented a very Arctic appearance,
covered with polar bear skins and white draperies, with a silver
fox skin mounted over the speaker’s stand. This was done to be in
consonance with the character of the evening’s entertainment, a
lecture on the Esquimaux of Greenland, by Miss Olof Krarer, a
native of that hypoborean region.... She was decidedly short,
being only 3 feet 4 inches in height, and weighing 100 pounds.
Otherwise her appearance did not vary strikingly from that of
many a German maid, met with daily in Detroit....”
“Sioux City (Iowa) Journal: At the Y.M.C.A. auditorium last
night Miss Olof Krarer, the Esquimau woman, lectured on the
customs of her people. The audience was intensely interested in
the lecture.”
“Mount Pleasant (Iowa) Free Press: As a psychological study,
the little lady from Greenland, who gave her second lecture in
this city last Thursday evening, is probably unexcelled on this
continent; and as a study in heredity or the influence of vocation
and environment for successive generations upon the body she is
equally so.... Miss Krarer’s person bears corroborative testimony
to the claim of her being a native of Greenland, whose racial
developments are as marked and as universal as color in Caucasia
or Africa; and the indices of nationality in every unmixed people
on earth.... But it is Miss Krarer as an intelligent and agreeable
lady that is most interesting. The evolution from the national,
natal condition of absolute non-exertion, into the consciousness
of being a responsible, immortal, spiritual being; gracious in self-reliance,
dignified in self-respect and potent in an intelligent,
conscious, self-hood; attractive in demeanor, and gracious and
punctilious in every point of social relations, she is certainly the
most interesting personality to the student of mind that it is
possible to find on this continent. The school people who failed
to see and hear this speaker failed to see and hear a most suggestive
object lesson in psychical development under the Christian
idea of the nature of God and man. It is through Mr. Fred Hope
that Miss Krarer was engaged to come to Mt. Pleasant. Having
heard her in Washington, D.C., and knowing the interest she
awakened in her audiences in that city, he induced the people of
the Christian church to bring her here. Should she ever come
again, let those who did not hear her upon this occasion be sure
to do so.”
Thus through half a century, nearly forty years of which
were active, did Olof Krarer, blond Nordic dwarf who
may never have seen an Eskimo in her life, continue to
entertain and impress those who saw her and those who
read about her. It does not appear from other sources, any
more than it does from press comments, that her authenticity
as an Eskimo was questioned by her friends, her managers,
her audiences or her readers. On this we summarize
representative testimony.
Obviously a great and careful house like the Rand
McNally Company would not have accepted Olof Krarer
as a collaborator on one of their schoolbooks had they not
at the time believed her to be what their book says and
implies, an Eskimo born in an Eskimo country. If possible,
it is still more clear that Miss Mary E. E. Smith and her
fellow educators were convinced of Miss Krarer’s authenticity.
Plainly the confidence of the educational world in
Miss Krarer is still maintained for, as mentioned above,
what is usually considered the foremost school of education
in America, Teachers College of Columbia University, has
on its staff teachers who until recently developed no suspicion
either of Miss Krarer or of those views which at least
some of them realized came from Eskimo Stories. Strongest
proof of all that the faith still remains is the gratifying continued
sale of Eskimo Stories, which employees of the Rand
McNally Company report as late as July, 1936.
The testimony is the same from the lyceum fraternity.
Not perhaps quite so meticulously careful as professional
educators and the publishers of educational books, they
nevertheless tried to maintain a high standard for their
“attractions.” Remember, those were the William Jennings
Bryan and uplift days, when gate receipts were more likely
to drop than they are now if lecturers or their management
fell below ethical standards.
In a rather careful profession, then, the Slayton Lyceum
Bureau stood high and in considerable part through the
very influence of Miss Krarer. The Redpath Bureau, as
well known in the lyceum world, has been at the very top
in every requirement. I have a letter from Miss Amy M.
Weiskopf, who was in close association when the Redpaths
bought out the Slaytons, and who is with the Redpath
organization still, or with its head, Mr. Harry P. Harrison.
She says that she never doubted Miss Krarer’s authenticity
and that she never heard doubts of it.
An old friend of mine of high standing in the lyceum
world and still active, is the aforementioned William H.
Stout. He heard Miss Krarer lecture before the University of
Indiana, had no doubts of her authenticity himself, and
heard none expressed.
Those who knew her respected and liked Olof Krarer.
Through charm of personality she confirmed the interest
of the country, and particularly of the schools, in that frozen
wonderland of the remote north where live those unique
people, the Eskimos.
Olof died in 1935, but during the season 1936-37 teachers
all over the United States are carrying on her work
through continuing into its fourth decade of usefulness
the book Eskimo Stories, which she read in manuscript, on
which she “made valuable suggestions” and which contains
her “interesting autobiography.” The teachers who use the
book are no doubt being careful to follow the author’s
directions that Miss Krarer’s autobiography, The Story of a
Real Eskimo, which we quoted, ante, should be read to the
children before they begin reading the book.
Olof Krarer belonged to three cultural agencies that have
had their ups and downs, the Chautauqua, the lyceum, and
the circus. Chautauqua has faded; the lyceum is emerging
slowly (we hear) from a temporary eclipse by the radio;
the circus does pretty well, what with “Jumbo.” But a greater
cultural agency, the schools, in which Miss Krarer took her
place 34 years ago, has never suffered eclipse. The teachers
go marching on. In their ranks marches the forty-inch spirit
of that good trouper, Olof the Eskimo.
CHAPTER VIII. — FOOTNOTES:
HISTORY OF THE BATHTUB IN AMERICA
THOSE VERSED IN FABRICATED HISTORY HAD MOMENTS OF SHEER
delight the forenoon of May 27, 1936, while listening to
Dr. Shirley W. Wynne, formerly Commissioner of Health
for New York City, as he spoke over station WEAF of the
National Broadcasting Company on the subject “What Is
Public Health”:
“Even ordinary bathing, one of the simple factors in our personal
hygiene, had a hard time getting inaugurated in our grandfather’s
day. The city fathers in the good town of Boston ruled
that it was unlawful to take a bath except on a doctor’s advice;
and that law remained in effect from 1854 until 1862—think of
it. In Philadelphia they were a little more open-minded. The law
in Philadelphia was that you couldn’t take a bath between November
and March. The cities of Hartford and Providence discouraged
bathing by raising the charges for water supply about
400 per cent for people who owned bathtubs. In 1847, in Newport,
Rhode Island, a doctor tried to convert the people to the
habit of washing, though at the same time he conscientiously
warned them that the first bath or two might affect their hearts.
The American Medical Association immediately opposed him
and said that bathing was NOT compulsory to health, and the
people needn’t wash unless they just wanted to do so for some
whimsical reason of their own. So you see our great-grandfathers
and even our grandfathers all belonged in that category referred
to inelegantly as the Great Unwashed.”
The source of joy to the connoisseurs in hoaxes was that
the learned ex-Commissioner of Health was reciting over
the NBC what sounded a whole lot like an abridgment of a
certain contribution to the history of the bathtub which was
published in the New York Evening Mail of December 28,
1917. We have secured permission and herewith offer what,
in spite of much quoting and discussion, is probably the
first complete reprinting of this (the author is beginning to
feel) overtenaciously successful hoax:
“On December 20 there flitted past us, absolutely without public
notice, one of the most important profane anniversaries in American
history, to wit, the seventy-fifth anniversary of the introduction
of the bathtub into These States. Not a plumber fired a salute
or hung out a flag. Not a governor proclaimed a day of prayer.
Not a newspaper called attention to the day.
“True enough, it was not entirely forgotten. Eight or nine
months ago one of the younger surgeons connected with the
Public Health Service in Washington happened upon the facts
while looking into the early history of public hygiene, and at his
suggestion a committee was formed to celebrate the anniversary
with a banquet. But before the plan was perfected Washington
went dry, and so the banquet had to be abandoned. As it was,
the day passed wholly unmarked, even in the capital of the nation.
“Bathtubs are so common today that it is almost impossible to
imagine a world without them. They are familiar to nearly every
one in all incorporated towns; in most of the large cities it is
unlawful to build a dwelling house without putting them in;
even on the farm they have begun to come into use. And yet the
first American bathtub was installed and dedicated so recently as
December 20, 1842, and, for all I know to the contrary, it may be
still in existence and in use.
“Curiously enough, the scene of its setting up was Cincinnati,
then a squalid frontier town, and even today surely no leader in
culture. But Cincinnati, in those days as in these, contained many
enterprising merchants, and one of them was a man named
Adam Thompson, a dealer in cotton and grain. Thompson
shipped his merchandise by steamboat down the Ohio and Mississippi
to New Orleans, and from there sent it to England in
sailing vessels. This trade frequently took him to England, and in
that country, during the ’30’s, he acquired the habit of bathing.
“The bathtub was then still a novelty in England. It had been
introduced in 1828 by Lord John Russell and its use was yet confined
to a small class of enthusiasts. Moreover, the English bathtub,
then as now, was a puny and inconvenient contrivance—little
more, in fact, than a glorified dishpan—and filling and
emptying it required the attendance of a servant. Taking a bath,
indeed, was a rather heavy ceremony, and Lord John in 1835 was
said to be the only man in England who had yet come to doing
it every day.
“Thompson, who was of inventive fancy—he later devised the
machine that is still used for bagging hams and bacon—conceived
the notion that the English bathtub would be much improved if
it were made large enough to admit the whole body of an adult
man, and if its supply of water, instead of being hauled to the
scene by a maid, were admitted by pipes from a central reservoir
and run off by the same means. Accordingly, early in 1842 he set
about building the first modern bathroom in his Cincinnati
home—a large house with Doric pillars, standing near what is
now the corner of Monastery and Oregon streets.
“There was then, of course, no city water supply, at least in that
part of the city, but Thompson had a large well in his garden,
and he installed a pump to lift its water to his house. This pump,
which was operated by six negroes, much like an old-time fire
engine, was connected by a pipe with a cypress tank in the garret
of the house, and here the water was stored until needed. From
the tank two other pipes ran to the bathroom. One, carrying cold
water, was a direct line. The other, designed to provide warm
water, ran down the great chimney of the kitchen, and was coiled
inside it like a giant spring.
“The tub itself was of new design, and became the grandfather
of all the bathtubs of to-day. Thompson had it made by James
Guinness, the leading Cincinnati cabinetmaker of those days, and
its material was Nicaragua mahogany. It was nearly seven feet
long and fully four feet wide. To make it watertight, the interior
was lined with sheet lead, carefully soldered at the joints. The
whole contraption weighed about 1,750 pounds, and the floor of
the room in which it was placed had to be reinforced to support
it. The exterior was elaborately polished.
“In this luxurious tub Thompson took two baths on December
20, 1842—a cold one at 8 a.m. and a warm one some time during
the afternoon. The warm water, heated by the kitchen fire,
reached a temperature of 105 degrees. On Christmas day, having
a party of gentlemen to dinner, he exhibited the new marvel to
them and gave an exhibition of its use, and four of them, including
a French visitor, Col. Duchanel, risked plunges into it. The
next day all Cincinnati—then a town of about 100,000 people—had
heard of it, and the local newspapers described it at length
and opened their columns to violent discussions of it.
“The thing, in fact, became a public matter, and before long
there was a bitter and double-headed opposition to the new invention,
which had been promptly imitated by several other wealthy
Cincinnatians. On the one hand it was denounced as an epicurean
and obnoxious toy from England, designed to corrupt the democratic
simplicity of the republic, and on the other hand it was
attacked by the medical faculty as dangerous to health and a certain
inviter of ‘phthisic, rheumatic fevers, inflammation of the
lungs and the whole category of zymotic diseases.’ (I quote from
the Western Medical Repository of April 23, 1843.)
“The noise of the controversy soon reached other cities, and in
more than one place medical opposition reached such strength
that it was reflected in legislation. Late in 1843, for example, the
Philadelphia Common Council considered an ordinance prohibiting
bathing between November 1 and March 15, and it failed of
passage by but two votes. During the same year the legislature
of Virginia laid a tax of $30 a year on all bathtubs that might be
set up, and in Hartford, Providence, Charleston and Wilmington
(Del.) special and very heavy water rates were levied upon those
who had them. Boston early in 1845 made bathing unlawful
except upon medical advice, but the ordinance was never enforced
and in 1862 it was repealed.
“This legislation, I suspect, had some class feeling in it, for
the Thompson bathtub was plainly too expensive to be owned
by any save the wealthy. Indeed, the common price for installing
one in New York in 1845 was $500. Thus the low caste politicians
of the time made capital by fulminating against it, and there is
even some suspicion of political bias in many of the early medical
denunciations. But the invention of the common pine bathtub,
lined with zinc, in 1847, cut off this line of attack, and thereafter
the bathtub made steady progress.
“The zinc tub was devised by John F. Simpson, a Brooklyn
plumber, and his efforts to protect it by a patent occupied the
courts until 1855. But the decisions were steadily against him, and
after 1848 all the plumbers of New York were equipped for putting
in bathtubs. According to a writer in the Christian Register
for July 17, 1857, the first one in New York was opened for traffic
on September 12, 1847, and by the beginning of 1850 there were
already nearly 1,000 in use in the big town.
“After this medical opposition began to collapse, and among
other eminent physicians Dr. Oliver Wendell Holmes declared
for the bathtub, and vigorously opposed the lingering movement
against it in Boston. The American Medical Association held its
annual meeting in Boston in 1849, and a poll of the members in
attendance showed that nearly 55 per cent of them now regarded
bathing as harmless, and that more than 20 per cent advocated it
as beneficial. At its meeting in 1850 a resolution was formally
passed giving the imprimatur of the faculty to the bathtub. The
homeopaths followed with a like resolution in 1853.
“But it was the example of President Millard Fillmore that,
even more than the grudging medical approval, gave the bathtub
recognition and respectability in the United States. While he was
still Vice-President, in March, 1850, he visited Cincinnati on a
stumping tour, and inspected the original Thompson tub.
Thompson himself was now dead, but his bathroom was preserved
by the gentleman who had bought his house from his
estate. Fillmore was entertained in this house and, according to
Chamberlain, his biographer, took a bath in the tub. Experiencing
no ill effects, he became an ardent advocate of the new invention,
and on succeeding to the presidency at Taylor’s death, July 9,
1850, he instructed his secretary of war, Gen. Charles M. Conrad,
to invite tenders for the construction of a bathtub in the White
House.
“This action, for a moment, revived the old controversy, and its
opponents made much of the fact that there was no bathtub at
Mount Vernon or at Monticello, and that all the Presidents and
other magnificoes of the past had got along without any such
monarchical luxuries. The elder Bennett, in the New York
Herald, charged that Fillmore really aspired to buy and install
in the White House a porphyry and alabaster bath that had been
used by Louis Philippe at Versailles. But Conrad, disregarding
all this clamor, duly called for bids, and the contract was presently
awarded to Harper and Gillespie, a firm of Philadelphia engineers,
who proposed to furnish a tub of thin cast iron, capable of
floating the largest man.
“This was installed early in 1851, and remained in service in
the White House until the first Cleveland administration, when
the present enameled tub was substituted. The example of the
President soon broke down all that remained of the old opposition,
and by 1860, according to the newspaper advertisements of
the time, every hotel in New York had a bathtub, and some had
two and even three. In 1862 bathing was introduced into the army
by Gen. McClellan, and in 1870 the first prison bathtub was set
up at Moyamensing Prison, in Philadelphia.
“So much for the history of the bathtub in America. One is
astonished, on looking into it, to find that so little of it has been
recorded. The literature, in fact, is almost nil. But perhaps this
brief sketch will encourage other inquirers and so lay the foundation
for an adequate celebration of the centennial in 1942.”
Varying motives in the fabrication of history lead to varying
methods. When the purposes are moral or political, as
they seem to have been with Parson Weems in his handling
of Washington, there is no deliberate straining at probabilities,
there are no planted clues. But when the purpose is
outright spoofing, as Mencken says it was with the bathtub,
there is frequently a mendacious plant. Samples of these
in Mencken are that he tells you the bathtub’s first American
home was at the intersection of Monastery and Oregon
Streets, in Cincinnati, in the year 1842, and that a certain
reference to bathing comes from Chamberlain’s biography
of President Fillmore. Now you can discover in any big
library, or by writing the friendly librarians of Cincinnati,
that while one of the two named streets, Oregon, may have
existed there in 1842, the second, Monastery, is not listed
until decades later. They will add that streets of these names
have never intersected in that town. At your local public
library they will report on the telephone that they cannot
find any biography of Fillmore by Chamberlain.
Having in part given the victim fair warning, the Mencken
type of spoofer proceeds to be reasonable enough to trap
the unwary. Much of his tale of bathtub vicissitudes is, for
instance, so reasonable superficially, so much in accord with
what has actually been the history of the institution at other
times and in other places, that not only are health commissioners
liable to get caught but they have, on being caught, a
pretty fair excuse. For, after all, you could, from so-called
real facts, obtain approximately the same pictures and pretty
roughly the same morals as you get from the fiction.
Indeed, one of the strongest arguments against troubling
to fabricate history or science is that, with judicious manipulation
and suitable reasoning, you can frequently extract
from ordinary facts tales as pleasing and conclusions as ethical
as are commonly based on those facts-by-definition which
some call fictions.
Mencken probably felt that the numerous planted clews
to his spoofing intent would keep “A Neglected Anniversary”
from remaining long undetected. If so, he discovered
presently that even he had overrated the public’s discrimination.
Then the initial delight with which Mencken had
watched the poor fish biting, started to fade. By 1926 it
seemed to him the yarn was getting altogether too firmly
historical so he began trying to call it off. On May 23 of that
year he owned up that he had invented the tale, pointing out
its absurdities. This confession was printed simultaneously
in thirty American newspapers. One of them, the Boston
Herald, used the article on a leading page, under a four-column
head; three weeks later the same paper reprinted,
as a piece of news, the substance of the story as it had originally
appeared in 1917.
We give below a classified list, which does not attempt to
be complete, of some of the individuals, institutions and
publications that took one or the other side of the ensuing
controversy over the bathtub hoax.
ACCEPTING THE HOAX
Support from Journalists:
Scribner’s, October, 1920.
A booklet entitled The Story of the Bath, published by the
Domestic Engineering Company of Chicago, 1922.
New York Herald, Paris edition, September, 1925, mainly quoting
an article in the New York Sun by Ruth Wakeham.
Chicago Evening American, December 7, 1926, under heading
“For and About Your Home.”
March 21, 1927, Colonel W. G. Archer, representing National
Trade Extension Bureau of the plumbing and heating industry,
in an address before the Clearfield, Pa., Commercial Club at the
Jordan Hotel, Clearfield.
Chiropractor, 1927, an article called Splash, by A. J. Pufahl.
Cleveland Press, November 15, 1927, letter from E. Hershey,
D.C., P.C.
A pamphlet entitled Saga of the Bathtub, by Walt Dennison,
published by the LeRoy Carman Printing Company of Los
Angeles, California, 1929.
American Baptist (Lexington, Kentucky), February 13, 1929, in
an article headed Selected—probably indicating quotation from
some other source.
Baltimore News, March 16, 1929, in a column headed “Baltimore
Day by Day,” by Carrol Dulaney (real name Richard D.
Steuart).
House Beautiful, May, 1930, p. 535.
W. Orton Tewson, October 11, 1930, in a syndicated column,
“The Attic Salt Shaker,” quoting a Dr. Moody (possibly Dr.
W. R. Moody, who had recently printed a life of his father,
Dwight L. Moody).
Golden Book, early in 1931, article by Lenora R. Baxter.
New York Sun, February 17, 1931, review of Puritan’s Progress,
by Arthur Train, indicating the book accepted the hoax as fact.
Baltimore Evening Sun, May 22, 1931, letter signed S. A. Fact.
Tucson Daily Star, December 1, 1931, interview with C. R. King,
manager of the Tucson branch of the Standard Sanitary Manufacturing
Company.
New York Sun, December 22, 1931—quoting the Military Engineer.
New York Sun, October 12, 1933, advertisement of “Blue Coal,”
part of which advertisement was an illustration showing a
policeman, ca. 1842, threatening to arrest a man in a bathtub.
United Feature Syndicate, April 27, 1933, illustration by Russ
Murphy and Ray Nenuskay under the caption “How It Began”—illustration
showing Adam Thompson in his first bathtub
in Cincinnati.
New York Herald Tribune, March 4, 1934, reprinted portions of
above article by Lenora R. Baxter, under heading “Baths in
Disfavor for Long Periods, History Recalls.”
New York Sun, January 6, 1935, news story.
New York Times, August 4, 1935, news story, “The Bathtub
Wins Wider Patronage.”
United Press Red Letter for September 26, 1935, “Bathtub Once
Viewed as Curse.”
J. Vijaya-Tunga, New Statesman (London), October 5, 1935.
Central Press Association, November 15, 1935, Scott’s Scrapbook,
cartoon.
Digest and Review, December, 1935.
Australia Age (Melbourne), December 31, 1935.
Liberty, March 21, 1936.
James N. Kane, Famous First Facts, published by H. W. Wilson
& Co. of New York (no date).
Support from Leaders of Thought:
Dr. John H. Finley (former president of the American Geographical
Society and of the College of the City of New York;
now an editor of the New York Times), in an article in the
Survey, July 15, 1927.
Alexander Woollcott, radio broadcast for February 24, 1935.
Dr. Hans Zinsser (professor in the Medical School of Harvard
University), in Rats, Lice and History, Boston, 1935.
Dr. Shirley W. Wynne (former Commissioner of Health for the
City of New York)—cited ante.
Support from Governmental Agencies:
Federal Housing Administration clip sheet. Vol. 2, No. 9, February,
1935, sent out to newspapers throughout the U.S.
Bulletin of the Department of Health of Kentucky, October,
1935.
EXPOSING THE HOAX
Exposure by Journalists:
Western Newspaper Union, November 28, 1930, syndicated article
by Elmo Scott Watson, under the title “James, Draw My
Bawth”—apparently printed in a great many small papers
throughout the United States.
Martha’s Vineyard Gazette, April and May, 1931.
Macon Telegraph, August 31, 1932.
Philadelphia Evening Public Ledger, January 15, 1935.
Editor and Publisher, February 2, 1935, Marlen Pew, commenting
on the circulation of the bathtub hoax by the Federal Housing
Commission.
Baltimore Evening Sun, April 16, 1935.
Wilmington Evening Journal, June 24, 1935.
Passaic Herald News, July 26, 1935.
New Statesman (London), November 2, 1935, a letter signed
J.M.G., exposing the story as printed in the October 5 issue
of the same magazine.
Mobile Times, December 28, 1935.
Chicago Times, January 23, 1936, editorial headed “A New True
Story,” first quoting a speaker who addressed the members of
the American Institute of Banking in Chicago. The speaker
had related the bathtub story; the editorial then went on to
expose the hoax.
Exposure by Leaders of Thought:
Rev. Nolan R. Best, executive secretary of the Baltimore Federation
of Churches, letter to the editor of Survey, exposing the
article by Dr. John H. Finley. Paul Kellogg, the editor, wrote
to Finley, who replied July 31, 1927: “The bathtub information
was furnished me by a representative of the Cleanliness Institute.”
Curtis D. MacDougal, editor of Evanston, Illinois, News Index,
made an investigation of newspaper hoaxes, exposing, among
others, the bathtub hoax. A summary of his report was printed
in the Editor and Publisher, January 12, 1935. Later he embodied
his material in an article for the Journalism Quarterly.
A summary of that article was printed in the Worcester, Mass.,
Gazette for August 10, 1935. Dr. MacDougal printed a second
article on the subject in the Evanston News Index, August 9,
1935; in it he discussed especially the apparent impossibility of
putting such hoaxes down.
Exposure by Governmental Agencies:
Bureau of Municipal Research, Philadelphia. The Bureau’s exposure
of the hoax was printed in the Philadelphia Evening
Bulletin, July 10, 1933, under the heading Bathtub Myth
Exploded.[23]
History, whether real or fabricated, may lose or gain,
may remain unchanged or may change with time. These
things are handily illustrated by coupling statements from
Mencken of 1917 and Wynne of 1936:
Mencken: “Boston early in 1845 made bathing unlawful except
upon medical advice, but the ordinance was never enforced
and in 1862 it was repealed.”
Wynne: “The city fathers in the good town of Boston ruled
that it was unlawful to take a bath except on a doctor’s advice;
and that law remained in effect from 1854[24] until 1862—think
of it.”
Mencken: “... the Philadelphia Common Council considered
an ordinance prohibiting bathing between November 1 and
March 15, and it failed of passage by but two votes.”
Wynne: “The law in Philadelphia was that you couldn’t take a
bath between November and March.”
Mencken: “... in Hartford, Providence, Charleston and
Wilmington (Del.) special and very heavy water rates were
levied upon those who had them (bathtubs).”
Wynne: “The cities of Hartford and Providence discouraged
bathing by raising the charges for water supply about 400 per
cent for people who owned bathtubs.”
Mencken: “After this medical opposition began to collapse, and
among other eminent physicians Dr. Oliver Wendell Holmes
declared for the bathtub.... The American Medical Association
held its annual meeting in Boston in 1849, and a poll of the members
in attendance showed that nearly 55 per cent of them now
regarded bathing as harmless, and that more than 20 per cent
advocated it as beneficial. At its meeting in 1850 a resolution was
formally passed giving the imprimatur of the faculty to the
bathtub.”
Wynne: “In 1847, in Newport, Rhode Island, a doctor tried to
convert the people to the habit of washing, though at the same
time he conscientiously warned them that the first bath or two
might affect their hearts. The American Medical Association immediately
opposed him and said that bathing was NOT compulsory
to health, and the people needn’t wash unless they just
wanted to do so for some whimsical reason of their own.”
That there is pleasant edification for believers in Menckenized
history we infer from its popularity; that the employment
of the many learned and famous commentators, disseminators
and denouncers has been remunerative, we hope;
that there is occasionally a spot cash return even to the man
in the street we can show by an example:
A well-named periodical, Liberty, which encourages
among other freedoms the one to believe, has a feature,
“Twenty Questions.” For those who, in view of the following,
may desire to try making an honest dollar, we quote
that “Liberty will pay $1 for any question accepted and
published. If the same question is suggested by more than
one person, the first suggestion received will be the one
considered. Address Twenty Questions, P. O. Box 380,
Grand Central Station, New York, N. Y.” Some time before
March 21, 1936 (for we quote from that issue) they had,
then, paid one dollar for what appeared on that date, p. 39,
as question No. 17:
“In which city of the United States was it against the law to
take a bath in 1845?”
As directed, we turn to p. 48 and find under 17 the
answer:
“In Boston, Massachusetts. It was then deemed unlawful to
take a bath except when prescribed by a physician.”
When, belated, I discovered this in Liberty, I wondered
how the Bostonians were taking what must be a steady barrage,
and wrote the Commissioner of Public Health, Dr.
Henry D. Chadwick, who replied from the State House,
Boston, July 16, 1936:
“The story which you quote from the magazine, Liberty, is
periodically cropping out in various parts of the country.
“I obtained from W. J. Doyle, City Clerk of Boston, what I
consider a true statement of Boston’s attitude toward bathing in
the early days, and I enclose a copy.”
The Doyle statement said in part:
“In several forms during the past ten years an item has appeared
in various publications stating ... that the City of Boston
at some time by ordinance forbade the use of bathtubs, or bathing
except on the advice of a physician.
“The story has not the slightest foundation in fact. No such
ordinance was ever adopted either by the Town or City of Boston
from its settlement in 1630 up to the present time....
“... In 1843 an ordinance was enacted requiring that all prisoners
in the Jail or House of Correction should be given a weekly
bath. So much as regards bathing except on advice of a physician.
The statement that bathtubs were prohibited is so silly as to
hardly merit denial, but it is usually made referring to a mythical
ordinance supposedly adopted in 1848 and not repealed until 1870.
No such ordinance was ever adopted and no such ordinance was
ever submitted to the City Council.
W. J. Doyle,
City Clerk.”
I was evidently a long way from being the first to query
Boston officials on Menckenized history, for the Clerk’s
original statement, of which I received the above copy, was
dated May 24, 1929. Incidentally, that dating explains his
reference to “the last ten years.” For Mencken’s “Neglected
Anniversary” had been published less than twelve years
before.
How the Mencken fabricated knowledge is being used
towards the end of its second decade has cultural significance.
We take a few samples.
Hans Zinsser, A.B., A.M., M.D., D.Sc. (hon.), is professor
in the Harvard Medical School. During 1935 his Rats, Lice
and History, a piece of trenchant writing, was a best seller,
one of the much read books that was also much discussed,
filled with novel and startling facts. One of these (perhaps
no longer exactly novel) is on p. 285:
“The first bathtub didn’t reach America, we believe, until about
1840.”
During February 1935, the Federal Housing Administration
issued, in Clip Sheet, Vol. 2, No. 9, a statement on bathtub
history:
“In 1842 Adam Thompson startled neighbors in Cincinnati by
installing a box-shaped affair lined with lead in his home. Shortly
after, in 1845, historians on the subject say the city of Boston
passed an ordinance making it illegal to bathe unless a doctor
had so ordered. Not until the early days of the Civil War was the
act removed from that city’s statute books....
“Further indication of the manner in which early lawmakers
viewed the matter of personal cleanliness is seen in a resolution
introduced about 1843 in Philadelphia under which bathing
would have been prohibited by the city fathers from November
to March! As it turned out, the suggestion was tabled.
“When Millard Fillmore became President, the tide turned, due
principally to his installing a tub in the White House....”
But on July 25, 1936, Robert B. Smith, Assistant to the
Administrator, Federal Housing Administration, wrote:
“After this story was published, we found that the statements
made in it could not be substantiated so far as ordinances and
laws against bathing were concerned. The Health Commissioners
of Boston and Philadelphia both wrote us that they could find no
trace of any anti-bathing ordinances in their records....
“After this bathtub experience, we took care to have the statements
made in the Clip Sheet double-checked....”
August 4, 1935, the New York Times was celebrating
progress in America’s metropolis. East Side tenants had
made “demands for the installation of that former luxury,”
the bathtub. This reminded the Times that:
“It was with fear and travail that bathtubs were introduced
in these United States. One of the first bathrooms appeared in
Cincinnati, Ohio, about 1850, and certain clergymen hearing of it
preached that such luxury meant nothing less than degeneracy.
The fading of the glory that was Greece and the collapse of the
grandeur that was Rome were freely mentioned. The baths of
wicked Caracalla also were cited.”
The Bulletin of the Department of Health of Kentucky,
October 1935, said on p. 75:
“The first bathtub in the United States was installed in a Cincinnati
home in 1842. It was made of mahogany and lined with
sheet lead. Newspapers denounced it as undemocratic vanity.
Boston, in 1845, made bathing unlawful except when prescribed
by a physician. Virginia soaked the rich by taxing bathtubs $30
per year.”
A letter from J. Vijaya-Tunga was printed in the New
Statesman, London, for October, 1935. We quote an extract
as reprinted in the Australia Age (Melbourne) for December
31, 1935:
“The first American bathtub was built in 1830. It was made of
mahogany and was 7 feet long and 4 feet wide. It was lined with
sheet lead and weighed more than 2,000 pounds. The invention
was not popular. Boston authorities made bathing unlawful, and
Virginia put a tax of $300 on each bathtub. Fifteen years later
Boston declared bathtubs illegal, except on medical advice.”
The Age did not fall for the hoax but the New Statesman
apparently did.
The Chicago Times of January 23, 1936, quotes a speaker
addressing a Chicago meeting of the American Institute of
Banking:
“‘The hardest job on earth for the average man,’ he said, ‘is
to sit and think. He’ll sit all right, but he won’t think, and that
is why the public always detests a new idea. Why, do you know
that when the first bathtubs were introduced in America intellectual
Boston passed an ordinance making it unlawful to bathe in a
bathtub except on medical advice?’”
The Times treated this speaker editorially as the victim
of a hoax which, perhaps naturally, did not influence Vice
Presidential candidate Frank Knox’s Chicago Daily News,
which said July 11, 1936, under the heading “Bathtub
Suffered Same Fate in U. S. as Most Pioneers,” that
“America’s first bathtub, according to a recent issue of Architecture,
was built in Cincinnati in 1842 and was made of mahogany
and lined with sheet lead.
“While still accepting the oft-quoted relationship of cleanliness
and godliness, the people of the day were not receptive to such
fantastic innovations, and the tub, suffering the fate of most
pioneering ventures, was denounced as a luxurious and undemocratic
vanity. Doctors, according to the magazine, termed it a
menace to health.
“In 1843 Philadelphia prohibited by ordinance bathing between
Nov. 1 and March 15, and Boston made bathing unlawful except
when prescribed by a physician. Also, bathtubs were taxed $30
yearly.”
A paper of which Knox is publisher stops in the heat of
the Landon-Knox campaign to support Mencken as a historian;
Mencken swerves from other forms of history-making
the while to campaign for Knox as Vice President.
With these things happening at and just after the Republican
convention, we feel that God’s in His Heaven and that all
should be well at any rate with the making of history.
[1] This was written when Gertrude Ederle was being showered with ticker
tape. Neither she nor the ticker stood quite so well three years later.
[2] This was written in 1927. The press version of the “Blond” Eskimo
story, as opposed to my book version, is still going strong in 1936.
[3] It can be argued that the first European discovery of the Northwest
Passage was by Thomas Simpson (with whom Peter Warren Dease was
associated) in 1839. If this be not admitted, then the claim falls to John Rae
who worked both before and after the Third Franklin Expedition, on which
the Passage was also discovered. Thus the McClure discovery in 1853 was
either the third or fourth.
[4] Appendix X, Natural History, (p. clxxxix), Journal of a Voyage for
the Discovery of a North-West Passage, 1819-20, by William Edward Parry,
London, 1821.
[5]Three Years of Arctic Service, by Adolphus W. Greely, New York, 1886,
p. 221.
[11] Tyson’s winter latitude, to which he here refers, was 81⅔° N. For
our quotation see Tyson’s Arctic Experiences, New York, 1874, p. 195.
[12] Dr. Nelson died some five years after this paper was printed.
[13] Most authorities consider 105 to 110 pounds as very large for northern
male wolves.
[14] The United States has long had this type of service. As mentioned, ante,
it is administered from Washington by the Biological Survey.
[15] J. Stokley Ligon, American student of wild life, says: “I am inclined
to agree with Dr. Nelson regarding young of a previous year not banding
with parent animals and their young of a current year.” (Letter March 17,
1928.) He writes in the same letter: “I have never observed the big packs of
wolves one hears and reads about.”
[16] Since this was written it has been ascertained that Oimekon, about 300
miles southeast and 200 miles south of the Arctic Circle, is colder than Verkhoyansk,
and is therefore now the coldest known spot on earth. Like
Verkhoyansk, the Oimekon vicinity is forested.
[17] Most things in this chapter are documented, but this letter is paraphrased
from a vivid memory. Some details may be wrong, but the general trend is
right.
[18] In 1904-06 I was fellow and assistant instructor in anthropology at
Harvard. I had to read the examination papers but my seniors made up the
questions. It was a standard joke with them to slip in somewhere: “In what
country do the Eskimos live?” A good percentage of Harvard men, ranging
from sophomore to senior, could be depended upon to answer: “The Eskimos
live in Iceland.” That, my colleagues thought, was a pretty good joke on me.
[19] We have prints of the photographs described above and two additional
ones—another of the apartment house and one that may be of Olof by
herself, though it is most too good looking and may be of Miss Finch
at the age of about 10.
[20] We note here some of the ways in which this ties in with, and fails to
tie in with, what Schoolcraft learned. Olof told him that it was a Mr.
Slayton who managed her lecture career, that after his death she lived with
Mrs. Slayton for a number of years. See his account for why she left them.
Then Olof met some people named Stone (I. K. Stone, Maple Street, Battle
Creek, Michigan) who took her to Battle Creek where she had then (1922)
been living for two or three years.
[21] Youthfulness at the time Olof left Greenland, as hereinafter stated, is
said to have been useful in circus sideshow and on the lyceum platform—if
challenged Miss Krarer used to say, modestly, that since she had for
sources only vague childhood memories she might very well go wrong on
particulars. But in general, she maintained, she was conveying an undeceptive
first-hand impression of Eskimos and of Eskimoland.
[22] The article was printed with an editorial note: “Here’s a series of
inspiring bath hour thoughts suggested by H. L. Mencken’s discovery,
through official channels, that America’s first bathtub was built in Cincinnati
and put in operation on December 20, 1842. Adam Thompson, its founder,
got the idea on his visit to England, where Lord John Russell had started
the custom of bathing fourteen years before. So, if any of the next best
authors spring a freshly tubbed Englishman on you in a story of the revolution,
you’ll know he’s phony.”
[23] Mencken’s own summary of the first decade of struggle over the bathtub
hoax is given in his Prejudices, Sixth Series, New York, 1927, pp.
194-201.
[24] The discrepancy between this 1854 and Mencken’s 1845 may well be due
to a mere transposition of figures.
Transcriber’s Notes:
Variations in spelling and hyphenation are retained.